130+ Easy Vegan Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegan/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 12 Dec 2025 16:51:32 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 130+ Easy Vegan Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegan/ 32 32 Thanksgiving Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 24 Nov 2025 20:47:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84688 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the…]]>
Aysegul from the front view.

When I think about Thanksgiving, my mind immediately goes to the turkey, all the cozy vegetable sides, and of course, the pies. What we do not often think about is having something on the lighter side.

I first made this fall fruit salad a few years ago for a big family gathering where we had both kids and older relatives at the table. 

The pies still stole the show, but a few people quietly thanked me for having an option that felt a little lighter without taking away from the holiday spirit. I especially love it because:

  • It uses a mix of everyday fall fruit like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranates that you probably have on hand.
  • The maple-citrus dressing comes together quickly and helps keep the apples and pears from browning.

Yes, there is a bit of chopping, but once everything is in the bowl, it adds something fresh to all the richer dishes on the table.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the salad and just a few basic ingredients for the dressing.

You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card, and below are some notes from my recipe testing. 

Fruit Salad Ingredients

Fruits used in the recipe in small bowls from the top view.

Apples: You can easily make this fall fruit salad with one variety of apples, but if you have it, combining two types, like Gala or Honeycrisp with Fuji, gives a way better balance of sweetness and texture. If you prefer a little tartness, you can also mix in one Granny Smith apple. There are no strict rules here, just pick apples that are firm and not overly ripe.

Pears: The same principle goes for pears as well. Bartlet and Anjou are my favorites, but any type would work. When shopping, choose pears that are ripe but still firm so they hold their shape in the salad. 

Grapes: I’m using seedless green grapes for their sweet-tart flavor, but red grapes would work as well. Go with whichever you like best, but I recommend choosing seedless grapes for the best texture in the salad. I like to cut them in half, but if they are too large, you can quarter them as well.

Oranges: Any type of oranges, Navel, Cara Cara, or even Blood Oranges would work beautifully in this autumn fruit salad recipe. You can cut them into small cubes or section them if you have a few extra minutes.

If you need a shortcut, you can also use canned mandarin oranges, but keep in mind that most brands have added sugars, so your Thanksgiving fruit salad will be sweeter. Regardless, if you go down that route, be sure to drain them well.

Kiwi: Look for kiwi that is a little soft when you press it, soft enough to be sweet, but not mushy.

Pomegranate seeds: I love adding pomegranate to this salad because it feels so festive and adds a bright, tart flavor. You can certainly de-seed it yourself, but nowadays, stores sell fresh arils ready to use, which is definitely a good time saver.

If you do not have pomegranate seeds or prefer an alternative, dried cranberries are a good substitute. The dried fruit would give a welcome chewiness and a bit more sweetness to the overall recipe.

Pecans: This is my secret ingredient. The salad tasted good the first time I tried it without pecans, but once I added them, it completely transformed the dish, taking it to a whole other level. They add the best crunch. Walnuts could work too, but pecans are my favorite here.

If you prefer a nut-free option, you can omit it or use pumpkin seeds instead.

Dressing Ingredients

The dressing for this salad is light and simple, and the best part is that it comes together in less than a minute. You will need:

The dressing ingredients from the top view.

Maple syrup: You can use either maple syrup or honey in this dressing. I also recommend adjusting the amount based on how sweet your fruit is. If your fruit is very sweet, you may want a little less, and vice versa.

Orange juice: I use freshly squeezed orange juice because it not only flavors the salad but also helps keep the apples and pears from browning with its acidity. You could also use store-bought orange juice, just make sure to choose one without added sugars since both the fruit and maple syrup are already plenty sweet.

Ground cinnamon: I’m using it here because it complements the fall fruits very well, but you can also use apple pie spice or pumpkin pie spice if you prefer a slightly different fall flavor.

How to Make Fruit Salad For Thanksgiving

When I first tested this recipe, I chopped all the fruit, set it in a bowl, and then mixed the dressing. The apples and pears started browning right away, which wasn’t ideal.

What worked so much better was starting with the dressing in a large bowl, then adding the fruit as I cut it. The acid in the orange juice helps slow browning and keeps everything looking fresh. So, grab a big bowl and follow along.

A collage of images showing the steps of make the dressing and adding the apples and pears in there.

Step 1 – Make the dressing: Add the maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon to a large salad bowl, whisking until well combined.

Step 2 – Prep and add the fruit: Once the dressing is ready, start chopping the fruit. I like to start with apples and pears first so I can ensure they interact with the acid in the bowl, which slows browning. From there, you can continue with kiwi, pomegranate seeds, oranges, and grapes.

Gently toss all your fruit to coat it with the dressing.

Thanksgiving fruit salad recipe in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 3 – Add the pecans and garnish: Right before serving, add the pecans to keep them crisp. If you want to add a little color and freshness, add a handful of torn fresh mint leaves. Give everything one last gentle toss, and it’s ready to serve.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Serving Tips

While this Thanksgiving fruit salad is always best the day it’s made, you can also prepare it in advance if you coat the fruit well with the citrus dressing. Here’s how to make it ahead, store it, and serve it so it still tastes fresh:

Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit salad 2-3 days in advance, which is especially helpful for busy holiday cooking. Just be sure your apples and pears are well coated in the citrus dressing, as the orange juice helps prevent them from browning. I also keep the pecans separate until right before serving so they don’t get soggy.

Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It will taste its best within the first 2-3 days. If the fruit looks a little soft after it’s been in the fridge, a squeeze of fresh orange juice or lemon juice, or a small drizzle of maple syrup or honey, brightens it back up.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing fruit salad. The fruit becomes mushy once thawed and loses its fresh texture.

Expert Tips for Perfect Fruit Salad for Your Thanksgiving Table

Slightly ripened fruit works best: When shopping for this recipe, take a few minutes to pick fruit that’s ripe but not overly soft. You want that sweet-juicy moment when you bite in, without the fruit turning mushy once everything is mixed.

Coat apples and pears in citrus right away: Apples and pears oxidize quickly, so I always mix the orange dressing in the bottom of the bowl first, then add the apples and pears. The citrus coats the fruit the moment it goes in, keeping it fresh.

Cut the fruit into equal sizes: Aim for roughly ½-inch bite-sized pieces so the salad feels balanced and you get a little bit of everything in each bite.

Add pecans right before serving: Pecans soften if they sit in the dressing too long, so add them in at the end. If you have a few extra minutes and want to take this fall fruit salad recipe up a notch, toast your pecans in a dry pan for a few minutes to bring out more of their earthy flavors.

Use a mix of seasonal colors and textures: It’s optional, but I really encourage you to play with different varieties of fruit. For example, instead of sticking to one type of orange, try using both a Navel and a Cara Cara. You can do the same with apples and pears. It gives the salad a nicer mix of textures and a little more interest in every bite.

Chill before serving: Refrigerating the salad for 10-15 minutes before serving is optional, but it makes this fruit salad even more refreshing.

Serve in small jars: When I make this for Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving, I like to spoon it into little jars, almost like jam jars. It makes it easier because it is already portioned out. Plus, your guests won’t have to worry about it getting lost on a crowded plate.

Fruit salad for Thanksgiving in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve It With

This autumn fruit salad is versatile and pairs well with so many things, whether you’re serving it to kids, having it for breakfast, or adding it to a holiday spread. Here are a few ideas:

  • If you’re serving this to kids, you can add my Fruit Dip Recipe on the side. It makes the salad feel more like a treat and is always a favorite with little ones.
  • You can also spoon some fruit salad over a bowl of  Vanilla Yogurt for a quick breakfast or snack. 
  • And if you want to take things up a notch for the holidays, serve the fruit salad with a dollop of my light and airy Maple Whipped Cream. It adds just the right touch of sweetness, making the whole dish feel extra special.

FAQs

How do you keep fruit salad from turning brown?

The best way to prevent apples and pears from browning is to coat them with an acidic ingredient, such as orange juice, which helps slow down the oxidation.

Can I make a fruit salad the night before?

Yes, this fruit salad holds up well when made the night before. Just be sure the apples and pears are fully coated in the orange juice mixture (to prevent them from browning), then give the salad a gentle toss before serving.

What fruits should I avoid in fruit salad?

Most people don’t like adding bananas to fruit salads because they turn mushy as they sit. In my opinion, it is a personal preference, and there are no strict rules. Instead, the important thing is to pick fruit that is neither overly ripe nor soft, and vice versa.

Can I use canned fruit in Thanksgiving fruit salad?

Yes, you technically can. However, keep in mind that most canned fruit is packed in a sugary liquid or juice, which will make your fruit salad sweeter. If you decide to go down that route, be sure to adjust the amount of maple syrup you use in the dressing so it is not overly sweet.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Fruit Salads You Might Like

If you enjoyed this Thanksgiving fruit salad, here are a few more fresh and delicious fruit salads I think you’ll love:

  • If you want something light to enjoy in the mornings, my Breakfast Fruit Salad is a simple recipe you can also make ahead. It’s easy to make and perfect for quick breakfasts or weekend brunch.
  • For something more festive, my Christmas Fruit Salad includes a mix of seasonal fruit tossed in a similar maple-citrus dressing. It’s a great way to add a pop of festive color to your Christmas celebrations.
Thanksgiving fruit salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Thanksgiving Fruit Salad Recipe

A crowd pleaser, this Thanksgiving Fruit Salad is a lighter addition to your dessert lineup made with fall fruits like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranate arils. No cooking required and comes together quickly.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 208kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon or apple spice

For the fruit:

  • 2 medium apples cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 2 medium pears cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 1 cup seedless green grapes cut in half
  • 1 cup pomegranate arils
  • 2 oranges cut into small pieces ~ 2 cups
  • 1 kiwi cut into cubes ~ ½ cup
  • 1 cup pecans or walnuts

Optional Garnish:

  • A handful of fresh mint leaves torn

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, mix together maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon in a large bowl until combined.
  • Add in the cubed apples and pears to the bowl and give it a quick toss to ensure they are coated with the dressing (aka the acid in the orange juice) to prevent browning.
  • Then add in the grapes, pomegranate arils, oranges, and kiwi to the bowl. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, add the pecans and toss. If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8-9 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe a day (or two) in advance. Just follow the recipe as written (except adding the pecans and mint garnish), place in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. When ready to serve, transfer it to a serving platter and garnish with pecans and fresh mint leaves, if using.

Nutrition

Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/#comments Tue, 07 Oct 2025 19:43:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20747 If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone…]]>

If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone else is vegan (and gluten-free, of course). You need a dish that can compete with turkey while meeting all the dietary requirements.

That’s where this Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe comes in. I came up with it when my best friend showed up with her new boyfriend to last year’s Thanksgiving dinner, who happens to be vegan. And let me tell you, it served its purpose.

It worked beautifully as a plant-based holiday main dish for him, while the rest of the crowd enjoyed it as a side dish with turkey. The good news is that you can serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, making it a no-fuss recipe that checks all the boxes.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is one of those recipes that includes all the best festive fall ingredients. The full list with exact amounts is in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Acorn squash: While it may be available year-round in most grocery stores, it is at its peak in the fall and winter months. To choose the best squash, look for a mix of dark green and orange skin colors that look slightly dull (not shiny). It should feel firm and heavy. You can use traditional green acorn squash or try white, golden, or even carnival squash. 

Quinoa: Use the type of quinoa you prefer, such as white, red, black, or a mix of all three. You can cook quinoa on the stove, make microwave quinoa, or even make pressure cooker quinoa for a hands-off method. If you are not a fan of quinoa, you can swap it with cooked wild rice, farro, or couscous.

Apples:  I love using Fuji apples here, but Gala and Honeycrisp also work. If you like a tangier bite, go for Granny Smith. You can also swap the apples for pears for a sweeter bite.

Dried Fruit: I prefer dried cranberries for this recipe, but I like to chop them so they are easier to chew. You can also mix it up with other dried fruits, such as chopped apricots or dates.

Nuts: Pecans are my favorite here, but you can use walnuts, almonds, or whichever nut you prefer. 

For a nut-free option, try toasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. I usually opt for roasted nuts for extra flavor, but raw ones also work well.

Herbs: I am using fresh parsley, but you can also add other fresh holiday herbs like thyme, sage, or rosemary. During the fall, stores like Trader Joe’s often have holiday herb bundles, and they work perfectly here.

Optional Additions:

This is one of those recipes you can really customize and make your own. Here are a few of my favorite ways to mix it up:

Pomegranate Arils: For an extra fall touch, add a handful on top for a pop of color and tartness.

Maple syrup: If you enjoy the salty-sweet combination, whisk a tablespoon of maple syrup with olive oil and brush it over the squash prior to sprinkling it with the spice mixture.

Chickpeas: For a protein boost and a more filling dish (especially if you are serving it as a vegan main dish), you can stir in a 15-oz can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas into the stuffing.

Mushrooms: For a distinctive yet delicious umami boost, consider adding sautéed or roasted mushrooms to the filling. 

Cheese: If you don’t mind making the dish vegetarian, you can garnish it with a handful of crumbled feta or Parmesan cheese for a creamy and salty bite.

How to Make Roasted Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash

From start to finish, this vegan stuffed squash takes less than an hour to make. The process consists of three parts: roasting the acorn squash, preparing the quinoa and apple filling while it bakes, and filling the roasted squash with the stuffing. Here’s how I do it: 

Images showing how to cut acorn squash for stuffing.

Step 1 – Cut the Acorn Squash: You should exercise extreme caution when cutting acorn squash, especially if you have kids around. Start with a sharp knife to make the job easier and safer. 

First, cut a thin slice off the bottom so it can sit flat on your cutting board. Then cut from top to bottom vertically, pressing the tip of the knife into the center and working your way down until you have two halves. 

Lastly, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits inside. You can toss these or bake them; they make a delicious crunchy snack. 

Photos showing how to season and prepare acorn squash for roasting.

Step 2 – Season and Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 

Mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Brush the cut sides of the squash with a little olive oil and sprinkle it with the spice mixture.  

Place the acorn squash halves cut-side down to help the edges caramelize and keep the flesh tender. Roast for about 40 minutes, until you can easily slide a fork through the meat. Your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking.

A collage of images showing the quinoa filling and stuffing the roasted squash.

Step 3 – Make the Quinoa Filling: While the squash is roasting, sauté the onion and celery in a pan over medium-high heat until softened for 8-10 minutes, stirring frequently.

Then, add the apples and cook until they’re just soft enough, but not mushy. Stir in the garlic, cooked quinoa, cranberries, and pecans. Let it sit so the quinoa absorbs all the flavors, and add the parsley at the very end.

Step 4 – Assemble and Serve: Remove the roasted acorn squash halves from the oven and let them cool for 10 minutes. Then flip and fill each half with the quinoa mixture.

The acorn squash filling/stuffing recipe below yields 3-4 cups of filling. If you have leftovers, you can enjoy them as a side dish or a quick lunch the next day. It can also be served as a standalone side dish.

You can serve your filled acorn squash right away, or optionally, for a crispy, golden topping, return the stuffed squash to the oven and bake for an additional 10 minutes until the pecans are toasted and the quinoa looks golden brown. Garnish with fresh parsley, pomegranate arils, and your preferred toppings before serving.

Make Ahead, Storage & Reheating & Instructions

I love making this stuffed vegan squash recipe not only because it is a feast for the eyes, but also because you can easily prepare it ahead and serve it warm or cold, making it easy to incorporate into your holiday meal prep schedule.

Make Ahead: You can prepare the quinoa stuffing 1-2 days in advance, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. You can also roast the squash halves a day ahead, let them cool to room temperature, and refrigerate. When you are ready to serve, reheat the filling, stuff the squash, and warm them in the oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through.

Alternatively, you can assemble the whole thing a day in advance, bring to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container. An hour before serving, you can reheat it in a low-heat (275°F (135°C)) oven for 15 minutes, or until heated through.

Storage: After the stuffed squash has cooled to room temperature, it can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. The leftovers make the most delicious lunch the next day.

Freezing: While you can technically freeze baked acorn squash, I don’t recommend it. It causes the squash to release extra water when thawed, resulting in a mushy texture and minimal flavor.

Expert Tips for Success

Microwave before cutting: Acorn squash can be hard to cut, especially if it is newly harvested. If you are having trouble cutting it, you can place it in the microwave for 1-2 minutes in 30-second increments to soften. Keep a close eye on it and check often rather than letting it run the whole time.

Cutting vertically vs horizontally: As you can see in the pictures, I cut my acorn squash vertically, but it is a personal preference. You can cut it horizontally if it is easier for you. However, be sure to cut a small amount from the top and bottom so they can sit straight after they are flipped.

Extra Caramelization: This is optional, but for a more golden, caramelized finish, flip the roasted squash cut-side up and place it under the broiler for 1-2 minutes after it’s finished baking. Just keep a close eye on it so it doesn’t burn.

Roast cut-side down: This is a crucial step, as it helps the edges caramelize and makes the flesh extra tender and sweet. While I didn’t think it was necessary, if you prefer, you can flip them at the end and put them under the broiler for a minute or two for even more caramelization.

Cook quinoa with stock: One of the best ways to season quinoa is by using stock instead of water as the cooking liquid. I usually use my homemade vegetable stock I make from scraps, but store-bought vegetable stock would also work. I highly recommend rinsing quinoa before cooking for optimal flavor.

Keep the filling moist: If you make it earlier in the day (or reheating), the quinoa mixture may dry out slightly. You can stir in a splash of water or stock to keep it fluffy and add more moisture.

Toast the nuts: Yes, it is an extra step, but toasting pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in a dry skillet takes just a few minutes and is a major upgrade in the overall taste of the filling. So, if you have a couple of extra minutes, place the nuts/seeds in an empty skillet and toast (keeping a super close eye on them) for 5-7 minutes over medium heat before adding them to the filling.

What to Serve with Quinoa-Stuffed Acorn Squash

This quinoa stuffed squash is one of those recipes that can play more than one role on your holiday table. You can enjoy it as a main dish for a vegetarian or vegan dinner, or serve it as a side alongside your favorite holiday mains. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

FAQs

Can I make this ahead for Thanksgiving?

Yes, you can cook the quinoa filling a day or two before and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can also roast the squash halves ahead of time and store them refrigerated for up to three days.

Can I freeze stuffed acorn squash?

Technically, yes, but I do not recommend it. The squash becomes watery and loses its texture once thawed.

Can I use butternut squash instead?

Yes, butternut squash also works. You can roast butternut squash halves or air-fry them and fill them with the quinoa mixture, following the same recipe.

What’s the safest way to cut acorn squash?

The secret is to use a sharp knife and start by slicing a thin piece off the bottom so the squash sits steady. Then cut from top to bottom to split it in half, and if it feels too tough to cut, microwave it for a minute or two to soften the skin.

What if I don’t like quinoa?

You can easily swap the quinoa for cooked rice, wild rice, farro, or even couscous for a similar filling.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Acorn Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this vegan acorn squash recipe, you might like these other fall favorite squash recipes:

  • If you are craving a fall salad, try my Acorn Squash Salad. Made with arugula, pepitas, cranberries, goat cheese, and pomegranate seeds, it has everything you crave during the holiday season.
  • Another reader favorite squash recipe is my Roasted Acorn Squash Slices! It takes the basic acorn squash but turns it into an easy side dish with a quick maple-cinnamon glaze.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Quinoa stuffed acorn squash garnished with pomegranate seeds.
Print

Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash Recipe

Tender roasted squash halves filled with a savory-sweet quinoa stuffing of apples, cranberries, pecans, and fresh herbs. Vegan, gluten-free, and make-ahead friendly, this is the perfect holiday main or side dish.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

To Roast the Acorn Squash

  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 large acorn squash cut in half and seeds removed

To Make the Stuffing:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-size / chopped (~1 1/4 cup)
  • 3 stalks celery chopped (~3/4 cup)
  • 1 apple peeled and cut into small ½ inch cubes
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 ½ cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa
  • ½ cup dried cranberries chopped finely
  • ½ cup pecans coarsely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, plus more as garnish
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a small bowl, mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper.
  • Brush the insides of acorn squash with olive oil.
    Acorn squash halves getting seasoned and roasted on a sheet pan.
  • Sprinkle each half with the spice mixture, ensuring that it is evenly distributed.
  • Arrange the squash cut-side down and roast for 40 minutes, or until a knife inserted into the flesh of one of the squash comes out easily. Let it cool on the counter for 5 minutes before stuffing.
  • While the acorn squash is roasting, make the stuffing. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the apple and cook for 3-4 more minutes, or until the apples are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    A collage of images showing the quinoa stuffing and as the acorn squash is getting stuffed.
  • Add the cooked quinoa, cranberries, pecans, and season with salt and pepper. Give it a stir and turn the heat to medium-low. Let it cook for 7-8 minutes, stirring occasionally to ensure it remains moist. If you feel like it is drying, add in a few tablespoons of water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. At the last minute, stir in the parsley.
  • To assemble, fill each roasted acorn squash half with the stuffing and garnish it with pomegranate seeds (if using) and more parsley before serving.
    Vegan and gluten free quinoa stuffed acorn squash on a plate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 halved stuffed acorn squash, which is ideal for serving 8 as a side dish. If you are serving it as a main dish, I would recommend serving 2 halves per person. The nutritional values listed below are per serving of one half.
  • Filling: Take the time to cut up your apple evenly to ensure that you get some with each bite. I also recommend chopping up the cranberries for the same reason.
  • Make ahead: You can roast the acorn squash and make the filling a day (or two) in advance. Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Assemble and bake right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature and store in the fridge in an airtight container for 3-4 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/feed/ 30
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Vegan Apple Crisp https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/#comments Sun, 14 Sep 2025 13:56:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35696 Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we…]]>

Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we always come home with more apples than we need. When that happens, this simple vegan apple crisp is the first thing I turn to.

What I love about this version is that it delivers all the comfort of a traditional crisp but with a lighter approach. Instead of the usual butter-flour-sugar crumble, the topping is made with rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, and a touch of coconut oil.

It’s still golden, crisp, and satisfying, just a little more in line with how I like to bake at home.

And the best part? It’s vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, so it’s one of those desserts you can easily share or enjoy yourself, no special occasion needed.

Ingredients You’ll Need

As it is with any fruit crisp recipe, this no-sugar-added apple crisp recipe consists of two sets of ingredients: the apple layer and the crispy topping. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes on  key ingredients to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for butterless apple crisp from the top view.

For The Apple Layer:

Apples: You can use any type of apples you like. Use one type of apple or a combination of apples that offer different flavors. I usually use Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp apples, as they are sweeter than most other types, which helps make the crisp minimally sweetened. I also like to incorporate a Granny Smith apple for a little tartness.

Maple syrup: I use a small amount of maple syrup to coat the apples, but you can also use one tablespoon of coconut sugar, brown sugar, agave, or even regular sugar.

Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brightens everything up and keeps your apples from browning before baking. For this recipe, I wouldn’t recommend bottled juice.

Salt: I use kosher salt here. Don’t skip it, because even that tiny pinch enhances the sweetness coming from apples and makes the crisp taste richer.

Arrowroot powder: This helps the apple juices thicken as they bake, so you don’t end up with a watery crisp. An equal amount of cornstarch would be a great alternative.

For The Crisp Topping:

Oats: Use rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) for the best chewy texture. Quick oats will not work as they are thinner and tend to disappear into the bake. If you are curious about the difference, check out my Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats guide for a full breakdown.

If you are following a gluten-free diet, make sure to purchase gluten-free certified rolled oats.

Almond flour: Almond flour and almond meal both work in this recipe. I often use Blue Diamond Almond Flour because it is finely ground and easy to find, but Trader Joe’s almond meal is a good choice, too. 

If you can’t find almond flour at the store (or need a cheaper alternative), you can make it at home following my comprehensive guide on How to Make Almond Flour.

How to Make The Best Vegan Apple Crisp: Step-by-Step Instructions

This easy vegan apple crisp might look like something that belongs on a holiday table and takes hours to pull off, but it is actually super simple to make. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the apples: Chop your apples into small cubes. I prefer smaller chunks so they bake evenly and get soft all the way through. Once they’re cut, toss them in a medium bowl with maple syrup, lemon juice, cinnamon, salt, and arrowroot until everything looks coated. 

A collage of images showing the making of vegetarian apple crisp's topping.

Step 2 – Make the crisp topping: In a large bowl, stir together the oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, cinnamon, salt, coconut oil, maple syrup, and pecans. Mix until it starts to clump together in little bits because those clumps are what bake into those crunchy clusters everyone loves.

Rolled oats are the best choice here since they hold their shape in the oven and give you that real “crisp” texture. Quick oats are thinner and tend to disappear into the mix. 

Side by side photos showing the assembly of the recipe for vegan apple crisp.

Step 3 – Assemble the crisp: Spread the apple mixture evenly in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish. You can use a glass or ceramic pie plate or a square baking pan. The important thing is to ensure that cubed apples are spread evenly at the bottom of the dish.

Spread the topping on top. No need to worry about making it perfect. The uneven clusters are what make this simple apple crisp extra crunchy in the end.

A photo of the freshly baked no butter added apple crisp from the top view.

Step 4 – Bake: Bake in a preheated 350°F (177 °C) oven for about 40 to 45 minutes. You’ll know it’s ready when the topping is golden brown and you see the apples bubbling around the edges.

I did not experience this, but if the topping browns a little too quickly, you can cover the dish loosely with foil towards the end.

Step 5 – Cool and serve: Let the crisp rest for about 10 minutes before serving so the juices settle and the topping stays crunchy. I know it’s hard to wait, but it’s worth it.

How To Store, Reheat, and Freeze Apple Crisp

This gluten-free apple crisp is at its best when it comes out of the oven warm and sizzling, but you can definitely make it ahead or save leftovers to enjoy later. Here’s what I’ve found works best:

Storage: This recipe yields approximately 6 servings, and while it typically disappears quickly, any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 or 5 days.

Reheating: When you are ready to serve, warm it in the oven at 300°F (149 °C) to 350°F (177 °C) for about 10 to 15 minutes. The microwave works in a pinch, but the topping will soften instead of staying crisp.

Freezing: Apple crisp freezes well for up to 2 months, and you have two options:

  • Freeze before baking: Assemble the crisp in a freezer-safe dish, cover tightly, and freeze. When you are ready, bake it straight from frozen at 350°F (177 °C), adding a little extra time until the apples are tender and the top is golden. This is the best option if you want the topping to stay crunchy.
  • Freeze after baking: Let the crisp cool completely, then wrap it well (to prevent freezer burn) and freeze. When you are ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge and warm it in the oven at 350°F (177 °C) for 15 to 20 minutes. The topping will be softer than when freshly baked, but the flavor will still be delicious.
Apple crisp topped off with three scoops of vegan vanilla ice cream.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Crisp

Even though this vegan apple dessert is one of the easiest desserts you can make, a few small details can really change the outcome. Here are my best tips from testing this recipe:

  • Cut the apples into small pieces: Aim for evenly cut, ½-inch cubes. Larger chunks take longer to cook and soften, which makes the baking time longer.
  • Prevent a watery filling: If your apples are extra juicy (like Honey Crisp), add ½ teaspoon more arrowroot powder or cornstarch to keep the filling from being too watery.
  • Let it rest before serving: Allow it to cool down for about 10-15 minutes before serving so the juices have time to settle.

Variations & Substitutions 

One of the best things about this butterless apple crisp is how easy it is to adapt to your own needs and preferences. Here are a few ideas from my recipe testing:

  • Nut-Free: If you want to skip the nuts, swap the almond flour for oat flour and leave out the pecans. The crisp topping will not be as crunchy, but it can be a good substitute.
  • Sugar-Free Keto: For a keto or sugar-free version, replace the maple syrup with monk fruit sweetener or your favorite keto sweetener. Alternatively, if you want to make a sugar-free apple crisp, you can omit adding maple syrup completely. It won’t have the subtle sweetness that maple syrup offers, but it will still be delicious.
  • Mix-ins and spices: Try soaking raisins in warm apple juice and stirring them into the filling along with a pinch of ground cloves for a bit more spiciness. You can also experiment with chopped dates and even add a dash of cardamom if you are a fan of those cozy spices.

FAQs

Do I need to peel the apples?

It is totally up to you. I prefer not to peel mine, but either way would work.

What is the best way to cut apples?

Use a sharp knife to cut the apple in half, remove the core, and then cut it into ½-inch to ¾-inch cubes. The important thing here is that they are equal in size, so they bake evenly.

How do I keep the topping crunchy?

The key to keeping the topping crunchy is to let it cool for 10 to 15 minutes before serving. This way, the apple crisp has some time to settle and harden before it is served.

What is the difference between an apple crisp and an apple crumble?

They are very similar apple desserts, with a minor difference. A crisp is usually made with oats and nuts in the topping, whereas a crumble typically has a topping made with just flour, sugar, and butter, so it’s more like a streusel.

Serving Suggestions

One of the best parts of this no-butter apple crisp is how versatile it is. It’s the perfect fall dessert to enjoy straight from the oven or dress it up with a few simple add-ons to make it extra special. Here are some of my favorite pairings:

A Glass of milk: Serve it with a glass of cold milk, or for a plant-based option, try my Homemade Almond Milk to balance the sweetness of the warm apples.

Ice Cream: You can never go wrong with a scoop of vegan vanilla ice cream on top. Alternatively, you can try my Coconut Milk Ice Cream for another dairy-free option or my Homemade Honey Ice Cream for a vegetarian option. 

Whipped Cream: If you prefer something lighter than ice cream, a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream on top adds just the right amount of sweetness without overpowering the apples.

Yogurt: You can even use this vegan apple crumble as a topping on my Vanilla Yogurt Recipe. It’s perfect for turning leftovers into a cozy breakfast the next day.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes You Might Like

If you loved this apple dessert, there are plenty of other apple recipes you can try this season:

  • My No Sugar Crockpot Applesauce is one of the simplest ways to use up extra apples and makes the perfect snack or baking staple during the fall months.
  • For a quick breakfast, try my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. It’s ready in 15 minutes and has all the warm fall flavors we love in a bowl. 
  • Or, if you’re feeding a crowd, Baked Apple Oatmeal is the ultimate make-ahead breakfast, perfect for fall.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Apple crisp in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Vegan Apple Crisp Recipe

The best vegan apple crisp recipe made without the use of butter and refined sugar (sweetened with maple syrup and fresh apples). Caramelized apples topped with almond flour-oat topping for a perfect vegan apple crumble for fall. Vegan, gluten-free, dairy-free, refined sugar free.
Course Breakfast Sweets, Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 481kcal

Ingredients

For The Apple Layer:

  • 4 apples medium sized – cut into ½ inch cubes*
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon 2 gr
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons arrowroot powder or cornstarch – 14 gr

For The Crisp Topping:

  • 1 cup rolled oats not the quick-cooking kind- 100 gr
  • 1 cup almond flour 120 gr. (or almond meal)
  • ½ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 40 gr (optional)
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 7 tablespoons coconut oil melted and cooled
  • cup maple syrup
  • ½ cup pecans roughly chopped 50 gr

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.

To prepare the apples:

  • Place apples, maple syrup, lemon juice, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, and arrowroot powder in a bowl. Give it a stir. Place it in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish.

To prepare the crisp:

  • Mix together the rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, coconut oil, maple syrup and pecans in a bowl. Mix until well combined.
    Person making crumb topping.

To Assemble & Bake:

  • Distribute the crisp topping onto the apples in an even layer.
    Collage of images showing the assembly of the apple crisp.
  • Bake for 40-45 minutes or until the topping turns lightly golden.
    Freshly baked apple crisp from the top view.
  • Serve with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a cup of almond milk on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 generous servings (approximately 3/4 to 1 cup per serving). The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include optional ice cream on top.
  • * What kind of apples should I use? Feel free to use any kind of apples you like. I personally prefer using two different kinds for different flavors, but either way would work.
  • Can I make it ahead? You can prep the apples a day in advance and keep them in an airtight container in the fridge until you are ready to use them. They will probably brown a little bit, but since you will bake them, it shouldn’t be a problem. I do not recommend making the vegan crumble topping in advance as it could get soggy. Luckily, it takes no more than 5 minutes to put all the ingredients in a bowl and mix them.
  • How to store the leftovers? This recipe serves 6 servings. I doubt that you will have any leftovers, but if you do, place it in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, warm it in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 481kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 264mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/feed/ 10
Crockpot Applesauce (No Sugar Added) https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/#comments Sat, 13 Sep 2025 23:28:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10762 Whether you enjoy it warm straight from the pot, spooned over oatmeal, used as a natural sweetener in baking, or…]]>

Whether you enjoy it warm straight from the pot, spooned over oatmeal, used as a natural sweetener in baking, or frozen for later, this homemade applesauce recipe is a cozy and versatile fall staple you’ll want to make again and again.

It seems to happen every fall. We go apple picking, and I come home with more apples than I know what to do with. On our last trip to Ellijay in North Georgia, I thought I had planned better, but once again, we returned with bags and bags of apples. 

That is when I turn to this homemade applesauce recipe. The slow cooker does all the work, and the best part is that no sugar is needed.

As the apples cook low and slow, their natural sugars become richer and sweeter, giving you an applesauce that tastes just right without any extra sugars. 

Over the years, I have tried this recipe with many different apple varieties and found that a mix of sweet and tart apples gives the best flavor and balance, which is why this is the version I keep coming back to.

Jars of applesauce from the front view.

Notes on the Ingredients You’ll Need

You really only need three main ingredients to make this applesauce crock pot recipe: apples, water, and some lemon juice. Everything else is optional. 

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing on base ingredients:

Apples: Any type of apple will work here, so use the ones you love most or mix a few. Apples like Fuji, Honeycrisp, and Gala are sweeter, while a Granny Smith apple or Cortland are a bit more tart. 

I usually go with a mix of Fuji, Honeycrisp, and Gala, and add one Granny Smith. And you do not need all of those. One or two types are sufficient.

You’ll need about 3 pounds total (6-8 medium apples), which makes around 4 cups of applesauce. If your apples are very different in size, weighing them is the easiest way to make sure you have enough.

I peel my apples because I prefer a creamy and smooth applesauce. However, if you prefer to cook them with their skin on, you certainly could, but just know your applesauce won’t be as smooth.

Water: You only need about 1/2 cup for 3 pounds of apples. If you want a sweeter applesauce, you can swap the water for apple juice.

Lemon juice: A little squeeze of fresh lemon juice brightens the flavor and keeps the applesauce from browning as it cooks. I’ve tested this recipe with and without it, and the version with lemon offered a more complex flavor.

Spices: Since I like to use this applesauce in baking and cooking, I keep the spices to a minimum, but feel free to pick and choose as you prefer. I find that a couple of cinnamon sticks, cloves, and a pinch of freshly ground nutmeg work beautifully.

Sweetener (Optional): Since the cooked apples are already sweet, I prefer not to add any sugar. However, if you want yours sweeter, you can sweeten it with granulated or brown sugar, honey, or maple syrup after it is cooked. Start with a small amount (about ¼ cup), taste, and adjust from there.

How to Make Applesauce in a Crockpot: Step-by-Step Instructions

The beauty of making applesauce in a slow cooker is that it’s almost completely hands-off. Simply peel and chop the apples and toss them into the crock pot, and let it do its thing. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

Step 1 – Prep the Apples: Peel, core, and chop about 3 pounds of apples. While you do not need to cut them perfectly, it is best to aim for medium chunks. This way, they can cook evenly and soften without turning mushy too quickly.

A photo of apples and cinnamon in a crockpot from the front view.

Step 2 – Load the Slow Cooker: Add the apples, lemon juice, water, spices, and a pinch of salt to the crockpot. Give everything a quick toss so the apples are coated. It may look like there is not enough liquid at first, but the apples will release a lot of their juices as they cook.

Step 3 – Cook: Cover with the lid and cook on high for 3 to 4 hours or on low for 5 to 6 hours. Use high heat if you want applesauce ready the same day, or low heat if you prefer to set it in the morning and come back to it later. If you can, stir it once or twice to keep the apples cooking evenly.

Step 4 – Mash or Blend: Once the apples are soft and falling apart, it is time to blend. The tool to use depends on the texture you are going for. Use:

I have tested all three, and it really comes down to what you like best.

Step 5 – Taste and Adjust: This applesauce is usually sweet enough on its own. But if you prefer a sweeter flavor, add a little sugar, honey, or maple syrup at this stage. I would recommend starting with a small amount, tasting it, and adding more if needed.  

Step 6 – Let it Cool: Enjoy warm, or let it cool completely before transferring to mason jars or airtight containers.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Your Applesauce

Chances are you will end up with more applesauce than you can eat in one sitting, and personally, that is the best part. It keeps so well that you can enjoy it all week or even freeze it for later. 

Storage: Bring your applesauce to room temperature and scoop it into glass jars. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. 

Freezing: Divide it into smaller portions (I usually do 1 cup) and store in freezer-safe containers. I like using Weck jars because, unlike mason jars, they can be used to freeze food. Alternatively, you can use reusable bags (such as Stasher Bags) to save space in your freezer.

Thawing and Reheating: To enjoy, just thaw it overnight in the fridge. When you are ready to eat, warm it gently on the stovetop or in the microwave until it is heated through.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

While this slow cooker applesauce recipe is simple, here are a few things I learned during testing that will help you get the best results:

  • Flavors get more intense as they cook: As apples cook down, the flavors concentrate. The apples become sweeter, lemon juice tastes more sour, and cinnamon gets stronger. Keep add-ins minimal at first. You can always add more later, but you cannot remove it.
  • Whole spices vs ground spices: In my first recipe testing, I used a small amount of ground cinnamon, but in the finished applesauce, the flavor was overpowering. Whole spices, such as cinnamon sticks or cloves, provide a more balanced result. If you only have ground spices, start with just a pinch and adjust to taste after blending.
  • Make it your own: Store-bought applesauce often comes in different flavors, but you can easily flavor your homemade version. My favorites are Maple-Vanilla (a splash of maple syrup and vanilla, which I love with pancakes on the weekend) and Pumpkin Spice (just a pinch is enough for a cozy fall twist).
  • Baby-friendly: If you are planning to serve this applesauce to your baby, keep it simple by skipping the spices and blending until very smooth. Freeze in silicone trays or small cubes for easy single servings. Always check with your pediatrician for feeding guidance.
Slowcooker applesauce in jars.

Favorite Ways to Use Crockpot Applesauce

You can enjoy your slow cooker apple sauce warm straight from the pot with a spoon, or simply eat it on its own as a snack. And that’s just the tip of the iceberg! Here are a few more ideas:

  • With yogurt or oats: Swirl some applesauce into Overnight Oats with Yogurt for a creamy, grab-and-go breakfast, on top of Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats for something more cozy, or mix it into Oatmeal with Chia Seeds for an easy morning bowl. 
  • With chia pudding: Try it on top of Chia Pudding with Yogurt. The applesauce makes it sweeter while still keeping it quick and simple.
  • Sweeten your muesli: Mix a spoonful into your morning Muesli for a natural way to sweeten it. It blends in smoothly with the oats, nuts, and seeds, requiring no extra sugar.
  • As a baking swap: While the amount will depend on the exact recipe, you can use applesauce to replace oil or eggs in baked goods to keep them soft and moist. It also sweetens them in a natural way. I use it in my Cinnamon and Apple Baked Oatmeal recipe to keep oats moist and sweet.
  • Ice cream topping: Add a spoonful of applesauce over vanilla ice cream and top it off with a handful of pecans for a fall twist.

FAQs

What are the best apples for crockpot applesauce?

Any type of apple will work, but for the best flavor, I recommend using a mix of sweet and tart varieties. Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp add natural sweetness, while Granny Smith brings just enough tartness for balance.

Do I need to peel the apples?

It depends on the texture you are after. If you prefer a super smooth applesauce, it is best to peel them. However, some people prefer to leave it on to get more texture and fiber.

Can I use apple juice instead of water?

Yes, you can. If you do, I recommend skipping the addition of any sugar so it won’t be overly sweet.

Can I make this without a slow cooker?

Yes, you can cook it on the stovetop by simmering the apples with the same ingredients in a large pot over low heat until they soften (about 25 to 30 minutes). You can also use an Instant Pot on the manual setting for about 5 minutes, then quick-release and mash or blend.

Can you overcook applesauce?

While applesauce is pretty forgiving, it can overcook if left in too long. The sauce will become thicker, darker, and may start to stick to the bottom if there isn’t enough liquid left. To avoid this, keep an eye on the cooking time and check that there is always some liquid in the slow cooker as it cooks.

How does the texture change after frozen applesauce is thawed?

When applesauce is frozen, the water content forms ice crystals. After thawing, those crystals melt and can make the applesauce a little more watery. For best results, I recommend giving it a good stir.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes to Try

During the apple season, I make this slow cooker applesauce recipe on repeat, but I also love finding new ways to use apples throughout the week. Here are a few that I make often:

  • My Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is a quick stovetop breakfast that comes together in just 15 minutes with oats, apples, almond milk, and some maple syrup.
  • For dessert, try my No Butter Apple Crisp. Made with oats and almond flour, it features a crispy topping that is dairy-free and refined sugar-free.
  • If you are looking for something fresh, my 15-minute Kale Apple Slaw is tossed in a tangy maple Dijon vinaigrette, making it the perfect side dish for your favorite protein.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Homemade applesauce in jars.
Print

Crockpot Applesauce Recipe

Learn how to make applesauce in your slow cooker with just a few simple ingredients. Made without any extra sugar, this is the best way to preserve apples and enjoy all year long.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 10 minutes
Servings 4 cups
Calories 181kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds apples peeled, cored and cut into 1-inch cubes – 6-8 apples depending on their size
  • ½ cup water
  • 1 tbs lemon juice
  • 2 cinnamon sticks
  • pinch ground nutmeg optional

Instructions

  • Layer sliced apples in the bowl of a slow cooker. Pour in the water and lemon juice.
  • Add in the cinnamon sticks, salt, and ground nutmeg. Stir to combine.
  • Cook in high heat setting up to 3-4 hours, or in low heat setting for 5-6 hours. Depending on your slow cooker the timing might be slightly different so keep a close eye after the 3-hour mark. I also recommend giving it a stir a few times during the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-softened-apples into a high power blender (such as Vitamix) and puree until smooth. Alternatively, you can use an immersion blender, but it might take longer for it to be completely pureed.
  • Let it cool completely and then divide it amongst jars.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of applesauce. The nutritional values below are per cup.
  • When you first put all the ingredients in the crockpot, you might think that there is not enough liquid. During my recipe testing, I found that if you add more than 1/2 cup of water, the applesauce becomes too watery.
  • I intentionally used cinnamon sticks instead of ground cinnamon. As the apples cook, the flavors of every ingredient amplify. I found that ground cinnamon was a bit overpowering, whereas a cinnamon stick provided a more subtle cinnamon flavor. If you do not have cinnamon sticks, you can use ground cinnamon, but I recommend starting with a small amount, no more than 1/4 teaspoon.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh in airtight containers for up to 5 days in the fridge.
  • Freezing: Portion your applesauce into freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 364mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 35g | Vitamin A: 184IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/feed/ 20
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Schug Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/schug/ https://foolproofliving.com/schug/#comments Fri, 25 Apr 2025 16:41:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81215 How to Make Schug Sauce? This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        • What is Schug? Also known as skhug, zhug, s’hug, zhoug, zoug, schugg, or by its Arabic name sahawiq, schug is actually its Hebrew name. This vibrant and spicy condiment is made from fresh herbs, chili peppers, garlic, and spices. Originating from Yemen, think of it as the Middle Eastern counterpart to chimichurri or salsa verde. It’s a staple in Israeli shawarma and falafel stands, and for us home cooks, it’s perfect for spooning over grain bowls, grilled meats, roasted vegetables, or swirling into hummus and soups.
        • Spice levels are adjustable: Authentic schug brings the heat, but you can dial it down by removing more of the pepper seeds or reducing the number of chilies used. Want it fiery? Keep the seeds.
        • Stores and freezes well: Green schug keeps fresh in the fridge for up to a week in an airtight container. For extended storage, freeze the cubes in ice cube trays, then transfer them to a freezer-safe container. This makes it super easy to grab just what you need, whether it’s a single spoonful or more.
        • Green, Red, and Brown Varieties: While this recipe is for the most common, green schug, made with green chili peppers like jalapeños and serranos, there are also red schug (made with dried red chilies) and brown schug (made with tomatoes).

        How to Make Schug Sauce?

        This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in the fridge or freezer. Let’s walk through it step-by-step.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list of skhug ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are a few helpful notes:
          • Peppers: I like to use a combination of green peppers like jalapenos and serranos—together they add a layered, more complex heat and flavor to the sauce. However, if you only have one type on hand, either pepper will still give you a delicious result.
          • Fresh Herbs: While schug is often called a spicy cilantro sauce, I find that a mix of fresh parsley and cilantro gives it a more balanced, herbaceous flavor. That said, if cilantro isn’t your thing, feel free to use an equal amount of fresh parsley instead.
          • Optional Add-Ins: Depending on the region, some schug recipes include extra spices for added complexity. You can try adding a pinch of ground cardamom, caraway seeds, or a small amount of red pepper flakes if you want to bump up the heat even more.
        A collage of images showing the peppers in a food processor before and after they are processed.
        1. Pulse the peppers: Add the seeded jalapeno and serrano peppers to your food processor. Pulse about 10 times, scraping the sides halfway through to ensure even chopping.
        Green schug sauce in the food processor.
        1. Add the herbs and spices: Toss in the cilantro, parsley, garlic, ground cumin, ground coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt, and pepper. Blend until you get a coarse, pesto-like texture, stopping to scrape the sides as needed.
        Drizzling the shug with oil and showing the texture.
        1. Drizzle in the olive oil: With the processor running, slowly pour in the olive oil. You want the texture to be saucy but still textured.
        2. Taste and adjust: Give your green schug sauce a taste and tweak the salt, lemon juice, or spice to your liking.
        3. Store or freeze: Transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 5 days. Or freeze in portions using ice cube trays for later use.

        Expert Tips

        • Keep the stems on: No need to pick off all the leaves—both cilantro and parsley stems are tender and full of flavor. They blend right in and actually add to the sauce’s vibrant, herbaceous taste.
        • Texture: Stop blending once you reach a pesto-like texture—overprocessing it can turn it into an herb puree.
        • Using mortar and pestle: While the food processor is a great time-saver, if you’ve got a little extra time and a mortar and pestle, it’s worth trying the traditional way. Start by grinding whole spices, such as cumin and coriander. For even more flavor, you can toast them in a dry skillet for a minute until fragrant before grinding. Then add the garlic, lemon juice, lemon zest, and salt to create a flavorful paste. Next, add the fresh herbs and green chilies, pounding until you reach a chunky paste. Finally, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while mixing to bring everything together into a smooth, spoonable sauce.
        • Wear gloves: Since this Israeli schug is made with hot peppers like jalapeños and serranos, it’s a good idea to wear gloves while handling them, especially if you’re sensitive to spice or tend to touch your face while cooking.
        • Schug replacement: Wondering what to use instead of schug in a recipe? While the flavor profiles are quite different, you can use chimichurri, salsa verde, or even pesto as a substitute in a pinch.
        Zhug sauce in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        One of the best things about this spicy schug is its versatility. It can totally transform a simple dish into something exciting and flavorful. If you’re wondering where to start, here are a few of my favorite ways to use it— any place you’d typically use a punchy green sauce, schug fits right in.

        • Grain Bowls: I love spooning this Yemenite hot sauce over my Homemade CAVA Bowl—it adds a zesty flavor that ties everything together. It’s even better when paired with other Middle Eastern condiments like Harissa and Tzatziki.
        • Hummus: Whether you’re making a classic batch or going with something a little different, like Roasted Carrot Hummus, the spicy kick and fresh herbs swirled right in add an extra layer of flavor. Serve it with some warm Pita Bread on the side, and you’ve got a snack that everyone will love.
        • Meat Dishes: Schug pairs beautifully with richly seasoned dishes from the Mediterranean and the Middle East. It’s especially good with Shish Tawook, Beef Shawarma, or Grilled Harissa Chicken—adding a fresh, spicy contrast that lifts all those bold flavors.
        • Eggs: A spoonful stirred into your scrambled eggs in the morning or drizzled over poached eggs is a game changer. If you like savory breakfasts, try it on top of my çilbir, also known as Turkish poached eggs with yogurt. It brings just the right amount of heat to balance out the creaminess.

        Other Green Sauces You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this schug sauce and bring the bold flavors of the Middle East to your home, I’d love to hear how it turned out! Leaving a rating and a comment below is a great way to support the site and helps others who are thinking about making it. And if you snap a photo, be sure to tag it on Instagram with #foolproofeats—I’d love to see and share your creations with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Schug sauce in a jar with a spoon from the top view.
        Print

        Schug Recipe

        This bold and herb-packed green sauce is a staple Middle Eastern condiment with roots in Yemenite cuisine. Made with fresh herbs, chili peppers, and spices, it's perfect for adding a spicy kick to grain bowls, grilled vegetables, and meats, or even hummus.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 2 cups
        Calories 304kcal

        Ingredients

        • 7 jalapeno peppers stems and seeds removed (98 g.)
        • 2 serrano peppers stems and seeds removed (12 g.)
        • 2 cups fresh cilantro with stems and loosely packed
        • 2 cups fresh flat leaf parsley with stems and loosely packed
        • 4 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 6 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one large lemon
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place both the jalapeno and serrano peppers in the bowl of the food processor and pulse 10 times, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
          A collage of images showing the processing of the peppers.
        • Add cilantro, parsley, garlic, cumin, coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt and pepper and process until all ingredients resemble a “chunky” blend. Again, stop and scrape down the sides a few times to ensure that everything is processed evenly.
          A collage of photos showing the sauce being made and a person scraping the side of the food processor.
        • While the food processor is still running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil until you reach your desired consistency. It should (almost) resemble a pesto-like texture.
          Person drizzling the sauce with oil and showing texture.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust the amount of seasoning, lemon juice, and spices as needed.
        • Refrigerate in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week (be sure to stir before using it) or spoon it into an ice cube tray and freeze for up to 3 months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of green schug sauce. The nutrition information below is per cup.
        • Size of the peppers: I used seven medium-sized jalapenos, which were about 3.5 ounces (98g). If yours are smaller or larger, adjust the number of peppers accordingly.
        • Remove the seeds (or not): You can adjust the spice levels by removing or keeping the seeds of the peppers.
        • Olive oil solidifies in the fridge: It’s normal for the olive oil in schug to firm up when chilled. Just let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes before serving, and it will return to its smooth, spoonable consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1209mg | Potassium: 650mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 6731IU | Vitamin C: 166mg | Calcium: 126mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/schug/feed/ 4
        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/#respond Wed, 23 Apr 2025 17:27:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81131 How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic? Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        This recipe is pretty straightforward, but here are the most important things to know to make your balsamic and maple-glazed Brussels sprouts a success:

        • Cut side down: Roasting the Brussels sprouts with the cut side down gives you crisp, golden edges and more flavor. Tossing halfway through the roasting process ensures that they are roasted evenly and don’t get too dark on one side.
        • Glaze after roasting: Tossing the vegetables in maple syrup and balsamic vinegar after roasting them helps prevent the sugars from burning during the roasting process.
        • Check doneness: The best way to tell if your Brussels sprouts are fully roasted is by inserting a sharp knife into the center of one—it should slide in easily with little resistance.

        How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic?

        Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a few simple steps. The most time-consuming part is slicing the Brussels sprouts in half—after that, it’s mostly hands-off while the oven does the work. Below are the steps:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below. Below are a few ingredient substitutions:
          • Oil: I opted for extra virgin olive oil, but any flavorless oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
          • Honey: While the flavor profile will change slightly, honey can be a good substitute for maple syrup. 
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or roast directly on the pan for more caramelization.
        A person is drizzling Brussels sprouts with olive oil and then spreading them on a baking sheet.
        1. Arrange and season: Spread the halved Brussels sprouts directly onto the pan. Drizzle with olive oil, then sprinkle with kosher salt and freshly ground pepper. Toss lightly on the pan, then arrange in a single layer, cut side down. Don’t skip this step as it is crucial for crispy Brussels sprouts.
        Vegetables before and after they are roasted.
        1. Roast: Roast for 20–25 minutes, flipping halfway through. They should be deeply golden and tender.
        Roasted Brussels sprouts being drizzled and mixed with balsamic maple syrup glaze.
        1. Prepare the maple balsamic glaze: Let them rest for 5 minutes, then transfer to a bowl. In a small bowl, mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup. Drizzle this maple glaze for Brussels sprouts over the top and toss gently to coat.
        2. Finish & serve: Add optional toppings like chopped toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds for extra flair. Serve your roasted maple Brussels sprouts warm and enjoy!
        Roasted maple balsamic brussel sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips:

        This balsamic maple Brussels sprouts recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a couple of things I want to highlight to help you get the best results.

        • Keep an eye during the last 10 minutes: Brussels sprouts can go from perfectly roasted to overdone quickly. Start checking around the 20-minute mark, and give them a toss to promote even browning.
        • Don’t toss the loose leaves: Any leaves that fall off during trimming will crisp up beautifully in the oven. Leave them on the pan—they’ll add great texture and a bit of crunch.
        • Great served warm—or cold: While I prefer serving this dish warm, the flavors hold up well even when served at room temperature or chilled. It’s a versatile side that works beautifully for gatherings or even for meal prep.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While most people think of roasted balsamic Brussels sprouts as more of a holiday side dish (and trust me, it’s one of my favorite Thanksgiving veggie sides), I make it all year round . Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        You Might Also Like:

        Brussels sprouts can surprise you in the best way. Here are a few more recipes I love making when I have a fresh bag in my fridge.

        Roasted brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic on a plate.
        Print

        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts Recipe

        These Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts are golden, crisp, and full of flavor—the perfect easy vegetable side dish for weeknights or holiday gatherings.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 148kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb Brussels sprouts clean and sliced in half lengthwise
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon grond black pepper
        • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup

        Optional Toppings *

        • ¼ cup pomegranate arils optional
        • ½ cup pecans chopped, optional

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F/218 C. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread the prepared Brussels sprouts in the pan, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper. Toss to combine. Spread them, cut side down, in a single layer.
          Person drizzling oil and spready brussel sprouts on a sheet pan.
        • Roast for 20-25 minutes until tender, tossing halfway through.
          Brussel sprouts before and after they are roasted.
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then transfer it to a large bowl.
          Person drizzling brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic vinegar mixture.
        • Mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup in a bowl. Drizzle it over the roasted Brussels sprouts and toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if needed.
        • Transfer to a serving platter or bowl and garnish with pecans and pomegranate seeds, if using. Serve.
          Roasted balsamic maple Brussels sprouts in a plate from the top view.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts with maple and balsamic, which is ideal for four servings as a side dish. The nutrition information below does not include the optional toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for upto 4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing.
        • Reheating: I find that reheating them in the oven is the best way to keep their crispiness. Simply preheat the oven to 350°F (175°C) and warm for about 10 minutes, or until heated through.
        • Air fryer method: If you prefer cooking Brussels sprouts in an air fryer to save on time, simply preheat your air fryer to 375°F, spread the halved sprouts on a single layer, and air fry for 15 minutes, rotating halfway through. 
        • It’s easy to customize this dish with a variety of optional toppings. Below are some ideas:
          • Nuts: The toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds are optional, but they elevate the dish with texture and color. You can easily swap the pecans for other nuts, such as walnuts, hazelnuts, or sliced almonds. 
          • Fruit: For a fruity touch, try using dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead of pomegranate seeds. 
          • Cheese: And if you want to add a bit of richness, a sprinkle of crumbled goat cheese or shredded Parmesan cheese works beautifully too.
          • Bacon: For a smoky-salty bite, try crumbling in some cooked bacon. I prefer baked turkey bacon, but regular bacon would also work.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 614mg | Potassium: 477mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 855IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/feed/ 0
        Air Fryer Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/#respond Sat, 08 Mar 2025 16:54:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48753 Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is…]]>

        Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell

        With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is easier than ever now. Here are a few reasons why you should give this recipe a try:

        • The quickest method: Compared to roasting in the ovencooking on the stovetop, or steaming it, roasting asparagus in the air fryer is faster, with only 13 minutes from start to finish. 
        • Perfect texture every time: The light and crispy texture of air fried asparagus can’t be duplicated through any other method. It also has less oil than deep fried asparagus.
        • Easy to jazz up: Easy customizations with different spices, add-ons and toppings make this a new favorite you’ll make again and again.
        • Versatile: It is the perfect side dish, healthy snack, or a great addition to recipes like Asparagus Salad, Asparagus Tart and even Butter Lettuce Salad.
        Air fried asparagus on a plate from the top view

        Ingredients

        This air fryer asparagus recipe has five simple ingredients:

        • Fresh asparagus
        • Olive oil
        • Minced garlic
        • Kosher salt
        • Black pepper

        You probably have most of these at home already.

        Ingredients for cooking asparagus in air fryer

        How to Cook Asparagus in Air Fryer

        1. Preheat the air fryer: Plug in your air fryer and let it preheat to 375 F / 190 C. Rinse and dry asparagus spears. Place the asparagus on a cutting board. While holding the bunch with one hand, cut the woody ends by one inch from the bottom using a sharp knife.
        person showing how to prepare asparagus for cooking with multiple step by step pictures
        1. Season the asparagus: In a large bowl, combine the trimmed asparagus, a little bit of oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper. With clean hands or kitchen tongs, give it a toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is thoroughly coated with the mixture.
        asparagus in the air fryer before and after it is cooked
        1. Arrange in the basket: Carefully arrange asparagus spears in the air fryer basket in a single layer. A larger air fryer might fit all the asparagus stalks, but a smaller air fryer may require multiple batches. 
        2. Cook until tender: Cook for only 6-7 minutes until tender, but don’t forget to turn the spears halfway through. If you are using thin asparagus, air fry for 3-4 minutes.
        3. Transfer to serving platter: Carefully transfer to a serving plate, season with salt and pepper, a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese), and serve while it is still warm.

        How to Store & Reheat

        Use this air-fried asparagus recipe to batch-cook asparagus for your weekly meal prep and store it in the refrigerator following my directions below:

        • Storage: Let the leftovers of your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.

        Recipe Variations

        Want to check it up and make it your own? Here are a few ways to take your air fryer roasted asparagus to a whole new level:

        • Freshen with herbs: Fresh herbs give this dish new flavor. Try basil, parsley, mint or chives.
        • Experiment with spices: Make this dish unique each time with new spices. Try paprika, garlic powder or even red pepper flakes to start.
        • Use lemon zest and balsamic: Drizzle it with a mixture of lemon zest, balsamic vinegar (or lemon juice) and a little olive oil to give it a refreshing flavor.
        • Sprinkle with cheese: Shredded mozzarella or parmesan cheese makes the dish more scrumptious.
        • Imitate Asian flavors: Use soy sauce, maple syrup or honey to create an Asian-inspired sauce.

        Expert Tips

        • Take time to trim asparagus, dry it thoroughly and cook in single layers – even if it requires batch cooking. This is crucial for light, crispy asparagus. 
        • Change the cooking time if necessary. As I mentioned earlier, this recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • Add variety with new flavors. Make this dish new each time by experimenting with spices, herbs and other fresh ingredients.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • Keep in mind that the cooking time may differ from one air fryer to another. I tested this recipe in my Instant Vortex 6 Quart Air Fryer (affiliate link). For the best results, it is best to keep a close eye on the asparagus and check doneness after the 5-minute mark.
        Air Fryer Roasted Asparagus in the basket right after it is cooked

        Serving Suggestions

        There isn’t one right answer when it comes to serving this air fried asparagus recipe. It tastes great in so many ways, so consider your options! 

        FAQs

        What temperature do you air fry asparagus?

        The ideal temperature for air frying asparagus is 375 F degrees (190 C).

        How long to cook asparagus in air fryer?

        Cooking asparagus in air fryer takes about 6-7 minutes at 375 F degrees. 

        How to cook frozen asparagus in air fryer?

        Frozen asparagus takes 9-10 minutes to cook in the air fryer, but there’s no need to thaw beforehand.

        How long do you reheat asparagus in air fryer?

        Air frying leftover asparagus only takes 3 minutes to reheat, so it couldn’t be easier. 

        Do I need to adjust the cooking time when using thin asparagus?

        Yes, you do. This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and thin asparagus. By thick asparagus, I mean the regular asparagus you would find in most grocery stores. Thin asparagus is usually available for a short time at the beginning of spring. You can cook both types of asparagus in an air fryer. However, the thinner should be cooked for a shorter amount of time. While the exact time depends on how thin the asparagus stalks are, shortening the air frying time by 2-3 minutes (and keeping a close eye on it) is a good place to start.

        Why did my asparagus come out stringy and tough?

        If you do not take the time and cut the woodsy ends, you will end up with stringy and tough asparagus.

        Do I need to soak my asparagus before air frying?

        No, you do not need to soak asparagus before air frying. Instead, we recommend giving it a quick rinse and drying it as much as possible.

        Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this air fryer asparagus recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        asparagus in air fryer basket from the top view
        Print

        Air Fryer Asparagus Recipe

        Learn how to cook asparagus in air fryer for perfectly crispy and tender asparagus cooked in less than 10 minutes by using only a teaspoon of oil. Easy, quick, and convenient.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 3 minutes
        Cook Time 7 minutes
        Preheating Air Fryer 3 minutes
        Total Time 13 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 33kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound asparagus* woody ends trimmed
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil
        • 1 garlic clove minced (optional)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat air fryer to 375 F degrees.
        • Place asparagus, olive oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper in a bowl. Using your clean hands or kitchen tongs, toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is coated with oil, garlic and seasonings.
        • Arrange them in your air fryer basket making sure that they are on a single layer. If you have a smaller air fryer, you may have to air fry your asparagus in batches.
        • Cook until tender for 6-7 minutes making sure to toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • Carefully transfer the now air fried asparagus to a platter and serve right away.

        Notes

        • Thick Asparagus vs Thin Asparagus: This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil-thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • To Store: Let your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • I listed fresh garlic as an optional ingredient as this recipe would work perfectly without it. You can also substitute fresh garlic with 1 teaspoon garlic powder if you wish.
        • Optional toppings: Depending on what I am serving it, I usually finish it off with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (ideal if I am serving it seafood) or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese (ideal if I am serving it with chicken or meat dishes).

        Nutrition

        Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 858IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/feed/ 0
        Mint Chimichurri https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/#respond Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80649 My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce.…]]>

        My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce. Serve them with lamb, seafood, steak, and more!

        Mint chimichurri in a jar with a spoonful of it.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        The fresh, crisp flavor of my mint chimichurri recipe is all thanks to these fresh ingredients that you can find at your local grocer, farmer’s market, or in your garden. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint leaves: We will be using only the leaves for my mint chimichurri sauce, as I find the stems to be too “woodsy” in flavor to include. 
        • Fresh parsley leaves: While I prefer to use only the leaves of the parsley, if you can chop it all very finely, feel free to include the stems as well. 
        • Red chili pepper: Traditional chimichurri sauce uses red chili peppers, but you’re welcome to swap them out with ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if that’s what you have available. Or, if you’d like to up the heat, you can also try using serrano or jalapeno peppers instead. 
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Garlic is a big part of the classic recipe, and the fresh cloves add a bold spiciness that you won’t want to skimp on. 
        • Vinegar: In Argentina, chimichurri sauce is always made using red wine vinegar. If you don’t have any on hand, you are welcome to swap in white wine vinegar. Another non-traditional option for the acid in this chimichurri sauce with mint that works, too, is lime juice.
        • Seasonings: With so many fresh herbs, the only additional seasonings needed are Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • Extra virgin olive oil: I recommend a good extra-virgin olive oil since this isn’t being cooked (unless you end up using it as a marinade), and the flavor will really shine through. 
        • Shallot (optional): The traditional chimichurri sauce does not use shallots, but you can add a finely chopped shallot, especially if you plan on using this as a salad dressing. 

        How to make Mint Chimichurri?

        You can chop the ingredients of this simple sauce by hand, or use a food processor. I personally prefer the rough traditional hand-chop method, but a few quick pulses of the processor do the trick, too. Here are the simple steps to throw it all together:

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. In a medium-sized bowl, combine your finely chopped fresh mint and parsley leaves, chopped small red chili pepper, minced garlic cloves, red wine vinegar, Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil. 
        2. Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        How To Store and Freeze?

        This is an excellent make-ahead condiment that stores well. Here’s how I do it:

        • Storage: You can store your mint chimichurri in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Freezer: Freezing is a fantastic way to enjoy recipes with mint sauce for months to come. Simply pour your chimichurri sauce into an ice cube tray and freeze it. Once frozen, place the chimichurri cubes in a freezer bag and take out a cube to enjoy whenever needed. 

        Serving Suggestions

        This multi-purpose sauce can be used to add a cool burst of flavor to an array of dishes. Whether it’s enjoyed as a sauce, marinade, condiment, or dressing, these are some of my top choices to pair it with:

        • With Lamb: Mint and lamb are such a classic flavor combination. This mint chimichurri sauce is excellent with any of my lamb recipes but I particularly like serving it as a sauce for my Leg of Lamb and Rack of Lamb.
        • Seafood: Mint sauces like this pair beautifully with seafood dishes. Drizzle a generous spoon over  Grilled Shrimp or Grilled Salmon for a refreshing and bright finish.
        • Roasted Veggies: Savory veggies fresh out of the oven shine with a splash of chimichurri sauce with mint. I love pairing it with my Baked Eggplant and Roasted Asparagus, especially when I serve them with meat dishes.
        • Salad Dressing: Mint chimichurri can perk up your homemade salad dressing for an unexpected taste that perks up any boring salad. Try adding a few tablespoons to either my Lemon Vinaigrette or my Yogurt Salad Dressing.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Recipes with Fresh Mint

        If you make your own Mint Chimichurri recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Mint chimichurri sauce in a bowl with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Chimichurri Recipe

        A classic chimichurri with a mint twist, this play on the traditional Argentinean herb sauce comes together in about 5 minutes with everyday ingredients. It complements beautifully with any lamb, seafood, and veggie dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Argentina
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 177kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup fresh mint leaves finely chopped
        • 1 cup fresh parsley leaves finely chopped
        • 1 small red chili pepper deseeded and chopped, or ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
        • 3 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup of finely chopped fresh mint leaves, 1 cup of finely chopped fresh parsley leaves, 1 chopped small red chili pepper, 3 minced garlic cloves, 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper, and ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil in a medium-sized bowl.
        • Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 2/3 cups of mint chimichurri sauce that is ideal for 4-6 servings.
        • Using a food processor: While I chopped the herbs by hand, you can certainly use a food processor if you want to make it quicker.
          • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container for up to 4 days. The green color of the chimichurri gets darker as it sits, which is normal.
        • Freezing: Place it in ice cubes and freeze overnight. Store the frozen cubes in an airtight container in individual portions.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 177kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1742IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/feed/ 0
        Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

        Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

        This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

        Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

        And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

        Recipe Ingredients:

        This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
        • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
        • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
        • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
        • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
        • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
        • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
        • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

        • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
        • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
        • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
        • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

        How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

        Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

        A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
        1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
        2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
        3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
        Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
        1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
        • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

        Expert Tips:

        This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

        • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
        • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
        • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
        • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
        • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
        • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

        If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

        Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

        Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
        Course Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 205kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Quinoa:

        • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
        • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Dressing:

        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Tabbouleh:

        • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
        • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
          Person showing how to cook quinoa.
        • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
          A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
        • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
          A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
        • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
        • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
        Overnight Steel Cut Oats https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/#comments Sun, 26 Jan 2025 18:16:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21973 If you love the traditional overnight oats (made with rolled oats) but want to try making them with steel-cut oats,…]]>

        If you love the traditional overnight oats (made with rolled oats) but want to try making them with steel-cut oats, you’re in the right place! The difference between old-fashioned oats and steel cut oats lies in how they’re processed—steel-cut oats are less processed, resulting in a hearty, chewy texture. Plus, among the different types of oats, they take the longest to cook, but the payoff is a more substantial and satisfying bowl of oatmeal.

        The beauty of this steel-cut overnight oats recipe is that soaking steel cut oats overnight lets time do all the hard work for you. And once you’ve mastered this simple method, you can explore other options like our Overnight Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats or Instant Pot Steel Cut Oats for even more convenient ways to enjoy this easy, satisfying, and healthy breakfast.

        Overnight steel cut oatmeal in a sauce pan from the top view.

        This recipe was originally published in Jan 2019. It has been updated with new information but with no changes to the original recipe in January 2025.

        Ingredients You’ll Need:

        Making overnight oats with steel cut oats requires just three basic ingredients, plus optional add-ins and toppings. Each ingredient helps create a creamy texture and flavorful base, while still leaving room for substitutions or additions. Below is what will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Steel Cut Oats: When shopping, be sure to choose regular steel-cut oats rather than quick-cooking varieties. Keep in mind that they’re sometimes labeled as Irish oats as well.
        • Soaking Liquid: I like to use hot boiling water to soak steel cut oats overnight, but any regular or plant-based milk (such as almond milk) would also work. 
        • Kosher salt: A touch of salt help balance the natural earthiness of the oats.

        How To Make Overnight Steel Cut Oats?

        Making this steel cut overnight oatmeal recipe is straightforward and requires minimal effort. The time spent soaking overnight softens the oats, cutting down cooking time in the morning. I usually do this right before bed so that I can wake up to steel-cut oatmeal ready to eat:

        Steps showing how to cook steel cut oatmeal overnight.
        1. Boil the water: Bring 2 cups of water (or milk) to a boil in a medium saucepan with a lid. 
        2. Add oats and salt: Turn the heat off and stir in the steel-cut oats and kosher salt. Cover the saucepan with the lid and let it sit on the counter overnight.
        3. Reheat in the morning: While you can enjoy your overnight steel oats as is, warming them up makes for a more comforting breakfast. Next morning, place the saucepan back on the stove over medium heat. Cook, stirring constantly, to prevent sticking. It should thicken in 3-5 minutes. 
        4. Add almond milk: For a creamy steel-cut oatmeal, stir half a cup of almond milk if you use water as the base. Cook, stirring constantly, until it reaches your desired consistency. Adjust the amount of milk for a thinner or thicker oatmeal to suit your taste.
        5. Serve with toppings: Divide the oats into bowls and top with your favorite fruits, nuts, or seeds. Be sure to scroll down to see my favorite topping suggestions. Alternatively, you can place them in mason jars, bring them to room temperature, and then store them in the fridge for up to 5 days for a grab-and-go breakfast.

        Serving Suggestions with Optional Add-In and Toppings Ideas

        This easy overnight Irish oats recipe is endlessly customizable, offering endless possibilities for mix-ins and toppings to keep things exciting. Here are a few ideas to make it your own:

        • Sweetener: You can use any sweetener you like. Maple syrup, honey, coconut sugar, and brown sugar would all work. A splash of vanilla extract can also enhance the natural sweetness and add a hint of warmth. You can add it when adding the liquid (and let it soak overnight) or use it as a drizzle on top right before serving.
        • Superfoods: I almost always make my overnight steel cut oats with chia seeds but you can also add ground flax seeds,  hemp seeds, pumpkin seeds, or sunflower seeds. Add any of these superfoods with the liquid or use them as a topping.
        • Nuts and nut butters: Adding a handful of nuts (like almonds, walnuts, or pecans) or a dollop of nut butter (such as peanut butter or almond butter) not only makes your overnight steel cut oatmeal more delicious but also adds a boost of protein. You can also add a handful of chunky granola
        • Fresh fruit: Any fruit—like bananas, berries, apples, or pomegranate seeds—makes a great topping. Alternatively, mix in a few tablespoons of blueberry puree to naturally sweeten your overnight steel oats recipe.
        • Yogurt: A dollap of Greek yogurt or even vanilla yogurt is a great way to add a tanginess while boosting the protein content of this overnight Irish oatmeal recipe. And if you are a fan of yogurt for breakfast, be sure to check out our Yogurt and Oats and Chia Yoghurt Pudding recipes.
        • Spices: A sprinkle of ground cinnamon, nutmeg, or cardamom adds warmth and depth of flavor to your oatmeal.
        • Savory toppings: While most people associate this recipe with sweet flavors, I like to switch things up by adding savory toppings like sautéed mushrooms, spinach, and a fried (or poached) egg. My savory steel cut oatmeal is a hearty and delicious breakfast option, using this exact recipe as the perfect base.
        • Protein powders: Add a scoop or two of protein powder to create high protein steel cut overnight oats that are perfect for a satisfying and nutritious start to your day.
        Overnight steel cut oats in a bowl topped off with fruit.

        How to Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

        Once you learn how to prepare steel-cut oats overnight, you’ll never run out of ideas for a satisfying breakfast. This recipe is perfect for meal prep and makes busy mornings so much easier. I usually make a big batch over the weekend and have it ready as a grab and go breakfast in the morning. Here is how I do it:

        • To Meal Prep: Bring the oatmeal to room temperature, divide it amongst mason jars, add the toppings, and seal them with the lid. Store them in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • To Store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container (or a mason jar) and keep in the fridge. 
        • Reheat: If you prefer your steel cut oatmeal warm, warm it up in a small saucepan with a splash of water or milk over medium-low heat, stirring regularly. Alternatively, reheat it in the microwave, stopping and stirring every 15 seconds to ensure even heating. Add more water or milk as needed to adjust the consistency to your liking.

        Frequently Asked Questions

        Can I freeze overnight steel cut oats?

        You technically can, but I do not recommend it as it will be mushy when thawed. Still, if you want to freeze it, store it in a freezer safe airtight container in the freezer for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

        How long to soak steel cut oats before cooking?

        Steel cut oats should soak for at least 6 hours, but 8–9 hours (or overnight) is ideal for the best texture.

        What is the ideal ratio of steel cut oats to water for overnight Irish oats?

        The ideal ratio for this recipe is 1 cup of steel cut oats to 2 cups of water (or milk).

        How long do overnight steel cut oats last in the fridge?

        When stored in an airtight container or tightly sealed jar, your oatmeal will stay fresh for up to 5 days.

        More Make-Ahead Breakfast Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this Overnight Steel Cut Oatmeal recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Steel cut overnight oats in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe

        Learn how to make Overnight Steel Cut Oats. With only 10 minutes hands on time, it is so easy to enjoy a bowl of warm and creamy steel cut oatmeal without having to wait and stir in front of the stove top.
        Course Breakfast
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 5 minutes
        Resting time 8 hours
        Total Time 8 hours 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 221kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Steel Cut Oats

        For The Toppings (Optional)

        • 1/4 cup fresh fruit or more
        • 1/4 cup nuts
        • 1 teaspoon chia seeds*

        Instructions

        • Bring water to a boil in a medium saucepan (with a lid).
        • Turn the heat off and add the steel cut oats and salt. Stir to combine. Put the lid on.
        • Let it sit on the kitchen counter overnight, at least 6 to 8 hours.
        • Next morning, put it back on the stove and heat over medium heat. Stir with a wooden spoon to prevent it from sticking. It will thicken as it cooks.
        • For a creamy texture pour in the almond milk, while stirring constantly.
        • Cook until its consistency and texture reaches to your liking. Feel free to add in more milk if you like it to be thinner. 
        • Ladle into bowls, top them off with your favorite toppings, and serve while still warm. Alternatively, you can bring it to room temperature, divide it amongst 4 mason jars, add the toppings and store in the fridge for upt o 5 days for an easy grab and go breakfast.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 to 3 1/2 cups of steel cut oatmeal, ideal for four servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving and do not include the toppings.
        • Soaking liquid: I prefer to use water for soaking as I think it is lighter. However, you can use an equal amount of regular or dairy-free milk if you prefer. 
        • Optional add ins and toppings: If you prefer your oatmeal sweeter, you can drizzle it with honey (or maple syrup) right before serving. Additionally, you can get creative with toppings and add ins. Anything you have on hand from fresh fruit to nuts to nut butters to chocolate chips would all be great additions.
        • No cook method: I found that a quick reheating in the morning produces the creamiest steel cut oatmeal. However, if you prefer a quicker option, you can enjoy these as no cook overnight steel cut oats. Give them a stir and serve right away with your favorite toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container (or mason jars sealed tightly) and kept in the fridge for up to 5 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 221kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 194mg | Potassium: 67mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 45IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/feed/ 45
        Pickled Turnips Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/#comments Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:23:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79897 If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen…]]>

        If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen them served with these pink turnip pickles. Their bold and zesty bite makes them the ideal accompaniment to the region’s spicy, rich, and savory dishes, adding texture, color, and a distinctive flavor.

        While they’re a staple in Lebanese cuisine (and therefore mostly referred to as Lebanese Turnip Pickles), they’ve also become widely enjoyed in neighboring countries, finding a place in their cuisines much like other popular Mediterranean condiments like hummus and tzatziki sauce.

        Pink pickled turnips in a glass jar.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        This Mediterranean pickled turnips recipe uses just a few basic pantry-friendly ingredients you already have. But if you are missing one or two, below is everything you need to know about the ingredients:

        • Hot water: We need hot water to dissolve the salt and sugar. There is no need to boil water; hot tap water works just fine.
        • White distilled vinegar: Use distilled white vinegar for the most natural and authentic taste. However, while it is not traditional, you can use apple cider vinegar for a more fruity and sweet taste or white wine vinegar for a milder, slightly more delicate flavor. 
        • Sugar: A small amount of sugar balances the tanginess of the vinegar with a touch of sweetness. You can use both granulated and cane sugar when making these Arabic pickled turnips.
        • Kosher salt: We used kosher salt since home cooks widely use it daily. However, pickling salt and sea salt can also be used. We do not recommend table salt as it contains iodine, which can produce bitter-tasting pickled pink pickles.
        • Turnips: We used the purple skin white turnips, which are widely available in grocery stores. Peeling is optional, but we recommend cutting them into uniform batons to ensure even pickling. While it is not traditional, Japanese hakurei turnips (aka Tokyo turnips) can also be used in this recipe. They are smaller and have a milder (less bitter) flavor than white radishes.
        • Beet: Any color of beet can be used, but red beets are used for the signature pink color. 
        • Fresh Garlic: While optional, a clove of fresh garlic infuses the brine with a savory flavor. Use a large clove of garlic or two small ones.
        • Bay leaves: A small bay leaf gives the pickling brine an herbal note that enhances the flavor of the turnip pickles, but it is optional.
        • Whole black peppercorns: We added a small amount of black peppercorns to provide a hint of spice and complexity to the overall flavor.
        • Optional add-ins: If preferred, other flavorings, such as a few leaves of fresh herbs (such as dill, parsley, and thyme) and a pinch of red pepper flakes, can be added.

        How to Make Pickled Turnips?

        Pickling turnips at home requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. The method we are using is usually referred to as “refrigerator pickles,” as we use a quick vinegar-based brine instead of canning using a heat-processing method used in other pickle recipes for a longer shelf life.

        Once it is assembled and the jar is sealed, all that’s left to do is to wait a few days for the most vibrant and flavorful Lebanese pickled turnips. Here are the steps:

        A collage of images showing how to pickle turnips.
        1. Prepare the quick brine: In a large measuring cup, combine the hot water, vinegar, sugar, and kosher salt. Add sugar and salt and whisk until they are completely dissolved.
        2. Layer the vegetables: In a clean 32-ounce glass jar with a wide mouth, start layering the turnips, beets, and garlic. Add a handful of turnips first, followed by a few beet pieces and a garlic clove. Repeat this process until the jar is nearly full.
        3. Add the spices: Add the bay leaf and sprinkle the peppercorns over the top.
        4. Pour the brine: Carefully pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, making sure that everything is completely submerged,  but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        Two photos side by side showing Lebanese turnip pickles before and after they are pickled.
        1. Seal and cool: Seal it with the lid and let it cool to room temperature. At this point, you can let it sit on the counter or transfer it to the refrigerator.
        2. Let time do its magic: For the best flavor, let the pickles sit in the fridge for at least three days. However, keep in mind that the magic really happens after five to seven days when the flavors fully develop.

        FAQs

        How to cut turnips for pickling?

        To cut turnips for pickling, start by slicing the top and the bottom. Use a vegetable peeler to peel the turnip. Cut the now-peeled turnip in half and then cut it into ½-inch slices. Stack the slices and cut them into ½-inch wide strips, creating baton-like pieces.

        How long are pickled turnips good for?

        As long as they are kept in the fridge in a tightly sealed jar, they will last for upto 1 month.

        How To Store Pickled Turnips?

        The best way to store pickled turnips is in a tightly sealed jar kept in the refrigerator. They will stay fresh and flavorful for up to a month, making them a convenient condiment you can use any time.

        How To Serve Them?

        These Middle Eastern pickled turnips are a wonderfully versatile condiment that can add a flavorful kick to many dishes. Below are a few serving suggestions:

        • Shawarma: Whether you’re serving a chicken shawarma platter, beef shawarma wrap in pita bread, or falafel wrap, these pickled pink turnips are the ultimate condiment to complement the bold spices and rich flavors of this classic Middle Eastern dish.
        • Rice Bowls: Use these Lebanese pickles as a topping for rice bowls, like my Homemade Cava Bowl or Shawarma Chicken Bowl, for a tangy crunch that pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables, seasoned rice, and your favorite protein.
        • Mezze Platter: Serve them along with other classic Mediterranean condiments like Baba Ganoush, Muhammara, and Hummus.
        • Salads: Top off any of your favorite Mediterranean salads to add a touch of tangy flavor and a satisfying crunch.

        Expert Tips

        While the process of pickling turnips is a relatively straightforward one, we wanted to include a few helpful tips to make sure you’ll succeed on your first try:

        • Wash the root vegetables well: Rinse turnips and beets under cold water to ensure they are dirt-free. While you can pickle them with the skin on, I prefer to peel them before pickling to ensure that the brine penetrates easily and the pickles have a cleaner taste.
        • Slice the vegetables evenly: Make sure the turnips and beets are cut into uniform pieces (about ½-inch batons) so they pickle evenly. Uneven cuts may result in some pieces being softer or crunchier than others.
        • Start with a clean jar: There is no need to sterilize the jar, but we recommend that your jar is thoroughly cleaned and dried before use. If you don’t have a 32-ounce jar, two 16-ounce glass jars also work.
        • Don’t overfill the jar: It is okay to pack the root vegetables tightly, but it is best to leave about an inch of room at the top of the jar. We do want the turnips and the beets to be fully submerged in the liquid, but leaving a small room at the top will allow the brine to circulate properly.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this pink pickled turnips recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Pickled turnips in a jar with some placed on a fork.
        Print

        Pickled Turnips Recipe

        A Middle Eastern staple, pink pickled turnips are a tangy and crunchy condiment served with wraps, sandwiches, grilled meats, and as a part of mezze spreads.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Resting time 5 days
        Total Time 5 days 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 44kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup hot water (tab water would work)
        • 1 cup white distilled vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar
        • 2 tablespoons kosher salt
        • 1 lb turnips peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 red beet small one, peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 garlic clove cut in half
        • 1 bay leaf
        • ¼ teaspoon black peppercorns

        Instructions

        • Add 1 cup of hot water, 1 cup of white distilled vinegar, 1 tablespoon sugar, and 2 tablespoons of kosher salt in a large measuring cup. Stir until the sugar is fully dissolved.*
        • In the mason jar, layer the turnips, beets, and garlic evenly: start with a handful of turnips, then a few pieces of beet, followed by a piece of garlic.
        • Repeat the same pattern until the jar is filled, ensuring the ingredients are distributed evenly throughout the jar. Gently push down to ensure they fit into the jar.
        • Add the bay leaf and peppercorns.
        • Pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, ensuring everything is submerged but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        • Seal the jar tightly and let it cool to room temperature before storing it in the refrigerator.
        • Refrigerate for at least 3 days before serving to allow the flavors to meld. For best results, wait 5-7 days.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of turnip pickles that is ideal for 6 servings as a condiment. The nutrition information below is per serving.
        • * Alternatively, you can place cold water in a small saucepan, add the vinegar, sugar, and salt, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the sugar and salt are fully dissolved.
        • Storage: While the color of the brine turns fully pink after 3 days, we highly recommend waiting at least 5 days for the flavors to develop. Be sure to store it in the fridge once the jar is opened. As long as it is tightly sealed and kept in the refrigerator, these Mediterranean pickled turnips will stay fresh for up to a month.
        • In the fridge or on the counter? We’ve seen versions of this pickled turnip recipe where some home cooks leave the jar on the kitchen counter (or a dark place like the pantry) for a few days before transferring it to the refrigerator, while others keep it in the fridge the entire time. We tried both ways and found that there were no differences in taste.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 44kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 2390mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/feed/ 2
        Christmas Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 15:15:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79518 Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness,…]]>

        Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness, and flavor to your holiday table with minimal effort. While I focused on red and green fruits to keep it festive, the great thing about this recipe is that you can use virtually any fruits you have on hand.

        Christmas salad with fruit in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        Like any great salad recipe, this fruit Christmas salad has two main components: the dressing and the fruit. To achieve the best flavor and texture, use ripe—but not overripe—fruits. Here’s everything you’ll need:

        For the Dressing:

        The dressing ingredients to make Christmas brunch fruit salad.
        • Maple Syrup: With its rich, caramel-like flavor, maple syrup adds a touch of natural sweetness to the salad. If you prefer, honey makes an excellent substitute.
        • Lemon zest: Be sure to zest the lemon before squeezing it, and whatever you do, do not skip using it, as it enhances the dressing by adding a concentrated burst of citrus flavor and aroma.
        • Lemon Juice: The bright, tangy flavor of lemon juice adds a refreshing tartness to the salad, while its acidity helps prevent the apples and pears from oxidizing and browning. However, you can use other citrus and fruit juices like lime juice, pineapple juice or orange juice.
        • Vanilla Extract
        • Spices: Ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg add warm, spiced notes to the dressing, giving it a cozy, festive flavor perfect for the holiday season. 

        For the Fruit Salad:

        While I am listing a bunch of fruits, feel free to use this as a guide and a place to start to make your own winter fruit salad with whatever fruit you have on hand.

        The fruit used in the recipe in bowls.
        • Apples: I used a combination of green apples (such as Granny Smit) and red apples (Gala or Honeycrisp), but any other type of apple would be lovely.
        • Pear (Red, Anjou, or Bosc): Sweet and juicy pears balance the tartness coming from apples. 
        • Oranges: You can use a combination of navel oranges and mandarin oranges (if you can get your hands on them). I know it is an extra step, but take the time to segment the orange for a clean, membrane-free presentation that ensures each piece is tender, juicy, and easy to eat. Alternatively, you can use clementines as a substitute if you can get your hands on them.
        • Kiwis: I included kiwis for their green color and sweet and tart flavor. 
        • Red or green grapes: When buying grapes for making this Christmas day fruit salad, be sure to choose firm, seedless green or red grapes for the best texture and ease of eating.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Many Christmas recipes with fruit feature pomegranate arils, not just for their sweet-tart flavor but also for their vibrant, jewel-like pop of color they bring to the dish. Here is an easy way to cut pomegranate if you need a refresher.
        • Raspberries: I included raspberries for their vibrant red color and to add a delicate, softer texture that balances the crunch of the other fruits in the salad. Strawberries would be a great substitute if you can’t find raspberries.

        Optional Toppings:

        Many Christmas fruit dishes can end up looking like just a simple pile of fruit in a bowl. While optional, by adding a few thoughtful toppings, you can elevate the presentation and bring in extra pops of color and texture, making the salad as stunning as it is delicious. Try adding:

        • Coconut flakes: If you have the time, toast them to enhance their flavor with a warm, nutty aroma that adds even more depth to the salad.
        • Fresh mint: A few sprigs of fresh mint can add a refreshing aroma and a vibrant pop of green, making your salad look and taste even more festive.

        How To Make Christmas Fruit Salad?

        Yes, there’s a bit of chopping involved, but don’t let that intimidate you—this xmas fruit salad recipe is super simple to put together. It’s quick to assemble, making it a great choice for busy holiday mornings. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make fruit bowl for Christmas.
        1. Make the Dressing: To keep cleanup simple, prepare the dressing directly in a large bowl. Whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, and nutmeg until well combined.
        2. Chop the Fruit: Begin by chopping the apples and pears, then add them to the bowl with the dressing. Coating them in the acidic dressing immediately helps prevent browning. Continue peeling and chopping the rest of the fruit (except raspberries) and place them in the bowl. Give it a toss to ensure all the fruit is evenly distributed and coated with the dressing. If you have the time, chill it for an hour or for upto six hours before serving.
        3. Garnish and serve: Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with coconut flakes and/or fresh mint, if using. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store and Freeze?

        Once you’ve made this fruit salad for xmas, you won’t want any of it to go to waste. With a bit of planning, you can keep it fresh and delicious for longer. Here’s how:

        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. Keep in mind that pre-cut fruit will release some of their juices. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep in mind that the fruits will release their juices over time, but the salad will still taste great. Give it a good toss before serving.
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this Christmas fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for upto 3 months.

        Expert Tips:

        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into similar-sized pieces for even mixing and easy eating. If you have the time, use cookie cutters (affiliate link) to cut apples and pears in fun shapes (like I did in the pictures). This is especially a fun way to make this salad with kids.
        A collage of images showing cutting of the fruit using cookie cutters and the finished dish.
        • Presentation: Use a clear trifle dish or a colorful holiday fruit bowl to show off the salad’s vibrant red and green colors, perfect for a Christmas morning fruit salad centerpiece.
        • Add Raspberries Last: I intentionally added the raspberries at the last minute as their soft texture can easily break.
        • Portion Planning: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups, suitable for a small Christmas dinner, but can be multiplied as needed. 
        • Make it your own: This recipe is a perfect starting point for creating your own signature fruit salad for any holiday! While the citrus-maple dressing is my go-to for Christmas, I love switching things up for other occasions. For Thanksgiving, I’ll often use my honey lime dressing for a bright, zesty twist that complements the autumnal flavors of the season. For Easter, I might add a splash of orange blossom water to the dressing for a festive springtime touch. No matter the holiday, this salad is versatile enough to adapt and impress every time!

        Serving Suggestions:

        This Christmas fruit salad recipe is wonderful when served on its own or as a refreshing side dish, but why not make it extra special for the holidays? Here are a few indulgent serving ideas to take it to the next level:

        You Might Also Like

        If you make this festive fruit salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Christmas fruit salad in a bowl.
        Print

        Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe

        Celebrate the holidays with this easy Christmas Fruit Salad recipe. Red and green fruits, drizzled with a citrus-maple dressing, make it a light and refreshing addition to your holiday table.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 277kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
        • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed or lime juice
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Pinch of nutmeg

        For the fruit salad

        • 1 green apple (about 1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Granny smith apples
        • 1 red apple about 1 ½ cups, peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Honey Crisp, Gala or Fuji
        • 1 pear (180g/1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Red, Anjou or Bosc
        • 2 oranges (140g) peeled and segmented or mandarin oranges
        • 2 kiwis (142g/1 cup) peeled, quartered, and cut into ½- inch cubes
        • 1 cup green grapes 190g cut in half
        • 1 cup pomegranate arils (160g)
        • 6 ounces raspberries (170g)

        Optional Garnish

        • Sprigs of mint optional topping

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: In a large salad bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.
        • To make the salad: Add the apple, pear, orange segments, kiwis, grapes and pomegranate arils. Toss to coat thoroughly. Chill for at least an hour or up to 6 hours in the refrigerator.
        • Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with fresh mint leaves, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 8 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into bite-sized pieces for even mixing. If you have the time, use cookie cutters to shape the apples and pears into fun designs (like I did in the pictures). It’s a great way to make the salad more festive and a fun activity to enjoy with kids!
        • Presentation: You can serve this salad in a large salad bowl or transfer it into a trifle dish, if you have one. Alternatively, you can place it in a large platter as well.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 57.1g | Protein: 2.8g | Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 405mg | Sugar: 40.4g | Calcium: 100mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts) https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/#comments Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:52:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79176 Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as…]]>

        Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as Marron Lyonnaise) originated in Northern Italy and France, where chestnuts thrive in the autumn and winter months. While preparing this French chestnut delicacy does take four days, the hands-on time is surprisingly minimal once your chestnuts are peeled.

        If you love roasting chestnuts in the oven or over an open fire but are looking to expand your chestnut repertoire, this European classic is a must-try. Yes, the prep time for this marrons glacés recipe may be a bit lengthy, but the process is straightforward and requires no advanced skills. Plus, making these candied chestnuts at home is far more budget-friendly than purchasing them at the store—without compromising that irresistible sweetness!

        Candied chestnuts in a gift box.

        What is marron glacé made of? The Ingredients List:

        Our recipe for candied chestnuts uses just four basic ingredients. However, the success of the end product will significantly depend on the quality of the ingredients you choose. 

        Below is everything you need to look for when buying them:

        Chestnuts:

        It is no secret that the chestnuts are the star ingredient in this recipe. When buying chestnuts, there are a few things to pay attention to:

        • Get the freshest chestnuts you can find: If possible, we recommend hand-selecting your chestnuts to ensure they are equal in size. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and without any blemishes or mold. Feel it between your fingers to ensure the skin is not dry. Once you’re back at home, one way to test freshness is to drop your chestnuts in a bowl of water. If any float, discard them, as they’re likely hollow inside the shell.
        • Not all chestnuts are created equal: In terms of chestnut variety, the French ‘marrons’ are superior in quality as they tend to be larger in size and more tender in texture. However, it’s hard to find them here in the US. A great alternative is Italian chestnuts, sold at national supermarkets like Whole Foods and Trader Joe’s during the holiday season. For this recipe, we recommend avoiding Chinese chestnuts. While they tend to be cheaper, we find them more challenging to peel.
        • Store-bought pre-cooked and peeled chestnuts are a great shortcut: If you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh chestnuts, you can buy them (affiliate link) from the store. One important thing to remember is you need to ensure that the only ingredient used is chestnuts. Store-bought, already-sweetened chestnuts won’t work in this recipe. 
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        For The Syrup:

        • Water: You need a ratio of 1 part water to 1 part sugar to make the sugar syrup the peeled chestnuts soak in.
        • Vanilla Bean: Use a whole vanilla pod sliced in half to flavor the sugar syrup. The vanilla beans infuse into the syrup for maximum flavor. We advise you against using vanilla extract if you can avoid it. While it won’t ruin the recipe, we found that much of it evaporates along with the water as the syrup reduces.
        • Sugar: Since we do our best to use natural sugars in our recipes, we sweetened the syrup with cane sugar, but granulated white or brown sugar can also be used.

        How to Make Marron Glace?

        Below are the step-by-step instructions detailing the process of making glazed chestnuts. At first glance, the process might look intimidating, but once you’re done with boiling and peeling the chestnuts, the rest will take no more than 5 minutes a day.

        If you’re new to boiling chestnuts, we recommend you first review our guide on How To Boil Chestnuts, as we go into all the nitty gritty details there.

        1. Score the chestnuts: Use a small, sharp knife (or a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife) to score a cross outside the shell, right across the middle or “belly” of the chestnuts. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another one, creating an X. Don’t go too deep with your cuts—you want to pierce through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.
        2. Boil the chestnuts in water: Place two cups of cold water into a medium-sized saucepan and boil over medium heat. Carefully drop the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. Towards the end, you’ll see the cut part start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        Person peeling chestnuts and images showing sugar syrup.
        1. Peel your chestnuts while they are still warm: Carefully remove chestnuts one at a time from the hot water and hold them using a clean dish towel if they’re too hot. Using a sharp knife, peel off the shell and fuzzy skin underneath. If you’re having difficulty removing it, place it back in hot water for a few more minutes.
        2. Make the sugar syrup: Place the chestnuts in a colander and rinse them under cool water. Add the sugar and water to a saucepan and bring to a simmer. Stir continuously until the sugar is fully dissolved. Continue simmering for another five minutes until the sugar syrup turns golden brown. If you are using granulated sugar, the syrup should remain clear.
        Chestnuts in sugar syrup with vanilla bean.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in the sugar syrup: Add the chestnuts and halved vanilla bean into the syrup. Simmer your marrons in syrup for 10 minutes while stirring gently, being careful not to break up the chestnuts. 
        2. Set aside for 24 hours: After 10 minutes, take the saucepan off the heat, put the lid on, and let it sit on the counter for 24 hours. The chestnuts will cool down in the syrup and soak up some of the liquid as they rest.
        3. Cook the chestnuts in syrup a second time: The next day, place the saucepan back on the stovetop and gently heat the syrup until it is simmering. Continue to simmer for another 3 minutes. Remove from the heat, place the lid back on, and set aside to cool.
        Marron glaces drying on a wire rack.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in syrup two more times: Repeat the process of cooking the chestnuts in syrup two more times, waiting 24 hours between each time.
        2. Place chestnuts on a wire rack: After the 4th and final round of simmering in syrup, using a slotted spoon, remove the chestnuts one at a time, draining off excess liquid. Place them onto a baking tray fitted with a wire rack. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts one by one and spread them evenly on the wire rack. Make sure you lift out any little bits that may have broken off.
        3. Dry out the chestnuts in the oven: Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as it will go) and place the chestnut tray in it. Cook the chestnuts for an hour. Remove the tray from the oven if the nuts have dried and hardened. If they’re still a bit sticky, prop the oven door open and leave the tray inside until thoroughly dried out. 
        4. Serve your marrons glaces: This French confection took effort to make and thus deserves a presentation worthy of your efforts! The best way to serve them is to individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper, paper cases, or place them in mini cupcake liners (affiliate link). 

        How To Store and Freeze Candied Chestnuts?

        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week.
        • To freeze: Store the individually wrapped chestnuts in an airtight container and freeze for up to 1 month. Defrost at room temperature.

        Ways To Use Marron Glaces

        This candied chestnut recipe is incredibly versatile. Once you’ve made your marrons glacés, there are many ways to enjoy these delicacies:

        • Dessert: Make a Coupe Marron. This is a French classic that, I think, is worthy of your caramelized chestnuts. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream to a tall glass, add your candied chestnuts, and then top it with a spoonful of whipped cream. It’s a simple yet decadent dessert, perfect for holiday entertaining.
        • Breakfast: Crumble marrons glacés over your favorite oatmeal, porridge, granola, or stack of pancakes
        • Meat and Cheese Board: Adding a sweet element to a cheese and charcuterie board is perfect alongside savory bites. The nutty, sweet earthiness from these chestnuts makes a beautiful, elevated addition to your serving platter.

        Expert Tips

        While making this glazed chestnuts recipe is fairly simple, there are a few important details to remember. Here are some helpful tips we’ve learned along the way to ensure your first attempt is a success:

        • Patience is key when scoring and peeling chestnuts: Take your time to carefully score the outer shell and fuzzy skin, aiming to pierce the skin without cutting too deeply into the flesh. Once cooked, peel the chestnuts while they’re still hot, as the skin becomes much harder to remove once they cool. Keep a paring knife nearby to help with any stubborn bits of skin that get stuck in the folds of the chestnut.
        • Save the broken pieces: Store them in a jar; they will taste just as good. Use them as a topping for ice cream or oatmeal.
        • Heat the syrup gently: Keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • Watch the sugar syrup level: Towards the end, if your syrup reduces too much, the chestnuts will start sticking to the bottom of the saucepan. If that happens, feel free to add a small amount of water (¼ cup or less) to thin it out and maintain consistency.
        • Keep the sugar syrup: Don’t discard the syrup after removing the chestnuts. Pass it through a sieve and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. It’s a great alternative to maple syrup. I love it when poured into cocktails and drizzled over oatmeal and ice cream.
        Candied chestnuts on a plate.

        FAQs

        What is marron glacé in English?

        In English, marron glacé translates to candied chestnuts. It is a French candy made by simmering chestnuts in a sugar syrup until they become tender and coated with a glossy, sugary glaze.

        What do marrons glacés taste like?

        Marrons glacés are sweet through the center with a hard, sugared exterior and tender, nutty, sweet-tasting flesh.

        Why are candied chestnuts so expensive?

        Marron glacé is expensive because making them is labor-intensive and time-consuming. Each chestnut must be carefully scored, peeled, and cooked in sugar syrup over several days, requiring precision and attention to detail. Additionally, high-quality chestnuts add to the cost, making it a luxury treat.

        Other Chestnut Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Marron Glace (Candied chestnuts) on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts)

        Marron Glacé, or candied chestnuts, are a luxurious French treat you can make at home. Sweet, nutty, and delicious, but cheaper than store-bought yet just as decadent!
        Course Dessert, Snack
        Cuisine French
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 1 hour
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Resting/cooling time 4 days
        Total Time 4 days 1 hour 15 minutes
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 240kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ lbs fresh chestnuts should give you 1.25lb/570g when peeled
        • 2 cups water more to boil chestnuts
        • 2 cups cane sugar or granulated sugar
        • 1 vanilla bean cut in half lengthwise

        Instructions

        • Place the chestnut on a cutting board flat side down. Hold it firmly between your index finger and thumb and make a horizontal slit and then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X.” Make sure to score through the hard outer shell and the fuzzy skin underneath. Do your best not to cut any deeper into the chestnut flesh. Repeat the same process for all of the chestnuts.
        • Fill a saucepan with cold water and bring it to a boil. Carefully place the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. The cut part will start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        • Using a slotted spoon, remove one to two chestnuts at a time, as they will be hot. If needed, use a kitchen towel to protect your hands. Carefully peel away the hard outer shell and the fuzzy inner skin, taking care not to break the chestnut. If the fuzzy skin is stuck in the folds of the chestnut, use the tip of a knife or a toothpick to remove it. If the skin is stubborn, return the chestnuts to the hot water for a minute to loosen it, then try peeling again. Once done, you can discard the shells, skins, and cooking water.
        • Place the now-boiled chestnuts into a colander and give them a quick rinse. Set aside.
        • To make the sugar syrup, add 2 cups of water and sugar to a medium-sized saucepan and bring it to a simmer over medium heat. Stir it continuously until the sugar dissolves. This should take no more than 7-9 minutes.
        • Carefully add the vanilla bean and chestnuts to the sugar syrup. Let them simmer for 10 minutes, stirring once every 2-3 minutes.
        • Turn the heat off. Carefully remove the vanilla bean and discard it. Put the lid on and let it sit at temperature for 24 hours.
        • After 24 hours, return the pan to the stove and bring the sugar syrup to a simmer, cooking the chestnuts for 3 minutes. Stir the syrup and chestnuts every few seconds to keep them from sticking to the pan. Once again, remove the pan from the heat, cover with a lid, and set aside at room temperature for 24 hours.
        • Repeat this process twice, heating and cooling every 24 hours (it should be 4 times in total).
        • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as your oven can go.)
        • After the final time, carefully remove them one at a time with a slotted spoon. Let the syrup drip off as much as possible. Spread the chestnuts on the wire rack.
        • Transfer the baking sheet to the preheated oven. Bake low and slow for 1 hour*. The chestnuts should be dry and hardened on the outside. If they’re still sticky, turn the oven off, open the door, and leave the chestnuts to continue drying inside.
        • To serve, individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper or cellophane or place them in mini cupcake liners. Gift and/or enjoy.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 18-20 candied chestnuts, depending on the size of your chestnuts. I listed the serving as 10 (2 per person) and the nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Short on time? If you are planning to gift these candied chestnuts and make a bigger batch, you can save time by buying already cooked and peeled chestnuts. Just make sure that the only ingredient listed on the packaging is chestnuts.
        • Heat the syrup gently: As you warm up the sugar syrup, keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper or mini cupcake liners. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 275mg | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 15IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/feed/ 2
        Homemade Pita Bread Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-pita-bread-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-pita-bread-recipe/#comments Fri, 06 Sep 2024 13:49:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77885 Pita bread—also known as Arabic bread, Lebanese bread, and Mediterranean pita—is a must-have for any Middle Eastern meal. However, it’s…]]>

        Pita bread—also known as Arabic bread, Lebanese bread, and Mediterranean pita—is a must-have for any Middle Eastern meal. However, it’s not the only homemade bread that comes together in a cinch. I have dozens of easy no knead bread recipes to fill out any menu, whether you need a rich brioche or a flaky biscuit.

        Several freshly baked fluffy pita bread on top of each other.

        What is Pita Bread Made Of?

        There are only six simple ingredients in pita bread, making this recipe a cost-effective way to flex your baking skills (and it tastes so much better than store-bought pita!).

        Ingredients for pita bread from the top view.
        • Water: It’s essential that your water is lukewarm (about 105-110 degrees F. or 40-43 degrees C) before adding it to your pita mixture. If the water is too hot, you’ll kill the yeast, but if it’s too cold, the yeast won’t “bloom.”
        • Active dry yeast: I used active dry yeast in this pita dough recipe, which required me to “activate” the yeast before adding other ingredients. Of course, you can use instant dry yeast, but your dough will rise more quickly, and the recipe’s timing will be shorter.
        • Granulated sugar: Sugar is vital among your pita bread ingredients, as it helps activate and fuel the yeast (in addition to giving it a lightly sweet, tender flavor!). To make this recipe refined sugar-free, you can use cane sugar instead.
        • All-purpose flour: I used all-purpose flour in my pita, but you may use bread flour instead if desired. However, keep in mind that bread flour has a higher protein content than all-purpose flour, which can give your pita a slightly chewier texture and a bit more structure. I would stick to all-purpose flour for light and tender pita bread, similar to store-bought pita bread.
        • Olive oil
        • Kosher salt 

        How to Make a Pita Bread Recipe From Scratch?

        You don’t have to work in a bakery to make pita bread like a pro. These step-by-step instructions will give you perfectly fluffy, golden-brown pita pockets, no matter how you want to cook pita bread: in an oven or on a skillet.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare (bloom the yeast) Arabian bread.
        1. Activate the yeast: Add the water, yeast, and sugar to a large mixing bowl and stir until combined.
        2. Add the first cup of flour: Add 1 cup (120 g.) of flour and the olive oil to the yeast mixture and stir until smooth, breaking up as many flour crumbs as possible and scraping down the bowl’s sides when necessary. 
        3. Let it rest: Once integrated, cover the mixture with a kitchen towel and let it rest until it begins foaming and forming bubbles (about 15 minutes).
        A collage of images showing how to make shawarma bread dough.
        1. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the remaining two cups (240 g.) of flour and the salt. Then, use a wooden spoon or clean hands to incorporate the dry ingredients until a sticky ball forms (approx. one minute). Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel, place it in a warm place, and let the pita bread dough rest for 30 minutes.
        2. Fold the dough: Hold one edge of the dough with your fingertips, then fold it halfway towards the middle of the ball. Turn the bowl 45 degrees and repeat this step until you complete a full turn. In the end, your dough should be smooth and elastic.
        Steps showing how to prepare the pita bread dough for baking.
        1. Add the olive oil: Drizzle one teaspoon of olive oil over the ball, rotating the dough and spreading the oil until the entire surface has an even coating. Cover the dough again and let it rest in a warm place until it doubles in size—about one hour.
        2. Separate the dough: Dust your work area with 3-4 tablespoons of flour, transfer the dough to the floured surface, and knead it until it forms a smooth ball (30-40 seconds). Then, use a bench scraper or sharp knife to divide the dough into eight equal pieces, with each piece weighing about 71 g.
        Steps showing how to roll the dough for gyro bread.
        1. Form the pita balls: Form each of the eight pieces into a ball, then place them on your work surface with their seam sides facing down. Cover the dough balls and let them rest for 20 minutes. They will slightly grow in size.
        2. Roll the pita bread rounds: Use a floured rolling pin to gently flatten each dough ball into a 6-inch circle, ensuring you don’t press so hard that the air bubbles flatten. Brush any excess flour off of your pita rounds and let them rest, uncovered, for 15 minutes.
        A collage of photos showing pita baking in the oven.
        1. Cook the pita dough:
          1. Bake the pita bread: Adjust your oven’s rack to the lowest position, place an upside-down baking sheet or pizza stone on top, and preheat the oven to 500 degrees F. Then, cut a large sheet of parchment paper into eight 6 x 8-inch squares and place each pita on its own sheet. Working with two rounds at a time, place the loaves and their parchment paper squares on the hot baking sheet. Bake the dough for 2.5 minutes, flip it over, and cook for another 2.5 minutes or until it puffs and is lightly browned. Remove the baked pitas from the oven and repeat the process with the remaining dough.
          2. Make a pan pita recipe: Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat for ten minutes or it is super hot. It is imperative that your skillet is hot for the pita to puff. Then, lightly coat the bottom of the skillet with one teaspoon of olive oil. Place the dough onto the hot skillet one pita round at a time and cook it until bubbles form (about one minute). Then, flip the pita, cook it for one minute, and flip it one more time. Cook the bread for a final 30 seconds before removing it from the heat. Repeat this process until you cook all of the remaining loaves.
        2. Enjoy: Serve your fresh pita bread warm or store it for later use.

        How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat Pita Bread?

        Making pita bread is a rewarding experience that doesn’t end when it’s fresh out of the oven! Not only is this recipe delicious right out of the oven, but it’s also a fantastic recipe for storage and freezing—just the thing for anyone who loves easy meal prep.

        • Make ahead: Want to turn this dough into an overnight pita recipe? Simply make your pita dough one day in advance and store the raw dough in the refrigerator until you are ready to bake. Take it out an hour before you are prepared to turn it into balls, and follow the recipe as written.
        • Storage: To store cooked pita bread, let it come to room temperature and place it in an air-tight container. The bread will then stay fresh in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
        • Freezing: When freezing your DIY pita bread, begin by letting the loaves cool to room temperature. Then, wrap them in plastic film and transfer them to a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Your pita will stay fresh in the freezer for up to three months.
        • Thawing and reheating: You don’t need to thaw your frozen pitas before reheating. Instead, place them directly into a toaster or low-heat oven (300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes or until heated.

        FAQs

        What is pita bread?

        Pita bread is a soft, light, and puffy bread with roots in the Middle East. In particular, this bread is known for its hollow, “pocket”-like center, which makes it a classic bread for savory fillings like shawarma, doner kebabs, and gyros.

        Where is pita bread from?

        Pita bread originates in the Middle East—particularly in the area of ancient Mesopotamia. Since then, however, this recipe has become a staple in many different countries’ cuisines, leading to a wide variety of names—“Middle Eastern bread,” “Mediterranean bread,” and “Syrian bread,” just to name a few.

        Does pita bread have yeast in it?

        Yes, traditional pita bread recipes need yeast to help the bread rise and give it its iconic “pocket”—where many fill it with savory additions, like shawarma, gyros, or other cooked meats.

        How to make pita bread soft?

        If your cooked pita bread ever becomes “hard” or “stale,” you can restore its softness by wrapping it in a damp cloth and placing it in a microwave or low-heat oven until warm. You can also help prolong your bread’s soft texture by placing your loaves in a plastic bag right after they’ve cooled from the oven. 

        Is there egg in pita bread?

        Pita bread typically doesn’t contain eggs. Instead, it traditionally includes a mixture of water, yeast, flour, and salt—a great recipe for those who are looking for a vegan bread option.

        Is pita bread Greek?

        Not quite. Pita bread is native to Middle Eastern regions, but it has since become popular in Greek cuisine—especially as a “gyro bread”—which leads many to think that it comes from Mediterranean areas.

        Aysegul’s Helpful Tips

        I might be biased, but I believe I shared the best way to make a homemade pita recipe here. However, there are a few things that I’d like to bring to your attention for succeeding on your first try. In this section, you’ll find everything you need to achieve the fluffiest, tastiest, and most authentic taste.

        • Digital scale: If you have a digital scale, I highly recommend using it for this quick pita bread recipe. It is especially helpful when dividing the dough into small bowls, helping you achieve evenly sized pita pockets.
        • Lukewarm water: Water temperature is the key to letting your yeast work its magic. Be sure to use lukewarm water (about 105-110 degrees F.), as too-hot water will kill the yeast, and too-cold water will keep the yeast from blooming.
        • Bottom rack vs. top rack: Direct heat is necessary when developing beautifully browned pocket bread. Therefore, you should always bake your pita on the bottom rack of your oven—not the top—and be sure to place parchment paper under each of your pita rounds while baking.
        • Maintaining the oven temperature: The best way to make fluffy pita bread with an open pocket is to keep the oven consistently hot. Be sure to set your oven to 500 degrees F. (or 450 degrees F., depending on how hot your oven can get). I also recommend baking two pita rounds at a time to avoid overcrowding the baking sheet (or pizza stone).
        • A word on browning: When we tested this recipe, we tried to achieve a golden brown color during baking. However, regardless of how many times we tried, increasing the amount of oil and sugar or even the baking time resulted in a light golden-yellow color. So, in short, the color you see in the photos is true to what you will end up with when you make this recipe.
        • Using whole wheat flour: To make a whole wheat pita bread recipe, mix one cup of whole wheat with two cups of all-purpose flour. Whole wheat flour is heavier, and using too much will prevent your pita bread from rising or developing its signature “puff.”
        • Gluten-free: To make this pita recipe for gluten-free diets, substitute the all-purpose flour with an equal amount of gluten-free flour. Here in the US,  Bob’s Red Mill’s gluten-free 1-1 baking flour (affiliate link) is a good brand you can use.
        Pita pocket on a cutting board with other pita bread.

        What to Do With Pita Bread

        A staple in my house, pita bread is one of the most versatile ingredients in my pantry. Below are a few of my favorite recipes with pita bread—from hand-held pockets to party-ready flatbreads.

        • Fill the pockets: It goes without saying that making pita pockets is one of the most classic uses of pita bread—especially when packed with authentic Middle Eastern flavors! I love filling my pita with succulent, savory meats, like Beef Shawarma, Chicken Shawarma, and gyros. Or, you can make a tender, light lunch by using one of my favorite easy pita bread fillings: my Chickpea and Tuna Sandwich recipe!
        • Make a wrap: Making a pita wrap is another one of my go-to meals using pita bread. Tasty, customizable, and portable, this serving option is excellent for on-the-go lunches and weeknight dinners alike. I especially like to use freshly baked pitas to make Pita Wraps with Chicken—a succulent, flavorful dish you can dress up with my Tzatziki or Tahini Lemon Sauce.
        • Make chips: You can easily transform this pita bread bake into appetizer-ready pita chips by drizzling the loaves with olive oil, seasoning them with salt and pepper, and baking them until crispy—just like I do in my Mediterranean Nachos Recipe. Or, you can use it as a crunchy-soft addition to your favorite homemade Cava bowl recipes.
        • Serve with dips: Light, tasty, and versatile, this easy homemade pita bread is just what you need to fill out a dip platter. This Middle Eastern bread is especially delectable when paired with classics like my smoky Baba ganoush, creamy Hummus, tangy CAVA Feta dip, or savory-sweet Muhammara.
        • Serve it as bread: Fluffy, light, and fully dip-able, pita bread makes an excellent accompaniment to saucy dishes, soups, and stews. You can make a gourmet Indian meal with ease by serving your pita along with curry dishes, like Chicken Chickpea Curry, or you can use it to sop up every last drop of internet-famous Alison Roman’s Stew.
        • Make pizza: You don’t need to deal with complicated pizza dough when you have this simple pita recipe on hand. With a few simple toppings, you can make a pita flatbread to rival any carryout pizza.

        More Bread Recipes

        If you make this Homemade Pita Bread recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Several pita bread placed on top of each other from the front view.
        Print

        Homemade Pita Bread Recipe

        Once you make this Homemade Pita Bread Recipe you won't ever buy it from the store because it is not only easy to make, but also light years better. So, go ahead, make a batch use some for your favorite shawarmas, wraps, flatbreads or mezze platters and store (or freeze) the rest for later.
        Course Bread
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 16 minutes
        Resting tim 2 hours 15 minutes
        Total Time 2 hours 46 minutes
        Servings 8 pitas
        Calories 191kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup luke-warm water 240 ml. (105-110 degrees F.)
        • 1 packet active dry yeast 7 g.
        • 1 teaspoon granulated sugar 4 g.
        • 3 cups all-purpose flour 360 g., divided, plus more for dusting
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil plus 1 teaspoon to coat
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

        Instructions

        • To make the dough, stir together water, yeast, and sugar in a large bowl until combined.
        • In the same bowl, stir in 1 cup (120 g.) of flour and olive oil until smooth, breaking up most of the flour crumbs and scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed. Cover with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 15 minutes or until it starts to form bubbles.
        • Add the other 2 cups (240 g.) of flour and salt. Using a wooden spoon (or clean hands), mix to incorporate until a sticky ball forms, approximately 1 minute.
        • Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel and let the dough rest in a warm place for 30 minutes.
        • Holding the edge of the dough with your fingertips, fold it over halfway towards the middle. Turn the bowl at 45 degrees and repeat the same process until you complete a full turn. The dough should be smooth and elastic.
        • Drizzle a teaspoon of olive oil on top, rotate the dough ball, and spread the olive oil to cover the whole thing. Cover and let the dough rest in a warm place until it doubles in size, about an hour.
        • To prepare the dough balls, dust your work area with a small amount (3-4 tablespoons) of flour.
        • Transfer the dough and knead it for 30-40 seconds or until it forms a smooth ball.
        • Using a bench scraper (or a sharp knife), divide the dough into eight equal pieces, about 71 to 74 g. each.
        • Form each piece into a ball and place them on the lightly floured work surface with the seam sides down. Cover the balls and let them rest for 20 minutes.
        • To prepare the oven, adjust your oven rack to the lowest position. Place a baking sheet upside down (or a pizza stone) on the wire rack. Preheat the oven to 500 degrees F.*
        • Cut a large sheet of parchment paper into eight 6 by 8-inch squares.
        • Using a floured rolling pin, gently flatten each ball into a 6-inch circle. Do not press down too hard so you retain the air bubbles.
        • Brush any excess flour off before placing them on a square piece of parchment paper. Let them rest, uncovered, for 15 minutes.
        • You can bake it in the oven or cook it on a cast iron skillet:
          Using the oven method: To bake the pita, work with two pita rounds at a time, and place the pita loaves with the parchment paper on the hot baking sheet. It is important to work quickly to maintain the oven temperature and allow the pita to “steam” open and create a pocket. Bake for 2 minutes and 30 seconds, flip over, and cook for another 2 minutes and 30 seconds, until lightly golden brown. Remove and repeat this process with the remaining dough.
          Cooking it in a skillet: Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat for 10 minutes. It should be very hot. Using a brush or paper towel, lightly coat the bottom of the skillet with 1 teaspoon olive oil. Place a pita dough loaf onto the skillet and cook for 1 minute or until bubbles form. Flip and cook for an additional minute. Flip one more time and cook for an additional 30 seconds. Remove from the skillet and repeat until all loaves are cooked. You don't need to add more oil each time, but if the pan starts to look dry, you can add just a little bit more.
        • Serve while they are still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 8 loaves of pita. The nutritional values below are per pita.
        • Using a standing mixer: You can make this recipe using a stand mixer fitted with a dough hook attachment. Instead of working the dough with your hands, simply follow this recipe with your mixer set at low speed, scraping down the sides of the bowl as necessary. Begin by mixing the water, yeast, and sugar for one minute. Then, mix in one cup of flour and olive oil until the dough becomes smooth (approximately one minute). After letting the dough rest for 15 minutes, add the remaining two cups of flour and salt and mix the dough until it forms a ball. When the dough separates from the bowl and begins attaching to the dough hook (in about a minute or so), you can remove it from the mixer’s attachment and let it rest for 30 minutes or until ready to fold. 
        • Gluten free: You can use a 1-1 gluten-free flour to make this recipe. We tested it with Bob’s Red Mills brand, and it worked well.
        • Fluffy pita pockets (troubleshooting): Two main factors to getting fluffy, soft pita bread are kneading and your oven’s temperature. Firstly, don’t skip on the last kneading, and don’t overwork your dough. If you press it too hard when rolling it, you may deflate the dough’s bubbles, leading to flat pita loaves. Secondly, keep your oven as hot as possible while baking, moving quickly to avoid any temperature decreases. Though these steps should ensure fluffy pita pockets, they’ll still be delicious even if they don’t puff up.
        • High-temperature oven: Knowing that not all ovens can reach 500 degrees F., we tested this recipe at 450 degrees F. The timing was slightly longer, with about 30 seconds more cooking time on each side of the pita bread.
        • Storage: Leftover pita can be stored in an airtight container (or a plastic bag) in the fridge for 3-4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature first.
        • Freezing: Wrap cooled pita loaves in plastic film and transfer them to a freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Your pita will stay fresh in the freezer for up to three months.
        • Thawing and reheating: No need to thaw frozen pita. You can reheat in a low-heat oven (or toaster oven) until warmed to your liking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 191kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 294mg | Potassium: 59mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin C: 0.003mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-pita-bread-recipe/feed/ 2
        Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

        If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

        What is Muhammara?

        Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

        Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

        Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

        If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

        My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

        Key Ingredients:

        To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

        All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
        Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
        • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
        • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
        • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
        • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
        • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
        • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
        • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
        • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
        • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
        • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

        How to make Muhammara?

        To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

        Red peppers are roasted and charred
        1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
        2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
        3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
        Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
        Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
        1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
        2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

        Expert Tips:

        • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
        • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
        • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
        • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

        FAQs

        How do you pronounce Muhammara?

        Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

        Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

        Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

        Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

        You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

        Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

        While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

        How Many Calories?

        This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

        Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

        Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

        Is This Recipe Spicy?

        The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

        Storage Instructions:

        • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
        • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
        • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

        Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

        There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

        • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
        • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
        • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
        • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
        • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
        A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

        Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

        If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Muhammara Recipe

        Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 176kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
        • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
        • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
        • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
        • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • teaspoon cayenne pepper

        Instructions

        • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
        • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
        • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
        • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
        • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
        • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
        • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
        • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

        This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
        Grilled Corn On The Cob https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/#comments Tue, 13 Aug 2024 14:08:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77631 In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook corn on the grill with and without the husk, as…]]>

        In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook corn on the grill with and without the husk, as well as other essential tips: how to buy corn for grilling, customize your seasoning, tailor your menu, and the best time and temperature to cook corn on the cob on the grill.

        If you prefer a quicker alternative to cooking corn on the cob, be sure to check out our Air Fryer Corn on The Cob recipe.

        Grilled sweet corn on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilled Corn

        It only takes a handful of fresh, simple ingredients to make this tasty summer staple:

        Ingredients for the recipe.
        • Ears of corn: We used six ears of fresh sweet corn to make this recipe, but you can easily multiply the recipe and use more. For the best result, do your best to pick the freshest corn. Take your time to examine each ear of corn to avoid moldy, wet, or limp ones while at the grocery store.
        • Olive oil: Olive oil is only necessary if you’re grilling corn without the husk, as it helps the corn develop that external char.
        • Butter: Though optional, a few tablespoons of unsalted butter can add richness and depth to your grilled, seasoned corn on the cob.
        • Seasoning: After cooking corn on the grill, you only need a sprinkle of kosher salt and black pepper to bring out the veggie’s natural flavors.

        How to Grill Corn on the Cob?

        Below, I’ll show you two ways to make this recipe for barbeque corn on the cob: 1.) grilled corn with the husk on and 2.) grilled corn with the husk removed (AKA “husked corn”). 

        In the Husk

        Grilling fresh corn with the husk on is an excellent option for those who prefer juicier, sweeter cobs. The soaked husks keep the kernels moist by “steaming” them, though this method doesn’t produce as much char as naked cobs.

        A collage of images showing how to grill corn on the cob in the husk.
        1. Remove the silk strands: Peel back the husks from the corn, ensuring they remain attached to the cob. Then, remove as many silk strings as possible before bringing the husks back over the cob, covering the kernels again.
        2. Soak the corn cobs: Fill a large pot with tap water and place the corn inside. Let the cobs and their husks soak for fifteen minutes.
        3. Prepare the grill: Preheat the gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450 degrees F.).
        4. Dry the soaked corn cobs: Remove the whole corn cobs from their water bath and shake them to remove as much water as possible.
        5. Grill: Place the corn on the medium-hot grill and cook for 15 minutes—uncovered—while rotating the cobs every 3-5 minutes. At the end of 15 minutes, each side should have an even level of cooking.
        6. Serve: When ready, remove the corn cobs from the grill and remove their husks. Serve them with butter, salt, and pepper (if desired), and enjoy!

        Without Husks

        I recommend grilling husked corn on the cob if you prefer a smokier, more prominent char on your veggies.

        1. Preheat the grill: Heat the grill to medium-high heat (about 450 degrees F.).
        A collage of images showing how to grill corn on the cob without husks on a gas grill.
        1. Prepare the corn: Remove husks and silk strands from the corn cobs, then brush each side with a generous layer of olive oil.
        2. Place the sweet corn on the grill: Place the corn cobs on the hot grill grates. Keeping the grill uncovered, cook the corn until it reaches your desired char level, rotating the cobs every 3-4 minutes (about 15 minutes in total). Finally, pierce a kernel with a sharp knife or fork to test for doneness. Your corn is ready if the kernels are tender, juicy, and lightly charred.
        3. Serve: Remove the grilled cobs from the grill and serve them with butter, kosher salt, and pepper (if using).

        Seasoning Ideas for Grilled Corn

        It’s no secret that salt and butter are iconic additions to grilled corn on the cob. However, the best grilled corn seasoning is one you can customize to fit any flavor profile.

        Below are a few of my favorite ways to take basic corn seasoning to the next level.

        • Butter and salt: Though a staple, plain butter and a sprinkle of salt don’t have to be boring. You can infuse your grilled sweet corn with complex, robust notes using compound butter (hello, Baked Garlic Butter!), garlic, and fresh herbs. Or, you can add lemon zest and pepper to melted butter for a zestier and brighter corn seasoning option.
        • Elote (Mexican Street Corn): Fresh, tangy flavors are at your fingertips when you use this Mexican seasoning for corn on the cob on the grill. All you need are a few simple ingredients—like lime juice, mayonnaise, cotija cheese, sour cream, and chili powder—and you’re ready to please any crowd. If you are short on time but love the flavors of Mexican street corn, try our Elote Corn Dip.
        • Barbecue sauce: With similarly smoky and sweet undertones, BBQ corn on the cob pairs brilliantly with BBQ sauce. You can even make homemade barbecue sauce to ensure a perfect flavor match.
        • Cajun spice: Want to give your corn a touch of spice? My Blackened Seasoning packs all the bold, spicy taste of Louisiana cuisine into one simple seasoning mix.
        • Parmesan cheese and basil: You can put a gourmet spin on your barbequed corn on the cob by sprinkling it with Parmesan cheese and fresh chopped basil—a herby, cheesy, and undeniably delicious combination.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        Of course, grill-roasted corn on the cob tastes best right after cooking. However, it’s also great for meal prep, including short- and long-term storage. 

        • Storage: After cooking corn on the grill, let your leftovers reach room temperature. To avoid sogginess, I recommend wrapping the cooled cobs in plastic wrap (or aluminum foil) and placing them in an airtight container. You can then store the cobs in the refrigerator for 3-5 days. 
        • Freezing: You can freeze your BBQ corn as whole cobs or just the corn kernels. Either way, begin by letting the corn come to room temperature. If you want to preserve the entire cobs, wrap them in tin foil or plastic wrap, then place them in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Or, you can remove the corn kernels and put them in an airtight container. You can then store your corn (whole or cut) in the freezer for up to 2-3 months.
        • Thawing: To thaw your grilled corn, transfer it to the fridge overnight until ready to reheat.
        • Reheat: There are three options to reheat your grilled corn cobs. You can put them on a medium-heat grill, heat them in the oven at 350 degrees F. for five minutes, or (if you’re short on time) microwave them in 30-second increments until warmed.

        How to Serve Grilled Corn on the Cob

        Want to fill out your menu after cooking corn on the cob on the grill? Here, you’ll find all the grilled corn recipes you need to fill your table, whether you’re in the mood for a BBQ classic or a light lunch solution.

        • Burgers: Can you imagine a better match than juicy burgers and grilled corn cobs? Not me! I can’t resist serving my tender kernels with a loaded Bacon and Avocado Burger and a side of super-fresh Vegan Coleslaw or creamy Deviled Egg Potato Salad.
        • Grilled meats and seafood: If you’re in the mood for a savory, protein-packed main, barbecue corn on the cob compliments nearly any grilled meat or seafood dish. I love serving this corn recipe with succulent seafood, like my smoky Grilled Salmon or citrusy Grilled Mahi Mahi. Or, when I’m craving a little spice, Grilled Harissa Chicken is the perfect way to enjoy authentic North African eats at home.
        • Salads: This juicy corn recipe pairs incredibly well with garden-fresh salads, adding irresistibly smoky, mildly sweet undertones to all your favorite recipes. I love using this easy grilled corn in Mexican-inspired dishes, like my Street Corn Salad Recipe, tender Corn Black Bean Salad, and zesty Cowboy Caviar.
        Barbequed corn on the cob with and without the husk shown.

        Expert Tips

        If you want to make the most flavorful, tender grilled corn cobs, you’re in the right place. This simple guide has tips on everything you’ll need, from how to grill corn on a gas stove to selecting the best produce.

        • Charcoal grilled corn on the cob: If you prefer cooking corn on a charcoal grill, be sure that you never leave your veggies alone—especially when you plan on grilling the cobs with their husks. The husks may catch fire when the corn sits over direct heat, causing a minor flare-up. If this happens, move the corn to the cool side of the grill, close the lid, and wait until the flames dissipate.
        • Grilling corn inside on a gas stove: Want the savory, smoky flavor of grilled corn without the hassle of outdoor grilling? You can make this recipe indoors by cooking corn on a grill pan over a gas stove. However, keep in mind that grilling corn on a grill pan takes a bit more time than cooking it on the grill, so be patient.
        • Tips for buying corn: There are a few key things to consider when selecting the best corn. Try to choose corn cobs with the following: 1.) firm, plump, and even kernels; 2.) light tan, sticky silk; and 3.) bright green, intact husks. Though fresh corn is easiest to find when in season, as long as you avoid old or moldy-looking produce, you should be able to find corn year-round at your local grocery store.
        • Without soaking: If you’re grilling corn with the husk on, I highly recommend soaking the veggies beforehand, ensuring the kernels come out tender and moist. Of course, you can cook the cobs without soaking them first, but the kernels are prone to drying out after grilling, and the husks are more likely to burn.
        • Dry out: Though achieving photo-ready grill marks is tempting, you mustn’t accidentally overcook your corn—especially when you try to char corn cobs with their husks still on. Too much cooking can dry out the corn kernels, making them tough and flavorless.
        • Keep a close eye on it: Because corn is susceptible to overcooking, it’s essential to keep a close eye on your cobs during the grilling process. Furthermore, you must rotate your corn while cooking to ensure equal cooking around the cob.

        FAQs

        It’s easy to make corn on the cob grill. However, if you want to know more about this beginner-friendly recipe, I’ve answered all your questions below.

        How long do you grill corn on the cob?

        I recommend grilling corn cobs at 425 degrees F. for about 15 minutes, rotating them as needed. However, you might adjust your grilling time slightly, depending on your ideal level of char.

        Do you have to boil corn before grilling?

        If you want to reduce grilling time, you can parboil corn before grilling. However, this step is unnecessary, and there’s virtually no difference in taste or quality—as long as you grill your corn with a high enough heat.

        How to soak corn before grilling?

        Pre-soaking is a great way to give your kernels maximum tenderness and flavor when you want to grill corn on the cob in the husk. To soak your cobs, remove their silk strands, replace their external husks, and place them in a pot filled with cool water for fifteen minutes. When ready, shake off as much water as possible, and they’re ready to grill!

        Can you freeze grilled corn on the cob?

        Definitely! To do so, let your corn cobs reach room temperature, wrap them in tin foil or plastic wrap, and place them in a freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, you can freeze the grilled corn for 2-3 months.

        Can you grill corn on the cob frozen?

        Though not ideal, you can undoubtedly grill frozen corn on the cob. To do so, begin by slightly thawing the frozen corn (letting it rest for 30 minutes to an hour at room temperature should suffice). Then, brush it with olive oil and cook it on a 400-degree F. grill for 15-20 minutes, rotating them occasionally until the kernels become tender and have a slight char.

        How to tell when grilled corn on the cob is done?

        You can tell when your corn is done grilling by piercing one of its kernels with a fork or knife. Your cobs should be ready when the kernels are tender, juicy, and have a little char.

        Other Corn Recipes You Might Like

        If you love roasted corn on the grill, you’re in luck! With these easy recipes, you can enjoy corn’s tender-crisp, sweet flavor any day of the week.

        Grilled corn on the cob on a plate from the front view.
        Print

        Grilled Corn on The Cob Recipe

        Grilling corn on the cob is an easy way to prepare a fresh, sweet, and smoky side that’s fit for any occasion: weeknight dinners, outdoor cookouts, summer get-togethers, and beyond.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Soaking time (optional) 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 157kcal

        Ingredients

        • 6 ears corn
        • ¼ cup olive oil use only if grilling without husks
        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter more as needed (optional)
        • Kosher salt and pepper to taste

        Instructions

        To prepare corn with husks:

        • Peel the husks back from the corn, keeping them attached to the cob.
        • Remove the silk strands as best as you can. Bring the husks back to cover the kernels and the cob.
        • Fill a large pot with tap water and place the cobs in the pot. Let them soak for 15 minutes.
        • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat, about 425 degrees F.
        • Remove the corn cobs from the water, shaking to remove as much water as possible.
        • Place cobs directly on the grill grate and grill for 15 minutes, uncovered, rotating every 3-5 minutes for even cooking.
        • Remove the husks from the cob and serve the corn with butter, kosher salt, and pepper, if desired.

        To prepare the corn without husks:

        • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat, about 425 degrees F.
        • Remove the husks and silk from the corn cobs.
        • Generously brush the olive oil over all the corn cobs.
        • Place the corn cobs on the grill grate. Grill, rotating every 3-4 minutes, and cook, uncovered, for 15 minutes or to your desired level of “char.” The corn is done when the kernels are tender and have a slight char. You can check by piercing a kernel with a knife or fork; it should be tender and juicy.
        • Remove and serve with butter, kosher salt, and pepper, if using.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes six grilled corn on the cob. The nutritional information below does not include the calories coming from the optional butter.
        • Soaked or not soaked: This recipe was tested as noted above (i.e., with soaked corn cob husks), but we also tried it without soaking the corn with husks first. The cob with soaked husks produced a moist cob, while the non-soaked husk corn tasted slightly dry.
        • With or without husks: Grilling with soaked husks vs. no husks is based on preference. The soaked husk is moist, but it results in a limited char. By contrast, the “naked” corn has a nice char and smoky flavor, but it isn’t as moist.
        • Keep a close eye on it: It is important to stay with the corn as it’s being grilled because the oil can cause flare-ups. The husks can also catch fire when unattended.
        • Storage: Barbecue corn on the cob tastes best on the day it is grilled. However, you can store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. To avoid sogginess, I recommend wrapping the cooled cobs in plastic wrap and placing them in an airtight container.
        • Do not throw away the cobs: Make use of all the corn cobs and make corn stock! It is such an easy and nice way to get more life out of your grilled corn.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 157kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 243mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/feed/ 2
        Grilled Eggplant Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-eggplant/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2024 11:56:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77463 Versatile, tender, and delicious, eggplant is easily one of my favorite vegetables. If you’re like me, you can’t get enough…]]>

        Versatile, tender, and delicious, eggplant is easily one of my favorite vegetables. If you’re like me, you can’t get enough easy grilled eggplant recipes, which makes other dishes—like fresh Eggplant Caprese, Baked Eggplant Parmesan, and creamy Baba Ganoush—a no-brainer for simple meal prep.

        Grilled sliced eggplant on a plate garnished with fresh basil.

        Ingredients

        Eggplant

        • Selecting eggplant varieties: The first step to grilling eggplant is to determine which types of eggplant work best for your recipe. I prefer globe eggplants, as they’re widely available at U.S. grocery stores, have a plump shape, and are hearty enough to withstand high grilling temperatures. However, other larger eggplants—like rosa bianca, Italian eggplant, and graffiti eggplant—would also work, though you might have to adjust your cooking time slightly.
          Still, I don’t recommend using thinner varieties, like Japanese eggplant and Chinese eggplant, as they’re too small and delicate for this recipe.
        • Salting the eggplant: Though an option, salting eggplant isn’t necessary, as modern-day eggplants aren’t as bitter as their ancestors. However, you may consider making brined eggplant if you use older or homegrown varieties (like the kind you might find at a farmer’s market), as they tend to have more seeds and a more bitter taste than commercial types.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Marinade

        Of course, you can get away with brushing your eggplant slices with olive oil, salt, and pepper before grilling. However, my grilled eggplant marinade is an easy way to take your dish to the next level, lending each slice even more savory, complex layers of flavor.

        • Olive oil: You can use any olive oil for this recipe. Though extra virgin olive oil has a more full-bodied flavor, you can also use other neutral oils, like avocado oil, or a half-and-half mix of butter and olive oil for a more decadent finish.
        • Balsamic vinegar: Though I love the rich, umami flavor of balsamic grilled eggplant, you can also use red wine vinegar, depending on what you have in your pantry.
        • Garlic: Be sure to mince or press your fresh garlic cloves before adding them to your marinade. This fine cut will help the garlic release its flavor evenly throughout the olive oil mixture.
        • Eggplant seasoning: You only need kosher salt and ground black pepper to season your vegetables.

        How to Grill Eggplant on a Gas Grill?

        With a handful of simple steps and undeniably delicious results, this BBQ eggplant recipe is a must for anyone with an outdoor grill. Below, I’ll walk you through everything from eggplant preparation for grilling to cooking times.

        1. Preheat the grill: Heat the grill to medium-high heat (about 400 degrees F.) and—once hot—clean the grill grates.
        Person marinating eggplant for grilling.
        1. Slice the eggplant: Without peeling, cut your globe eggplant into rounds that measure ½ inches thick. Then, arrange the slices in a single layer on a baking sheet. (You can learn more about how to cut eggplant for grilling in my foolproof guide to cutting eggplant!)
        2. Make the eggplant marinade: Place the olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (a 9” x 13” dish should work). Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        3. Marinate the eggplant: Add the eggplant slices to the marinade dish, ensuring both sides get an even covering of the mixture. Let the eggplant rest for ten minutes. When ready to grill, transfer them onto a plate or a sheet pan, shaking off the excess marinade.
        Mediterranean grilled eggplant being cooked on the grill.
        1. Grill eggplant slices: Place the marinated eggplant slices directly on the hot grill grate and cook them until they turn a light, golden brown (4-5 mins.). Then, use a spatula to flip the slices and cook them for another 2-3 minutes until they become tender.
        2. Serve: Remove the finished eggplant from the grill’s grates, sprinkle it with feta cheese (if desired), and serve while warm. 

        How to Store?

        Making eggplant on the grill is a great way to meal prep during the summer months. Here is how I store and reheat it:

        • Store: You can store your leftover marinated grilled eggplant in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat your grilled aubergine slices, lay them in a single layer on a sheet pan. Then, heat them in a low-heat oven (about 300 degrees F.) for 5-8 minutes or until warmed through.
        • Freeze: I don’t recommend freezing this recipe, as the extreme temperatures make the eggplant mushy and flavorless.

        What to Serve with Grilled Eggplant?

        Grilled eggplant is so delicious that it’s satisfying on its own, especially with fresh basil leaves and crumbled feta cheese on top. Add a loaf of Crusty Bread or Air-Fried Garlic Bread, and you’ll fill everyone at your table.

        Still, this easy eggplant dish is also incredibly versatile, making it a great side dish for dozens of delicious recipes—just a few of which I’ve listed below!

        • Grilled seafood: One of my favorite grilled eggplant ideas is to serve it alongside your favorite grilled seafood. My Grilled Sockeye Salmon is the ultimate 30-minute summer dinner, with a zesty, fresh lemon juice to finish it off. Otherwise, Grilled Mahi Mahi will add deliciously savory-sweet notes to your eggplant-packed plate.
        • Chicken and meat: Juicy and flavorful grilled meat dishes are irresistible with this barbecue eggplant recipe. In particular, grilled eggplant is a fabulous side dish for other Mediterranean classics, like my herby Baked Chicken Kabobs and succulent Baked Beef Kabobs.
        • Salad: In the mood for a vegetarian meal? These grilled eggplant slices are a great accompaniment to countless salad recipes due to their meaty texture and savory taste. The flavor of the eggplant goes especially well with my garden-fresh Spring Mix Salad, tangy Greek Cucumber Salad, and creamy Tomato Mozzarella Salad.
        • Sauces: You can easily enhance the bright, savory flavors of your BBQ eggplant by serving it with a side of your favorite marinara sauce (or my homemade Tomato Basil Sauce for a five-star mix of fresh herbs and red pepper flakes!). Or, you can serve your eggplant with Harissa Sauce for a spicy, smoky dip no one can resist.
        • Antipasto platters: One of my favorite ways to please a crowd is to add these grilled eggplant slices to an antipasti, mezze, or meat and cheese platter. With a delectable range of cured meats, cheeses, sauces, and fruits, this serving idea will be as tasty as it is photo-ready.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        The best way to grill eggplant is with these chef-level pointers. Below, you’ll learn how to grill eggplant like a pro, including tips on slicing methods, grilling temperatures, and more.

        • Slice evenly: When preparing eggplant for grilling, be sure to cut the veggie into uniform slices to ensure even cooking.
        • Clean grates well: Though oiling your grates isn’t necessary, it’s essential that you remove any unwanted residue from them before adding your eggplant.
        • Keep a close eye on it: Eggplant tends to cook super quickly, so you must keep a close eye on your slices to avoid overcooking—especially since you won’t move them for the first 4-5 minutes. You should also watch your grill’s temperature to ensure it maintains an even 400 degrees F. Closing the grill’s lid will lead to a quick temperature increase, and reopening the lid will cool it down.
        • No grill? No problem: If you want to make this grilled brinjal recipe indoors, you can use a grill pan. I own and recommend Staub’s cast iron grill pan (affiliate link), which delivers great results.
        • Seasonings: My recipe only calls for a basic mix of kosher salt and black pepper. However, you can add herbaceous, spicy, or bright flavors by adding more seasoning—like cumin, cayenne, fresh mint, oregano, or fresh parsley. This way, you can perfectly match the flavor profile of your eggplant to the other dishes on your menu. And if you need a shortcut, try adding a few teaspoons of our all-purpose Mediterranean Seasoning.

        FAQs

        How do you prepare eggplant for grilling?

        To barbecue eggplant, begin by slicing your veggie into equally thick rounds (salting and peeling are unnecessary). Then, marinate your slices with a mixture of olive oil, vinegar, and garlic before grilling.

        Can you marinate eggplant?

        Definitely! Marinating eggplant for grilling is a great way to keep your slices from becoming dry (and it only takes ten minutes!). Eggplant tends to soak up oil, so marinade ingredients—especially vinegar—provide a protective barrier that keeps the oil on the outside, giving your slices a golden exterior and deep, savory flavor on the inside.

        How long to grill eggplant on a gas grill?

        I recommend grilling your eggplant slices for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through. However, this timing might change depending on the size and thickness of your eggplant slices, so be sure to keep an eye on them while cooking.

        Does eggplant need to be salted before grilling?

        Not really. You should only sweat your eggplants if you’re using older or homegrown varieties, as most commercial, modern-day varieties don’t have the same bitterness.

        If you make your own Grilled Eggplant following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        More Eggplant Recipes

        Print

        Grilled Eggplant Recipe

        This recipe for grilled eggplant packs all the tender, smoky, and savory flavor you could want in a side dish. Sliced eggplant marinated in balsamic vinegar, garlic, and olive oil marinade takes this otherwise humble vegetable to a whole new level.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 8 minutes
        Marinading Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 23 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 187kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 large eggplant or 2 medium eggplants (approximately 1 lb)
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
        • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons Crumbled feta optional topping

        Instructions

        • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
        • Slice the eggplant into ½-inch-thick rounds and place in a single layer on a baking sheet.
        • To make the marinade, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (9×13) until combined.
        • Place the sliced eggplant in the marinade and ensure that they are coated with the liquid on both sides. Let them rest for 10 minutes. When ready to grill, transfer the marinated eggplant slices onto a plate, shaking off the excess marinade.
        • Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate and cook for 4-5 minutes until lightly golden browned. Using a spatula, flip and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes until tender.
        • Remove and top with feta cheese, if using. Serve while still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe uses one large eggplant and yields 8-10 slices of grilled eggplant, which is ideal for four servings. You can multiply the recipe as you please. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Eggplant skin is edible: There is no need to peel the skin.
        • Check for doneness: Fully cooked eggplant should be tender—not mushy!—and have nice grill marks. Remember, too, that the second side tends to cook more quickly than the first, so you’ll need to adjust each side’s cooking times to maintain the veggie’s consistency.
        • Charcoal grill: If using a charcoal grill, start by lighting the charcoal and letting it burn until the coals are covered with a light layer of ash, about 20 minutes. Arrange the eggplant slices directly on the grill grates over the hot coals. Grill for 4-5 minutes on each side or until the eggplant slices have nice grill marks and are tender.
        • No grill? No problem: If you want to make this grilled brinjal recipe indoors, you can use a grill pan. I own and recommend Staub’s cast iron grill pan (affiliate link), which delivers great results.
        • Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place the slices in a single layer on a sheet pan. Then, heat them in a low-heat oven (about 300 degrees F.) for 5-8 minutes or until warmed through.
        • Freeze: I don’t recommend freezing this recipe, as the extreme temperatures make the eggplant mushy and flavorless.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 187kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 685mg | Potassium: 295mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 64IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-eggplant/feed/ 0
        Mediterranean Salad Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:30:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77297 If you are a fan of Mediterranean salad dressings like my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette and Yogurt Salad Dressing, you will…]]>

        If you are a fan of Mediterranean salad dressings like my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette and Yogurt Salad Dressing, you will love this Mediterranean dressing recipe! It is similar to a traditional Greek salad dressing (known as ladolemono) but with a touch of inspiration from my Turkish roots. This homemade dressing is also a fantastic alternative to store-bought salad dressings and will surely be a big hit with the whole family.

        Mediterranean vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        This recipe for Mediterranean salad dressing is my secret to making salads that burst with fresh, vibrant flavors and keep everyone coming back for more. It is bright and tangy like most vinaigrettes but enhanced with boldly flavorful ingredients like Dijon mustard and garlic. You’ll need the following ingredients:

        Ingredients for Mediterranean vinaigrette dressing from the top view with text on the image.
        • Fresh lemon juice: I can’t imagine a Mediterranean vinaigrette dressing that doesn’t use freshly squeezed lemon juice. That said, this recipe would also work if you combine half lemon juice and half balsamic vinegar, red wine vinegar, or white wine vinegar.
        • Fresh garlic: A fresh garlic clove will offer the punchiest flavor, but you can substitute ½ teaspoon garlic powder if that is all you have.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the natural emulsifier in this Mediterranean vinaigrette recipe and adds special creaminess. 
        • Honey: While the honey is optional, I’ve found it balances the acidity and makes for a more well-rounded flavor. Real maple syrup is a good substitute.
        • Oregano: Fresh oregano is classic, but I like to use ¼ teaspoon dried oregano when fresh is unavailable. You could also use other fresh herbs, such as fresh mint, fresh parsley, or fresh basil.
        • Seasoning: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper enhances those Mediterranean flavors.
        • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the best flavor.

        How to Make Mediterranean Salad Dressing?

        A Mediterranean diet salad dressing is made quick and easy with the help of a small mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage images showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Mix ingredients: In a small bowl, add lemon juice, garlic, mustard, honey (if using), oregano, salt and black pepper. Whisk until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: Slowly pour the olive oil in a steady stream while whisking it constantly until creamy and smooth, about 30 seconds.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning and add more salt or lemon juice if necessary.

        How to Store?

        This homemade Mediterranean dressing can be stored in the refrigerator as a healthy essential to have on hand at all times. Simply store it in a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid or in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week.

        Remember that as it sits in the fridge, olive oil and lemon will separate, which is normal. Just be sure to give it a good shake before using it.

        How to Use Mediterranean Dressing in Your Daily Cooking?

        While this dressing is perfect for salads, its versatility goes far beyond that. It’s an excellent way to elevate not only Mediterranean dishes but many other delicious recipes as well. Some of my favorite ways to incorporate this dressing into my daily cooking include:

        • Salad dressing: Think of this as an all-purpose salad dressing you can drizzle on any salad made with fresh ingredients such as veggies, pasta, or even potatoes. It can be used as the dressing component for any of my Summer Salads or drizzled over a simple green salad made with leafy greens, grape tomatoes, crunchy cucumbers, and tangy feta cheese. My favorite side salad, Spring Mix Salad, is a fantastic example. Additionally, its tangy and sweet flavors pair especially well with tomatoes and tomato salads, like my Burrata Caprese Salad, and it elevates pasta salad like my Mediterranean Pasta Salad and grain salads, like Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. The bright lemon flavors give a new meaning to Italian salads, such as the ever-so-popular La Scala Salad.
        • Finishing sauce for roasted or grilled meats: But don’t stop there. Use it as a finishing sauce to brush on any grilled protein, including Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Salmon, or Grilled Harissa Chicken.
        • Marinade for meat and fish: Take this dressing further and use it as a marinade for chicken, beef, lamb, or fish. The acidity from the lemon juice helps tenderize the meat, while the olive oil and fresh herbs add flavor.
        A salad with tomatoes, Kalamata olives, bell peppers and feta being drizzled with lemon olive oil salad dressing.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Follow these helpful tips to achieve the best results when making this healthy Mediterranean salad dressing. Whether you prefer a well-emulsified dressing or a quick shake-and-go method, these pointers will help you create a flavorful and perfectly balanced dressing every time.

        • Emulsifying: If you are looking for a well-emulsified dressing, whisk together all the ingredients except the olive oil in a small bowl. Then, slowly pour in the olive oil while still whisking constantly. This gradual process helps the oil and vinegar whisk together smoothly.
        • Put it into a jar and shake: While I prefer the emulsifying method, for a fast and easy approach, you can put all the ingredients into a mason jar, seal, and shake vigorously until smooth.
        • Use good quality ingredients: The best dressing for Mediterranean salad will taste even better with high-quality extra-virgin olive oil, honey, and freshly squeezed lemon juice. As with any recipe with minimal ingredients, the quality of the ingredients you use in this lemon olive oil salad dressing matters. Use an extra virgin olive oil that you like, take the time to squeeze your lemon juice, and choose a good-quality honey for the best results.
        • Let it sit: Allow the dressing to sit for 15-30 minutes before using it for the best flavor. This allows the ingredients to marry together.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors will be most prominent when served at room temperature. If you have stored the dressing in the fridge, remove it from the refrigerator 5-10 minutes before using it and give it a good shake before serving.
        • Taste for seasoning: Adjust the level of lemon juice, honey, or salt based on your taste. Add some vinegar if you like it more acidic or a bit more salt or honey to tame the acidity.

        Other Mediterranean Diet Salad Dressings You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Mediterranean Salad Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A batch of my Homemade Mediterranean salad dressing recipe in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Mediterranean Salad Dressing Recipe

        Much better than any store-bought dressings, this Mediterranean Salad Dressing with olive oil, lemon juice, and garlic is bursting with fresh, vibrant flavors. Perfect as a salad dressing, marinade, or finishing sauce, it’s heart-healthy and versatile. Try it on salads, grilled veggies, and more!
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 252kcal

        Ingredients

        • cup lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 1 clove fresh garlic grated or pressed – or ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey or maple syrup (optional)
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ cup olive oil

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl, whisk together lemon juice, garlic, mustard, honey (if using), oregano, salt and pepper until combined.
        • Slowly pour the olive oil while whisking it constantly until creamy for 30 seconds.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Use it immediately or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 2/3 cup of vinaigrette, ideal for a salad serving four people, each serving about three tablespoons. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week. As it sits, olive oil and lemon will separate, so give it a good shake before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 252kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 34mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 11IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/feed/ 6
        Harissa Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 23:14:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76518 In this simple guide, you’ll discover how to make harissa sauce that’s as close to an authentic harissa paste recipe…]]>

        In this simple guide, you’ll discover how to make harissa sauce that’s as close to an authentic harissa paste recipe as possible, in addition to delectable serving suggestions, storage tips, and more.

        Harissa recipes are essential to any spice-lover’s cookbook. If you’re in the mood for a succulent poultry main, my Grilled Harissa Chicken and Harissa Honey Chicken offer a brilliant flavor that will enrich any weekday dinner.

        What is Harissa?

        Harissa is a smooth, spicy condiment that originated in Tunisia. Sometimes referred to as “Tunisian ketchup” or “harissa paste,” this bold, red sauce includes a basic mixture of dried chilis, warm spices, tomato paste, garlic, olive oil, and lemon juice. This mix results in a delicious blend of hot, smoky, and mildly tangy flavors.

        Since its creation, harissa has spread to neighboring countries, like Morocco, Jordan, and Algeria, and it’s now a staple in North African and Middle Eastern cuisine.

        Harissa paste in a jar from the front view.

        Harissa Ingredients

        You only need a handful of ingredients to make this iconic Middle Eastern condiment. Plus, you can even customize your harissa’s main ingredients to ensure your sauce matches any menu.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Dried chilies: I prefer using a mix of guajillo, ancho, and de arbol chilies in this recipe due to their balanced mix of heat and complexity. However, if you’re looking to make a spicy harissa recipe, you can incorporate Mexico chilies that fall higher on the Scoville Scale, or you can make a sweeter harissa sauce by using more New Mexico chilies (a milder variant). For the best harissa, I recommend using 7-8 dried peppers of different kinds. You should be able to find dried chilies at your local grocery store, or you can purchase them online (affiliate link) if desired.
        • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds are essential to giving this condiment its warm, fragrant heat. I prefer using pre-ground spices in this mixture to save time, but you can also grind an equal amount of whole spices with a spice grinder or mortar and pestle.
        • Roasted red peppers: To make homemade harissa paste, you’ll need two whole roasted red peppers. I usually opt for a jarred version (be sure to drain its juices first!), but you can also make homemade roasted red bell peppers for a fresher, smokier taste.
        • Fresh Garlic cloves
        • Seasonings: I found that a simple mix of kosher salt and Spanish paprika was sufficient to give this African chili paste a savory, bright flavor. Smoked paprika—a version of Spanish paprika—will also work if you prefer a more robust smokiness. If desired, you can also add ¼ teaspoon of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to increase the recipe’s heat level.
        • Tomato paste
        • Lemon juice: I always opt for fresh lemon juice, which has the most vibrant, citrusy flavor. 
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-tasting extra virgin olive oil such as  Costo’s single-origin organic olive oil (affiliate link) would work beautifully in this recipe.
        • Honey (optional): The recipe below does not include honey, but harissa and honey are a wonderful combination that you’ll find in many recipes. If you prefer a sweet harissa, I recommend adding two tablespoons of honey, giving it a taste, and increasing it based on your preference.

        How to Make Harissa Sauce?

        It’s easy to make harissa paste worthy of a North African restaurant in your own kitchen. With my easy step-by-step instructions, you can prepare this condiment in under an hour.

        Steps showing how to make harissa from scratch.
        1. Rehydrate the chilies: Place the dried chiles in a medium-sized bowl, add boiling hot water, and place a weighted bowl on top to keep the chilies submerged. Alternatively, you can cover it with plastic wrap. Let the chilies steep in the water for 30 minutes.
        2. Deseed the chili peppers: Once the chilies rehydrate, remove them from the water and remove their stems and seeds. If you prefer a spicier blend, you can keep some of the seeds in the peppers.
        3. Blend the ingredients for harissa: Place the rehydrated harissa peppers in your food processor bowl (or a blender, depending on what you’re using). Then, add the ground cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, roasted peppers, garlic, kosher salt, Spanish paprika, tomato paste, lemon juice, olive oil, and cayenne pepper. Pulse the mixture until smooth.
        4. Enjoy: Use your harissa chili paste in your desired recipe or store it in an airtight container in the fridge if you plan to use it later.

        How to Store & Freeze?

        Once you make harissa paste, you’ll want to use it every day of the week. These storage tips guarantee easy meal prep and keep this condiment fresh whenever the craving strikes.

        • Storage: To store your harissa sauce, transfer it to an airtight container or jar and store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 weeks. I also recommend pouring a thin layer of olive oil over the top of the sauce before storage to prolong its shelf life, as this layer will help limit exposure to oxygen and bacteria.
        • Freezing: This red harissa recipe can be frozen for up to one month in an airtight, freezer-safe container. For easier portion sizes, pour your sauce into an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into a Ziplock bag.
        • Thawing: To thaw frozen harissa, place it in the fridge overnight or until ready to use.

        How to Use Harissa Paste in Recipes?

        Wondering how to use this spicy harissa sauce in everyday cooking? In this section, you’ll find all my favorite dishes with harissa sauce—sandwich spreads, marinades, salad dressings, and beyond!

        • Marinade: I highly recommend adding this harissa sauce to marinade recipes if you love spicy foods. Try adding a tablespoon (or two) of harissa to my Yogurt Chicken Marinade and Shrimp Marinade to introduce a vibrant heat and depth of flavor that will make your dishes stand out. Also, honey and harissa make a delicious marinade that can be used for chicken or salmon. Want to give it a try? Make my harissa honey chicken and use it in my Copycat CAVA bowls recipe!
        • Soups and stews: Want to add extra complexity and spice to a basic soup recipe? Try using this spicy sauce in place of tomato or chili paste! In particular, I love adding harissa to hearty, full-bodied dishes like Quinoa Stew, Vegan Chili, and Beef Stew.
        • Pasta sauce: If you want to add sumptuous heat to your pasta, harissa is just the thing. For a spicy kick, stir a quarter cup of this condiment into your favorite tomato-based pasta sauce.
        • Spread for sandwiches, pizza, and flatbread: I love using this simple recipe as a harissa spread for easy weekday lunches, like sandwiches and flatbreads. You can even spread it over avocado toast for a delectable balance of rich, piquant flavors.
        • Dip: Add a spoonful of this Mediterranean chili sauce to plain Greek yogurt, and you can spice up any dipping sauce in no time. You can even mix it with Hummus for a creamy, hot classic no one can resist. You can also make it a part of your next mezze platter by serving it with other Middle Eastern dips like my Babaganoush and Muhammara recipe.
        • Roasting vegetables: Because it’s such a flavorful, smooth sauce, hot chili pepper paste is an excellent condiment to drizzle over roasted veggies. I especially love pouring it over a hearty plate of Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Eggplant for an extra-bold side.
          Alternatively, you can also spread it over vegetables before roasting like I did in my Roasted Harissa Carrots recipe.
        • Salad Dressing: This harissa hot sauce recipe is a flavorful condiment and a fantastic base for salad dressings. With a few simple ingredients, you can even make a tangy yet hot Harissa Vinaigrette.
        • Grains: Tired of bland grains? You can give a little kick of spice to everything from rice to bulgur to quinoa to couscous when you add harissa to your mix.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        The best way to make homemade harissa is to use these chef-approved pointers. With tips on flavoring, safety, and consistency, this guide will ensure that even beginners can easily make harissa paste.

        • Experiment with different types of dried peppers: Red chili peppers have a wide range in spice levels, with some (especially Mexico chilies) having greater amounts of heat and others (like New Mexico chiles) boasting a milder profile. Therefore, I encourage you to experiment with the blend of chilies to achieve your ideal level of spice.
        • Wear gloves (or wash your hands well): When making this spicy condiment, you must protect yourself from the chilies’ spicy compound, capsaicin. Though flavorful, capsaicin often clings to the skin and can cause a burning sensation when exposed to eyes, airways, and cuts. Wearing gloves is a good idea when working with chili peppers or—if you don’t have any gloves—wash your hands thoroughly afterward.
        • Toast spices: As I mentioned earlier, I used ground spices to save time. However, you can use whole spices and grind them yourself. If you decide to do so, I recommend toasting them in a cast iron skillet for 3-5 minutes before grinding them in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle. 
        • Consistency and texture: In its original Tunisian form, harissa has a smooth, condiment-like consistency. However, harissa has since taken on other commercialized forms, like “harissa sauce” (which purportedly has a thinner, sauce-like texture) and “harissa paste” (which is supposed to be thicker and less liquidy). Though these terms technically refer to the same thing, you can still adjust this recipe’s consistency using more or less olive oil, depending on your desired thickness. During our recipe testing, we compared our homemade version to commercial brands (like Trader Joe’s Harissa, NY Shuk, and Mina ) and thought ⅓ to ½ cup of olive oil was a good place to start. 
        • Taste for seasoning: As with any recipe, it’s important to taste your sauce before serving and adjust the seasoning as needed. If your recipe already includes salt, be mindful of this when adding harissa sauce. You may need to reduce the amount of salt in your harissa to prevent over-seasoning your final dish.
        • Gets better the next day: Letting your DIY harissa sauce sit in the fridge overnight is an easy way to let its flavors develop and mix, leading to a much tastier, more robust recipe.
        Store-bought harissa in jars.

        FAQs

        Where is harissa from?

        The origin of harissa lies in Tunisia, though this condiment has since spread to other North African and Middle Eastern countries, such as Morocco, Libya, and Algeria.

        What is a harissa paste substitute?

        If you’re looking for a harissa sauce alternative, I recommend selecting another chili-based sauce, like sriracha, sambal oelek, or chipotle in adobo sauce. These substitutions have similar spicy, aromatic notes, but they also have different flavor profiles. Therefore, when using these substitutions, I’d encourage you to add other spices —like cumin, coriander, and caraway—into your dish to imitate the flavors of harissa. 

        Where can I find harissa paste?

        While making harissa sauce from scratch is superior, you can find this condiment at grocery stores like Trader Joe’s and ALDI—particularly in their “international,” “Mediterranean,” or “ethnic” sections. I like to use brands like NY Shuk and Mina (affiliate link) due to their freshness and depth.

        Is sriracha the same as harissa?

        Though they both boast a similarly smooth, chili-based flavor profile, sriracha isn’t the same as harissa sauce. Sriracha, a Thai chili sauce, is tangier and sweeter, and people often use it in Asian dishes. By contrast, Tunisian harissa boasts a spicier, more concentrated flavor, which many use to enhance the flavor of meat marinades, dips, soups, and more.

        How spicy is harissa?

        Depending on the chilies used, this condiment can range from mild to super-hot. Some versions may be spicier if they use Mexico chilies and spices like cayenne pepper, while others may have a more subtle heat if they use New Mexico chilies. Because of this range, I highly recommend that you make harissa yourself, even starting with homemade harissa powder, so you can adjust the spiciness to your desired level.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Harissa sauce in a jar from the front view.
        Print

        Harissa Sauce Recipe

        Made from a basic mix of fresh ingredients, homemade harissa sauce is a simple recipe that will infuse any dish with spicy, smoky, and subtly tangy flavors. Plus, it not only tastes better but it is also cheaper than its store-bought alternatives.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 1 cup
        Calories 717kcal

        Ingredients

        • 8 dried chilis I used 3 guajillo chili peppers, 3 Ancho chili peppers, and 2 Arbol chili peppers*
        • 1 cup boiling water
        • 1 ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 ¼ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
        • 2 whole roasted red peppers from jarred – drained
        • 3 garlic cloves
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon paprika you can use sweet Spanish paprika or smoked paprika
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste optional
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional

        Instructions

        • Place the dried chilies in a medium-sized bowl and add the boiling water.
        • Place a weighted bowl* on top to keep the chilies submerged and to rehydrate them. Let them steep for 30 minutes, and then drain.
        • Remove the stems and deseed all the chili peppers. You can remove all of the seeds or keep some for added heat, depending on your preference.
        • Place the chili peppers in the food processor (or blender). Add the ground cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, roasted red pepper, garlic, kosher salt, paprika, tomato paste, lemon juice, olive oil, and cayenne pepper.
        • Pulse until pureed and smooth.
        • Place in an airtight container and refrigerate if not using right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 1 cup of harissa. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
        • Dried chilies: Use this recipe as a starting place, but feel free to use different types of dried chilies to make this sauce.
        • Toast spices: I used ground spices to save time. However, you can use whole spices and grind them yourself. If you decide to do so, I recommend toasting an equal amount of whole spice in a cast iron skillet for 3-5 minutes before grinding them in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle.
        • Storage: To store your harissa sauce, transfer it to an airtight container or jar and store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 weeks. I also recommend pouring a thin layer of olive oil over the top of the sauce before storage to prolong its shelf life, as this layer will help limit exposure to oxygen and bacteria.
        • Freezing: This red harissa recipe can be frozen for up to one month in an airtight, freezer-safe container. For easier portion sizes, pour your sauce into an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into a Ziplock bag.
        • Thawing: To thaw frozen harissa, place it in the fridge overnight or until ready to use.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 717kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 74g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 53g | Sodium: 2505mg | Potassium: 483mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2550IU | Vitamin C: 27mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/feed/ 1
        Harissa Paste from Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:53:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76561 This simple guide includes everything you need to transform harissa powder into a paste, including how to make it, how…]]>

        This simple guide includes everything you need to transform harissa powder into a paste, including how to make it, how to use it in your daily cooking, how to adjust its spice levels and consistency, and how to select the best ingredients (including storebought powders.)

        Harissa paste made by using harissa powder in a jar.

        With a thick, creamy texture and a bold, spicy flavor, this harissa paste made using harissa powder will surely get you hooked on tons of other harissa recipes. My Harissa Vinaigrette is just the thing to give your salads a delicious kick of heat, while my Harissa Grilled Chicken will be the star of any dinner menu.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        You only need a few key ingredients to turn harissa powder to paste. Below are my go-to’s for making this condiment as robust and flavorful as possible.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Roasted red peppers: To make this recipe, you’ll need two jarred roasted red peppers, with as much juice removed as possible. Since these peppers tend to be milder, they better balance the spicier components of harissa seasoning.
        • Harissa Powder: I prefer making this spice mix from scratch because it gives complete control over its heat levels, as you can select your favorite balance of mild and hot chili peppers. Made with a blend of dried chilis, coriander and cumin seeds, and garlic powder, I find that homemade harissa seasoning is fresher and more flavorful than premade ones. However, if you want to reduce prep time, you can also find different brands at the store. My favorite ones are New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (a slightly milder spice blend). We tested this recipe with both brands and found that it tasted very good.
        • Kosher Salt: I listed only one teaspoon of kosher salt, but you can add more or less depending on the saltiness of your harissa seasoning. You can also use sea salt or table salt based on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic cloves: Because you’ll eventually blend your fresh garlic cloves in a food processor, a rough chop will suffice before adding them to your other ingredients.
        • Tomato paste: This is an optional ingredient, but I enjoy the umami flavors it provides to the recipe.
        • Lemon juice: I recommend using fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its brighter, more resonant citrus flavors. However, you can use store-bought lemon juice instead if needed.
        • Extra virgin Olive oil: Olive oil is one of the main ingredients in this powder-based harissa paste recipe. Though some recipes might advise using hot water instead, I found that a mild-tasting extra virgin olive oil offers a richer taste and smoother texture.

        How to Make Harissa Paste from Harissa Powder

        It is no secret that harissa paste is a staple ingredient in Tunisian cooking. While you can buy it at the store (or make it from scratch), following my simple, step-by-step instructions will teach you to convert harissa powder to paste in less than ten minutes.

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Add the ingredients: Add the roasted red chilies, harissa powder, garlic cloves, tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil to your food processor or a bowl large enough to accommodate an immersion blender. 
        2. Blend: Blend the ingredients to your desired consistency.
        3. Enjoy: You can use your harissa paste in your favorite recipe or store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two weeks.

        Ways to Use It

        Adding authentic North African flair to your favorite meals is easy with this recipe. Whether you’re perfecting a meat marinade or adding heat to your favorite pasta sauce. Below are just a few of my favorite uses for this iconic blend:

        • Marinades: An easy way to give your favorite meats depth and heat is to add harissa paste to your marinade mix—especially yogurt-based marinades, like my Greek Yogurt Chicken. This mix tastes excellent with poultry, beef, and lamb, and it also makes an incredible pair with seafood and fish (such as my Harissa Salmon), given its mild citrus flavor. 
        • Dips and sauces: Want to give a spicy kick to your favorite dips? I love mixing harissa paste with Mediterranean classics, like Baba Ganoush, Tahini Yogurt Sauce, and Hummus—perfect additions to any mezze platter! Or, you can even infuse ketchup with harissa paste for a hot take on this classic condiment.
        • Burgers and sandwiches: If you’re tired of bland lunches, try using this harissa paste as a spicy spread for burgers, weekday sandwiches, and on-the-go wraps. That way, you can enjoy gourmet eats any day of the week.
        • Pasta sauce: A dollop of harissa paste can infuse any basic pasta sauce with deliciously smoky heat. 
        • Soups and stews: If you want to add more fragrant, bold notes to your favorite soup recipes, I highly recommend using harissa paste instead of tomato or chili paste. In particular, this recipe tastes out of this world when added to my Eggplant Beef Stew, Lentil Soup, and Quinoa Chili.
        • Eggs: Start your morning meal with vibrant heat by adding this harissa paste recipe to everything from simple scrambled eggs to a five-star plate of shakshuka.
        • Roasted veggies: With a deep yet tender taste, roasted vegetables expertly balance the savory heat of harissa paste. Roasted carrots, Roasted Eggplant, and Oven-Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are just a few great ideas for this flavor-packed pairing.
        • Grains and legumes: Mixing harissa paste into a bowl of rice, Bulgur Pilaf, or lentils is one of my favorite ways to add a touch of heat to Middle Eastern cuisine. You can even try making harissa-marinated chickpeas for a side dish that’s as flavorful as it is filling.

        Expert Tips

        The best way to make powder-based harissa paste is by using these chef-approved tips. Below, you’ll discover how to adjust your paste’s consistency, enhance its natural flavors, and more.

        • Texture and consistency: When preparing harissa paste from powder, remember that the mixture’s consistency depends on how long you blend it. The less you blend, the thicker your mix will be, and more blending will result in a thinner, more sauce-like consistency. If your mixture becomes too liquidy, add more harissa powder to thicken it.
        • Freshest spices: It’s no secret that fresh spices have the most potent, delicious flavor. Therefore, I highly encourage you to select the freshest ingredients possible—especially if you make your harissa spice blend from scratch.
        • Order of ingredients: When blending your paste, place the red peppers into the bowl first, followed by the powder. This ordering will lead to a more thorough, even incorporation of the ingredients.

        FAQs

        What does harissa paste taste like?

        Harissa paste—a classic ingredient from Tunisia—boasts a complex balance of heat, smokiness, and earthy fragrance. In addition to its base of dried chiles and warm spices, this spicy condiment also gets a subtle tang from its lemon juice and tomato paste.

        Is harissa paste the same as harissa powder?

        Not quite. Of course, both recipes come from a similar mix of dried chili peppers and ground spices, like cumin, paprika, coriander seeds, and caraway seeds. However, harissa paste has a thick, wet consistency due to its inclusion of other ingredients, like lemon juice and tomato paste. Meanwhile, harissa powder exists in a dry, powder form—more like a seasoning.

        What can I use as a substitute for harissa paste?

        If you don’t have the ingredients to make your own harissa paste, you can try substituting it with another hot chili pepper paste, like sambal oelek, gochujang, or sriracha. Though these mixes have slightly different favorite profiles, they all boast a similarly spicy base, and you can add ingredients like ground cumin, coriander, and caraway to mimic the aromatic warmth of traditional harissa.

        If you make your own Harissa Paste from Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa paste from powder in a jar from the front view.
        Print

        Harissa Paste from Powder Recipe

        This flavor-packed recipe for harissa paste from powder takes less than ten minutes to prepare. With just a few simple ingredients, you can add delectably spicy North African notes to dozens of dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 128kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 whole roasted red peppers jarred, without juice
        • cup Harissa powder homemade or store-bought
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 3 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • cup extra virgin olive oil*

        Instructions

        • In the bowl of a food processor (or a bowl that can accommodate an immersion blender), place the roasted red peppers, harissa powder, garlic cloves, tomato paste, lemon juice and olive oil.
        • Blend to your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired.
        • Store in an airtight jar and refrigerate for up to 2 weeks.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 1 1/2 cups of harissa paste, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Olive oil *: I found that ⅓ cup of olive oil was enough to give this recipe a rich taste and smooth, paste-like consistency. However, you can increase this amount to ½ cup if you prefer a thinner mix or a less concentrated spiciness.
        • Storage: To store your harissa paste from powder, transfer it to an airtight container or mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to two weeks. I recommend pouring a thin level of olive oil over the top to limit the exposure to oxygen and bacteria before storing.
        • Freezing: You can freeze harissa paste in a freezer-safe airtight container for up to a month. You can also portion it in ice cubes, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into freezer bags to use in your daily cooking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 128kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 781mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 209IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/feed/ 7
        Harissa Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:40:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76547 If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other…]]>

        If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other harissa recipes. My Homemade Harissa Recipe is an essential condiment for any spice lover, while my Harissa Vinaigrette will transform any weekday salad into a flavor-packed meal.

        Person holding a jar of homemade harissa spice blend in her hand.

        What is Harissa Spice?

        Harissa spice—also referred to as a “harissa spice blend,” “harissa seasoning,” or “harissa powder”—is a spicy, aromatic seasoning made from a mixture of dried chili peppers and other spices, such as cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds.

        This hot seasoning is native to Tunisia, though it’s since spread to other areas in North Africa and the Middle East, including Algeria, Morocco, and Egypt. Because of its vast popularity, harissa powder has developed many uses, including in condiments, dry rubs, and other food seasonings.

        What is in Harissa Powder?

        This authentic spice recipe is easy for anyone with a simple mix of natural spices. I’ve listed my favorite harissa powder ingredients below, including the best chilis to use, classic spices, and tasty add-ins.

        Harissa powder ingredients on a marble backdrop from the top view.
        • Dried chilies: This harissa seasoning recipe works with virtually any dried chili pepper, making it incredibly customizable in taste and heat. My favorite combination includes ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chilies. I usually buy this trio of chile peppers online (affiliate link), but you can also find them in the “Mexican” or “Latin” section of your local grocery store. Additionally, even though my mix primarily uses Mexican dried chilies, you can also cut back on spiciness by adding more New Mexican dried chilies, which tend to have a milder flavor.
          No matter which chilies you use, during our recipe testing, we found that 7-8 chilies of various kinds work best in this recipe.
        • Spices: Cumin seeds, coriander seeds, caraway seeds, and peppercorns are the best warm spices to give this mix added fragrance and earthiness. If you can, I highly recommend buying organic spices.
        • Seasonings: I recommend adding smoked paprika and garlic powder to this harissa blend for greater depth and complexity.
        • Optional add-ins: Nowadays, many commercial harissa spice blends include additional flavorings like rose petals and lemon peel. To achieve a similar floral flavor profile in your homemade blend, add ½ teaspoon of crushed, food-grade rose petals and lemon peel. For extra heat, include a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes.

        How to Make Harissa Powder

        This authentic, restaurant-worthy harissa powder recipe takes less than 15 minutes to make. Plus, you only need a handful of ingredients, a skillet, and a good food processor (affiliate link).

        Steps showing how to prepare chiles and toast the spices to make the recipe.
        1. Prepare the chilies: Remove the stems and seeds of the ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chili peppers. Then, chop them roughly.
        2. Toast the peppers: Heat the cast iron skillet over medium heat and add the chopped chilies. Stirring constantly to avoid burning, toast them until thoroughly dried (4-6 minutes). To test whether the chilies are ready, see whether they “crack” or “snap” under pressure. When they do, you can remove them from the pan.
        3. Cool: Transfer the toasted chili peppers to a plate to cool, and set them aside.
        4. Toast the seeds: Add the cumin, coriander, coriander seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet. Cook them for 1-2 minutes, stirring frequently, then remove them from the pan. Set them aside to cool.
        A collage of images showing how to make harissa spice mix in a food processor.
        1. Process the peppers: Transfer the cooled chili peppers to your food processor bowl fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times until the chilies break down.
        2. Add the toasted seeds: Then, add the toasted seeds and peppercorns to the bowl. Continue processing—being sure to scrape down the processor bowl every so often—until the ingredients reach a powder-like consistency and are fully incorporated. This step should take 1-2 minutes, depending on the brand of your food processor. Once you get your desired consistency, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse it for another 2-3 times.
        3. Store: Scrape the powder into an airtight jar or container and store it at room temperature for up to six months.

        Ways to Use Harissa Spice Blend

        Because of its bold flavor and broad versatility, harissa spice provides an indispensable taste to dozens of recipes. Below are just a few of my favorite dishes harissa seasoning can be used for.

        • Salad dressing: You can use this harissa powder recipe to make my harissa vinaigrette dressing (famously used when making CAVA Bowls). It is a wonderful way to season and elevate any salad recipe. Or, if you’re in the mood for lighter, zestier options, add a teaspoon to my Yogurt Salad Dressing and Lemon Salad Dressing to introduce the earthy flavors of harissa to your salad dressings.
        • Roasted vegetables: If you’re into roasting vegetables—like carrots, bell peppers, and potatoes—this easy recipe perfectly complements their smoky, tender notes. Simply sprinkle a few teaspoons of harissa powder over veggies before roasting them in the oven.
        • Seasoning for meat and seafood: Harissa spice makes an excellent dry rub for all your favorite recipes, from chicken to beef, fish, and lamb. In particular, you can use this seasoning for classic Middle Eastern dishes, like my Baked Chicken Kabobs, Roasted Turkey Tenderloin, and Grilled Rack of Lamb.
        • Dips: You can quickly transform this seasoning into a crowd-ready dip by adding it to a creamy Mediterranean Hummus or making Harissa Aioli—a delectable accompaniment for burgers, sandwiches, French fries, and more. You can even add harissa powder to ketchup to give it spicy, complex dimensions!
        • Marinades: Besides being a great seasoning, this harissa spice blend recipe makes a deliciously hot, full-bodied marinade when combined with extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice, and other flavorings. Try it in my citrusy Shrimp Marinade, creamy Yogurt Chicken Marinade, or bold Mahi Mahi Marinade to infuse your meat with rich, flavorful notes.
        • Grains and rice: You can give any grain bowl or side dish a kick of heat by sprinkling it with harissa seasoning. I love adding this spice blend to dishes like couscous, rice, and rich pilafs (especially my Wild Rice Pilaf and Chicken Herb Pilaf!).
        • Eggs: If you love to start your mornings with a spicy wake-up call, I highly recommend using harissa powder to season savory breakfast recipes like scrambled eggs and shakshuka.
        • Soups and stews: A teaspoon of harissa powder infuses any soup or stew recipe with deep, aromatic spice. For the tastiest combination, I recommend pairing this recipe with equally hearty, chili-friendly dishes, like Eggplant Beef Stew, Chicken Chili, or—for a lighter variation try it in my Vegan Chili instead of chili powder.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Easy to make and unbelievably versatile, homemade harissa powder is vital to any chef’s spice rack. These tips ensure you make the freshest, most flavorful seasoning with zero hassle.

        • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are notorious for their spiciness due to their high levels of the compound capsaicin. Though capsaicin is vital to giving chilis their flavor, it may cause a burning sensation after direct contact. Therefore, wearing gloves when working with them is a good idea. If you don’t have any gloves on hand, however, be sure to thoroughly wash your hands after handling your chili peppers.
        • Adjust heat: You can easily adjust your seasoning’s heat levels by changing a few simple factors. For a hotter blend, use a spicier mix of dried chilies, leave the seeds in your chili peppers, or add ½ teaspoon of cayenne pepper. For a milder mix, remove as many seeds from your chilies as possible and try to select chili peppers that land lower on the Scoville Scale—in particular, New Mexico chiles.
        • Adding salt: I did not add salt to my harissa spice blend recipe, as I prefer to adjust the amount of salt according to the recipe I plan to use. This way, I can easily control the amount of salt in my food without the risk of making it overly salty.
        • Spice grinder: I prefer to blend my harissa spices using a food processor. The bowl of a food processor is large enough to pulverize everything in one take, and its strong blades are ideal for turning all spices and dried chilies into powder. However, you can also make this recipe using a spice grinder (affiliate link.)To do so, blend the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, until powdered. Then, add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns, and grind the mixture until it reaches your preferred consistency (about five seconds). Remember, too, that you might need to grind your ingredients in small batches to ensure they fit in your grinder.

        FAQs

        What is the closest spice to harissa?

        Suppose you don’t have harissa spice but still want the same aromatic, spicy taste. In that case, I recommend blending chili powder, smoked paprika, ground cumin, ground coriander, and garlic powder. Though not identical, this mix strikes a similar balance between fragrant heat and the earthiness of harissa powder. Or, if you need a condiment-like consistency, you can even try sriracha sauce for a store-bought, chili-based substitute.

        Is harissa a spice?

        Not a single spice, “harissa” refers to a hot, fragrant mix of multiple spices and dried chili peppers. You can find this traditional blend in several forms, including a dry seasoning, a paste form, and a creamy sauce.

        Is harissa powder spicy hot?

        In general, yes, harissa powder contains a fair amount of spiciness. However, if desired, you can adjust this heat level by using different combinations of chili peppers and spices to make a milder mix.

        What is the difference between harissa powder and harissa paste?

        Since they both come from a similar mixture of dried chili peppers and spices, harissa powder and harissa paste boast a hot, earthy flavor. However, they have very different consistencies. Powdered harissa is a dry, powdered version of the mix, while harissa paste has a thicker, wetter consistency due to additional ingredients like tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil.

        Where to buy harissa powder?

        After trying several store-bought brands, I recommend purchasing either New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (which is a little milder). These premade harissa blends will work in a pinch, though I find my homemade recipe more flavorful and customizable.

        If you make your own Harissa Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa powder in a jar with a spoonfull.
        Print

        Harissa Powder Recipe

        With deep spice and complex flavors, Harissa Powder packs all the hot, bold taste you could want from a seasoning. You can make this simple spice mix in less than 15 minutes using a simple set of natural ingredients.
        Course Seasoning
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 6 minutes
        Total Time 21 minutes
        Servings 5 tablespoons
        Calories 12kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 8 dried chili peppers we used a combination of Ancho, Guajillo, and De Arbol chili peppers
        • 1 ½ teaspoons cumin seeds
        • 1 ½ teaspoon coriander seeds
        • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
        • ½ teaspoon peppercorns
        • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt optional*

        Instructions

        • Remove the stems and deseed the chili peppers. Give them a rough chop.
        • Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat. Add the peppers and toast for 4-6 minutes or until thoroughly dried. Stir frequently to avoid burning. To test for doneness, you should feel the chili pepper “crack” or “snap.”
        • Place the toasted peppers on a plate to cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Add the cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet and toast, stirring frequently, for 1-2 minutes. Remove from the pan and set aside to cool.
        • Place the cooled chili peppers into the bowl of a food processor (*instructions for making it in a spice grinder are below in the notes section) fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times to break down the dried chilies. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, peppercorns, and salt if using. Continue to process until they are pulverized and reach a powder consistency, scraping down the processor bowl to incorporate all the ingredients. Depending on your food processor, this takes about 1-2 minutes of processing. Finally, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse 2-3 times to ensure all spices are fully incorporated.
        • Place the powder in an airtight container and store it in a cool and dark place for six months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅓ to ½ cup harissa seasoning, depending on the size of your peppers. The nutritional values below are for the full recipe.
        • If using a spice grinder: Add the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, to the grinder and pulse to create a powder. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns. Continue to grind until it reaches powder consistency. Add the smoked paprika and garlic powder if using. Grind for 5 seconds.
        • Mortar and Pestle: If you do not have a food processor or a spice grinder, the good old mortar and pestle would also work.
        • Adding salt: When I make homemade spice blends, I usually use very little or no salt. This way, I can salt my food separately and easily gauge the amount of salt used in my dish. Feel free to omit it or use more as needed.
        • Storage: To store this harissa spice mix recipe, first transfer it to an airtight container. Then, store it in a cool, dry place—such as a pantry or kitchen cabinet—for up to six months.
        • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are usually very hot, even when dry. I would recommend wearing gloves if you have them.
        • Fumes: Proper ventilation is essential when cooking chili peppers. The fumes from these chilies may irritate your eyes, nose, and mouth, so I highly recommend opening windows, turning on your kitchen’s range hood, and/or using portable fans to increase your kitchen’s air circulation.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 12kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 468mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 420IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/feed/ 2
        Mango Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 29 Jun 2024 15:28:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54258 Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads.…]]>

        Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa Salad for a more savory option. 

        And if you have some leftover mangoes, try our Pineapple Mango Salsa.

        Avocado Mango Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Why You’ll Love This Mango Salad?

        I know you’ll love this mango and avocado salad as much as I do! Here’s why:

        • Quick, easy, and nutrient-dense: Healthy has never been easier! Throw this simple salad together in 15 minutes for your daily dose of essential fatty acids and vitamin-C
        • The ideal accompaniment to grilled favorites: This salad pairs perfectly with fish tacos, grilled seafood, meats, and other main dishes. Or, serve it as a mango salsa with your favorite tortilla chip as a quick appetizer! 
        • Bursting with refreshing summer flavor: Like our other summer salads, this fresh fruity salad is the perfect way to cool off on a hot summer day. 

        Ingredients for Avocado Mango Salad

        To make this mango salad with avocado, you’ll need two sets of simple ingredients. The dressing consists of a few well-loved, familiar pantry items and the salad consists of a handful of fresh produce from your local farmer’s market or grocery store. 

        Avocado mango dressing ingredients from the top view.

        For the chili lime dressing, you will need:

        • Extra virgin olive oil
        • Lime juice and lime zest
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Be sure to mince it finely.
        • Spices & seasonings: Ground cumin, chili powder, and kosher salt.
        • Sweetener: You can use honey or maple syrup interchangeably in this mango avocado salad dressing.
        Mango salad ingredients from the top view.

        To make the recipe for mango salad, gather:

        • Avocados: Use ripe but firm avocados. This way, they won’t get mushy when cut into cubes and incorporated into the salad.
        • Mangoes: I recommend using juicy ripened mangoes for this recipe. I usually buy them a few days before I plan to make it and keep them on the counter to ripen.
        • Red Onion: You need only a small, thinly sliced red onion. For a lighter taste, you can also use green onions.
        • Jalapeno peppers: Deseed and chop your peppers finely. If you prefer your mango salad to be spicy, you can incorporate some of the seeds into the salad. Alternatively, you can also use a red bell pepper.
        • Fresh cilantro: I know that Mango Salad with cilantro might not be everybody’s cup of tea. If that is you, feel free to swap it with other fresh herbs like parsley or mint to pack an aromatic punch. 

        Substitutions and Possible Additions

        • Dressing: If a spicy mango avocado salad isn’t your thing, try this Balsamic Lemon Dressing for a tangy, balsamic vinegar-based salad addition with fresh lemon juice.
        • Nuts & Seeds: For a salty crunch that beautifully balances the sweetness of the mango, try adding a handful of pumpkin seeds or chopped walnuts. 
        • Other produce: Create endless salad varieties with any fresh summer produce you have on hand. Turn this recipe into a Mango Avocado Tomato Salad by tossing in a cup of cherry tomatoes, or throw in a cup of diced English cucumber for some extra crunch. 
        • Salad greens: To turn this into a green salad with mango and avocado, add spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or any of your favorite leafy greens. 
        • Cheese: Top it off with 1/2 cup of cotija cheese, feta or even goat cheese for some salty umami flavor.
        • Add in some protein: Looking for a good protein source to make this salad more filling? Try adding a few grilled or baked chicken breasts for a delicious copycat version of the fan-favorite Cheesecake Factory salad with mango and avocado. Or if you have the grill on, top it off with grilled shrimp on top.

        How to Make Mango Salad?

        With a little bit of chopping and a gentle toss of the ingredients, this delicious avo mango salad comes together in the blink of an eye and is sure to impress at any summer gathering. Simply:

        Person showing how to make mango avocado salad in a collage of images.
        1. Make the dressing: Add all ingredients into a mason jar. Screw on the lid tightly and shake until thoroughly combined. 
        2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your cubed avocado, chunks of fresh mango, sliced red onion, chopped jalapeño (optional), and freshly chopped cilantro. 
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
        4. Season: Season to taste with salt and black pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

        • Dressing: To make this recipe come together quickly, you can make the dressing a day in advance. Simply combine all ingredients in a mason jar and place in the fridge. 
        • Prep: Avocado is difficult to prep ahead of time because it can quickly turn an unappealing brown color once cut. I recommend chopping up the ripe avocado and the rest of the ingredients as soon as you’re ready to assemble the salad. You can, however, prep the mango and jalapeño in advance, but be sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. 
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days. 

        What to Serve it With?

        A salad this versatile, refreshing, and vibrant is sure to brighten up your favorite summer main dish. Here are some serving suggestions:

        • Serve it as a great addition to taco night: Looking for ways to amp up your Taco Tuesday? Impress your family by pairing this salad with Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, Black Bean Quinoa Tacos, Blackened Mahi Mahi, or your favorite fish tacos. 
        • Pair it with your favorite grilled seafood: A seafood dish isn’t complete without a refreshing salad! Serve the salad on the side with some of my seafood favorites, such as Grilled Salmon, Shrimp Kabobs, or Grilled Mahi Mahi
        • With chips on the side: Serve the salad with tortilla chips, pita chips, or crackers for a refreshing and flavorful dip perfect for entertaining.
        Salad with mango and avocado in a bowl from the front view.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe for avocado and mango salad is super simple and easy, follow these helpful tips to achieve maximum results and flavor!

        • Use ripe fruit: Avocados and mangoes have the best texture and flavor when they’re ripe. Also, it is best if you cut them in bite-sized pieces.
        • Prevent Browning: To prevent the avocado from browning, cut it right before incorporating it into the salad and drizzle it with the lime-based dressing immediately. This not only preserves the color but also enhances the flavor.
        • Ensure your prepped fruit is similar in size: Make sure every bite of your salad is consistent by cutting your mango and avocado into equal-sized cubes or chunks. 
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining.

        FAQs

        How do you know if a mango is ripe?

        To tell whether a mango is ripe, use your thumb to apply pressure to the skin gently. If it feels soft or gives slightly, it’s ready! If you’re not quite sure, locate the fruit’s stem and give it a whiff. If it gives off a sweet, fruity aroma, it’s ripe. 

        Is mango skin edible?

        Mango skin is edible, and studies show that the skin contains a variety of health and nutritional benefits. However, keep in mind that eating mango skin may cause allergic reactions or lead to ingesting pesticides or harmful chemicals. The skin is also generally bitter and tough to chew.

        Can you eat this like a mango avocado salsa?

        You sure can. If you prefer it as salsa, I recommend cutting the mango and avocado into smaller cubes so that you can easily scoop them out with a tortilla chip.

        Other Fruit Salads You Might Also Like

        If you loved this mango summer salad, here are some other fruity salad recipes you need to try!

        If you try this delicious Summer Mango Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        mango salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Mango Avocado Salad Recipe

        This Mango Avocado Salad recipe is made with fresh mango, ripe avocados, and chili lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect side dish for the grilling season.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 358kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Chili Lime Vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon maple syrup/honey

        For The Salad:

        • 2 ripe avocados cut into cubes
        • 2 ripe mangos cut into 1-inch chunks
        • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced – from a small red onion
        • 1 small jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro

        Instructions

        • Make the dressing by combining everything in a mason jar. Close the lid tightly and give it a shake until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
        • Place the cubed avocados, mango chunks, red onion slices, jalapeno, and cilantro in a salad bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: The finished salad is about 4 cups with 1 cup per serving.
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days.
        • Cut them in similar bite-size chunks: For best results, cut avocado and mango cubes in similar sizes.
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 452mg | Potassium: 743mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 59mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
        Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

        You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

        Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

        Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

        For The Pita Chips:

        • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
        • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
        • Kosher Salt
        Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

        For The Topping:

        • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
        • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
        • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
        • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
        • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
        • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
        • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
        • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
        Tahini dressing for nachos.

        For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

        • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
        • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
        • Fresh Garlic
        • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

        Optional Add-Ins

        For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

        How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

        If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

        1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
        Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
        1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
        2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
        3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
        A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
        1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
        2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
        Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

        FAQs

        Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

        If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

        How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

        Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

        Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

        Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

        Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
        Print

        Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

        This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 9 minutes
        Total Time 19 minutes
        Servings 6 Servings
        Calories 246kcal

        Ingredients

        For the toasted pita chips:

        • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Toppings:

        • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
        • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
        • 2 stalks green onions chopped
        • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 garlic clove minced
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

        • cup tahini shaken well
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 1 garlic clove minced
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
        • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

        Instructions

        • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
        • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
        • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
        • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
        • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
        • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
        • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
        • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
        Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

        There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

        This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

        Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

        I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
        • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
        • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
        • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
        • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
        • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
        • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
        • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
        • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
        • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
        • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
        • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
        • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

        How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

        If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

        A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
        1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
        2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
        3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
        4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
        Two images showing the finished dish.
        1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

        Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

        FAQs

        What are Turkish green beans?

        Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

        What type of green beans should I use?

        Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

        Is this dish vegan?

        Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

        Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

        If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
        Print

        Turkish Green Beans Recipe

        This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 45 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 226kcal

        Ingredients

        • 5 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 2 cloves garlic minced
        • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
        • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
        • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

        For Serving (Optional)

        Instructions

        • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
        • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
        • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
        • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
        • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
        • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
        • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
          • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
          • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
          • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
        Lemon Tahini Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 14:53:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75894 Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes…]]>

        Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes with tahini? You’ll love my smoky, savory Baba Ganoush and creamy Hummus—perfect additions to a mezze platter, Mediterranean appetizer, or sandwich spread.

        A spoonful of lemon tahini sauce being drizzled in a jar.

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Ingredients

        This easy tahini sauce recipe requires only five simple ingredients. Below, you’ll discover everything you need to make the creamiest, most vibrant condiment in your cookbook.

        Ingredients for the sauce from the top view.
        • Tahini (aka sesame seed paste): High-quality tahini is essential when making this delicious sauce recipe. You should be able to find premade tahini paste in the Middle Eastern section of your local grocery store, or you can purchase it online (my favorite store-bought tahini is from Soom Foods!). Before using, stir or shake your tahini to avoid unwanted settling, and then store the rest in the refrigerator for up to one week.
        • Lemon juice: I always use fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its rich, bright taste. However, you can also use store-bought lemon juice, depending on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic: I recommend using finely minced or pressed garlic to ensure its flavors distribute evenly throughout the mixture.
        • Salt
        • Water: Cold water is the key to adjusting this sauce’s consistency.

        Optional Add-Ins

        Turning this simple tahini sauce into a culinary masterpiece is easy with a few optional add-ins. Here are a few that we recommend:

        • Lemon herb tahini sauce: To create a more herbaceous blend, add ½ cups of fresh herbs, such as cilantro or parsley, to your tahini sauce. This variation has an extra-bright flavor and makes an incomparable addition to my vegan Mediterranean Nachos.
        • Seasonings: To make a flavored tahini sauce, add a pinch of other spices. For instance, you can make a turmeric tahini sauce by adding ¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder or play around with different flavors by adding ingredients like cumin, paprika, dill, or black pepper.
        • Sweet tahini cream sauce: Although it’s not a traditional ingredient, you can give this sauce a sweeter finish by adding a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup to the mix.
        • Dijon mustard: Add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard for a nice zing that complements the zesty flavors of this tahini garlic sauce.
        • Olive oil: Tahini paste provides a creamy consistency, but a teaspoon of olive oil can be added to mellow its robust flavor.

        How to Make Tahini Sauce

        There’s no need to stress when learning how to prepare this simple sauce. This iconic Middle Eastern recipe is a cinch, whether you’re a gourmet chef or a kitchen novice.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare tahini sauce.
        1. Mix the ingredients: Place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt into a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients to the best of your ability, knowing that the mixture will be thick.
        2. Add water: Pour the water into the bowl while still whisking until smooth. You may use more or less water to achieve your desired consistency.
        3. Serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning and add more if necessary. Store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator or use it right away.

        Tahini Sauce Uses

        When deciding what to make with tahini sauce, the options are endless. Below, I’ve listed my favorite uses, from light vegetable sides to hearty main dishes.

        • Dipping sauce: This tahini dip recipe is a must when serving mezze platters and veggie trays. Try serving it alongside a plate of fresh vegetables—like cucumber, carrots, and tomatoes—and you’ll never have to stress over party appetizers again.
        • Shawarma: Since they’re both packed with rich Middle Eastern taste, I love using tahini sauce for shawarma recipes, such as my spiced Chicken Shawarma and succulent Beef Shawarma. You can even use this classic Mediterranean tahini sauce for gyros—the Greek version of shawarma—or transform it into a tahini spread for a flavor-packed wrap or pita pocket. 
        • Grilled meat and fish: This easy recipe pairs beautifully with grilled meat and fish dishes. Try using this tahini sauce for roasted or grilled chicken, lamb, salmon, or your favorite white fish, and prepare for an explosion of earthy, zesty flavors.
        • Drizzle over roasted veggies: Roasted veggies taste out of this world with a drizzle of this lemon tahini recipe. In particular, this sauce makes a delectable addition to savory-sweet dishes like my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes, Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Cauliflower, and Roasted Butternut Squash and Sweet Potatoes.
        • Salads and grain bowls: Another great way to use this creamy sauce is in fresh salads and grain bowls. This sauce works exceptionally well when bringing out the zingy, garden-fresh taste of my Butternut Squash Tahini Salad and Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl.
        • Falafel: Using sesame tahini sauce for falafel balls is a fantastic option to complement the dish’s herby, nutty taste.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Learning to make tahini sauce from scratch is easy. However, if you want to make the best tahini sauce, these top-notch tips will ensure your recipe is as creamy, flavorful, and rich as possible.

        • Stir tahini before using: Like other natural seed and nut butters, tahini tends to separate during storage, with its oils rising to the top and its solids sinking to the bottom. Therefore, just like you would do with peanut butter, it’s necessary to stir your tahini before adding it to your recipe.
        • Adjust the sauce’s consistency: One of the best ways to make this lemon garlic tahini sauce as versatile as possible is to adjust its consistency. Add more water to your mixture if you want a thinner tahini drizzle—similar to other creamy salad dressings—or use less liquid for a thicker, creamy tahini sauce.
        • Food processor: If you are making a large batch of this sauce, we recommend using a food processor (or a blender) to achieve the ultimate creamy consistency.
        • Resting time: If you have time, I suggest letting the sauce rest for a few minutes before serving. This way, all the ingredients will have time to mix, develop, and infuse the mixture.
        • Experiment with seasoning and add-ins: With so many uses for this easy lemon tahini sauce, I highly recommend playing around with its flavor and consistency to complement your main dish.

        FAQs

        What is tahini sauce made of?

        Traditional Mediterranean tahini sauce comes together with a few main ingredients: tahini (a creamy paste made from ground sesame seeds), lemon juice, salt, and water. However, there are many variations on this classic Middle Eastern condiment, including those that add extra flavors with fresh garlic, cumin, parsley, cilantro, and more.

        What does tahini sauce taste like?

        Tahini sauce has a deliciously complex flavor profile, making it an ideal condiment for countless dishes. Tangy, savory, earthy, and mildly bitter, this classic Middle Eastern sauce tastes as great alongside shawarma as it does with a bowl of greens.

        What does tahini sauce look like?

        Generally, tahini sesame sauce has a light tan color with a yellowish tint, depending on the amount of lemon juice or garlic added to the mixture. The sauce is also known for its smooth, creamy texture, though its thickness may vary from liquidity to a thicker, dip-like consistency, depending on the amount of water you add.

        Is tahini good for you?

        Though everything is good in moderation, tahini has many health benefits, including improving cardiovascular health, reducing cancer risk, and helping with inflammation.

        Other Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you make your own Lemon Tahini Sauce following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        A spoon of lemon tahini sauce drizzling in a jar showing how creamy it is.
        Print

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Recipe

        This Lemon Tahini Sauce is perfect for salads, falafel, shawarma, and more! Ready in 5 minutes, this classic Middle Eastern condiment is creamy, nutty, and delicious.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 183kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup tahini paste stirred well
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 2 cloves garlic minced finely or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more as needed
        • ¼ cup cold water more as needed

        Instructions

        • Place tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt in a bowl. Whisk (as much as you can) until combined. It will be thick, and that is normal.
        • Pour in the water and continue whisking until it is smooth. You can adjust the consistency by adding more (or less) water.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2/3 cup tahini sauce, which is ideal for serving 4-6 people, depending on the dish you plan to use this recipe. The below nutritional values are per serving for 4 people.
        • Adjust consistency and seasoning: Use this recipe as a starting point and adjust consistency based on your preference or the recipe you plan on pairing it with. You can make it thinner by adding more water and vice versa.
        • Storing, freezing, and thawing the leftover sauce: Garlic lemon tahini sauce is the perfect condiment for anyone who enjoys no-fuss meal prep. Here is how I store leftovers:
          • Storing: Transfer the prepared tahini sauce to an airtight container or tightly sealed mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to one week. Keep in mind that this sauce tends to separate and thicken during storage, so you might have to whisk a little cold water into the mixture before serving.
          • Freezing: Technically, you can freeze tahini sauce, although extreme temperatures might mess with its consistency. Still, you can freeze this recipe by pouring it into an airtight container and freezing it for up to one month. Or, for easier portioning, you can place the garlic lemon tahini sauce into the compartments of an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, then transfer the individual cubes into a freezer-safe Ziploc bag.
          • Thawing: Place your frozen tahini sauce in the refrigerator overnight to thaw. Because separation is inevitable during freezing, remember to stir it well to regain its creamy, well-incorporated texture before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 159mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/feed/ 1
        Vermicelli Rice https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/#comments Thu, 30 May 2024 13:15:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75694 With so much rich, versatile flavor, this Lebanese rice pilaf recipe is just what your weeknight menu needs. If you’re…]]>

        With so much rich, versatile flavor, this Lebanese rice pilaf recipe is just what your weeknight menu needs. If you’re craving even more rice and vermicelli recipes, my Chicken Rice Pilaf has a hearty yet fresh flavor that will satisfy any dinner party. Or, if you’re in the mood for a more robust, tomatoey side, my authentic Turkish Bulgur Pilaf is the perfect accompaniment to any meal.

        Person fluffing freshly cooked Lebanese rice with vermicelli.

        What is Vermicelli Rice?

        Vermicelli rice—known as “riz bil sha’riyeh” in Arabic—is a classic Middle Eastern side dish made with three main ingredients: rice, vermicelli pasta, and oil. It may seem simple, but this basic pilaf recipe packs major flavor through its two-part cooking method: saute the pasta and then cook it with the rice.

        Though some may add additional seasonings and ingredients to this recipe, its foundational roots run deep throughout Mediterranean and Arab countries, including countries like Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey. For this reason, people often refer to the recipe as Jordanian rice, Beiruti rice, Lebanese rice with vermicelli, or even a Syrian rice recipe. In Turkey, we call it “Sehriyeli Pilav.”

        Rice with Vermicelli Ingredients

        It’s hard to find a side dish with fewer ingredients than this rice vermicelli recipe. Not only does this side dish have an utterly delicious taste, but it’s also cost-effective—in fact, you likely have most of these ingredients ready in your home pantry!

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • White rice: Long grain rice is a ideal in this Mediterranean pilaf rice recipe because it’s fluffier than short-grain rice and doesn’t clump after cooking. I prefer to use Basmati rice, but you can also use another long-grain white rice or jasmine rice if desired.
        • Oil: Because of its rich yet neutral taste, I like to use extra virgin olive oil to saute my vermicelli. However, you can also use unsalted butter or a combination of oil and butter if you want a more full-bodied flavor. Ghee—a clarified butter common in Indian cuisine—is also an option to reduce the amount of lactose in your recipe.
        • Vermicelli: Vermicelli is a thin noodle similar to spaghetti but cut into smaller pieces —probably the reason people call it “angel hair pasta noodles” and “angel hair rice.” You should be able to find vermicelli in the “Middle Eastern” section of grocery stores, but you can also purchase vermicelli online (affiliate link.)
        • Liquid: To cook the basmati rice, you will need about four cups of liquid. I kept things simple by using water as the cooking liquid, but you can also enhance the savoriness of your final dish by using chicken stock, vegetable stock, or a combination of liquids instead.
        • Seasoning: This naturally tasty vermicelli rice recipe requires little seasoning. You only need salt, black pepper, and some fresh herbs (such as parsley or mint) to ensure your rice side is as fragrant and savory as possible.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While this Arabic rice recipe is quite simple, you’ll find variations that include optional add-ins, making each version unique to the region where it is prepared. Below are a few optional additions that can enhance the flavor and texture of the dish:

        • Spices: If you want to add deeper, warmer notes to this rice with vermicelli recipe, I recommend adding a pinch of ground cinnamon (or even a stick of cinnamon!) to the mix. You can also add some cardamom to give your seasoning a more floral taste.
        • Toasted Nuts: Adding toasted pine nuts is a great way to give this recipe extra nuttiness and a delectable crunch. You can also transform this dish into Mediterranean almond rice by adding toasted almonds instead.
        • Dried fruits: Dried apricots, raisins, or currants provide a sweet contrast to the overall savoriness of this rice recipe.
        • Vegetables: Incorporating sautéed onions, carrots, or peas can add both texture and nutrition.

        How to Make Lebanese Rice?

        Learning to make rice with vermicelli doesn’t need to be stressful. These foolproof instructions will walk you through every step, ensuring that it always comes out perfectly fluffy and flavorful.

        Steps showing how to make rice with vermicelli.
        1. Rinse the rice: Pour the uncooked rice into a fine mesh strainer, rinse it with cold water until it runs clear, and drain it. Set the rinsed rice aside.
        2. Saute the vermicelli: Pour the olive oil into a medium-sized saucepan (with a lid), then heat it over medium heat. Add the vermicelli to the pot and, stirring constantly, saute until they turn a deep golden brown color (4-5 minutes). If necessary, adjust the heat level to avoid burning.
        3. Mix in the rice: Add the drained rice to the saucepan and saute it, constantly stirring it with noodles, for five minutes on medium-low heat. Once the rice thoroughly mixes with the vermicelli, season the grains with kosher salt and cinnamon (if using).
        4. Boil: Pour four cups of water into the pasta and rice mixture and bring it to a full boil. 
        A collage of images showing how to make vermicelli rice pilaf.
        1. Simmer: Cover the saucepan and reduce the stovetop’s heat to low. Continue to simmer the mixture (without stirring!) for 15 minutes or until the grains absorb all the water.
        2. Let it rest: Remove your rice vermicelli pilaf from the heat and let it rest for five minutes. After resting, uncover the dish and fluff it with a fork.
        3. Serve: Taste the rice and vermicelli pilaf for seasoning and add more if necessary. If desired, garnish the mix with black pepper and fresh parsley.

        What to Serve With This Dish?

        Growing up in Turkey, my mom would serve this tasty side dish with a side of plain yogurt—a classic combination ideal, especially for kids when they need a quick after-school snack. 

        However, there are many other delectable pairings to make, whether you’re looking for iconic Turkish or Lebanese dishes to serve with rice or a simple colorful salad to brighten up your weekday lunches.

        • Meat dishes: Aromatic and succulent, Chicken Shawarma, Beef Shawarma, and Chicken Tawook are excellent choices when you’re looking for a customizable spread. Or, if you want to pair your vermicelli rice with elegant Middle Eastern flavors, my Turkish Kofta will take any dinner party to the next level.
        • Stews & soups: This Lebanese vermicelli rice makes the perfect side dish for hearty stews. My Eggplant Beef Stew will delight your taste buds with rich, melt-in-your-mouth meat, while my Vegetable Beef Soup strikes the ultimate balance between light, herby, and savory flavors.
        • Salad: Fattoush Salad is a classic choice for anyone who loves a mix of crisp, herby, and filling flavors. Otherwise, you can serve a juicy and bold tomato salad like Piyaz on the side for a colorful, gourmet spread.
        Rice with vermicelli on a plate with a spoon on the side from the top view.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        The best way to make this rice vermicelli dish is to use these pro-level pointers. With this easy guide, you can make a side as fluffy and savory as an authentic Lebanese restaurant.

        • Toast until golden brown: It’s essential that you toast your vermicelli long enough that it turns a light golden brown color, allowing it to develop a nutty flavor and tender texture before boiling. However, keep an eye on your vermicelli while sauteing it and stir it constantly to keep it from sticking to the pan or burning under the heat.
        • Rinse rice: You must rinse your rice under running water before adding it to this recipe to remove excess starch and unwanted debris. You may also soak the rice in hot water for 20 minutes before cooking it to speed up the cooking process, though I found this step unnecessary.
        • Ideal ratio: I find that the ideal rice-to-water ratio is one cup of rice for every two cups of water/liquid. Of course, this ratio may change slightly based on the specific ingredients you use and your desired end texture. However, this 1:2 ratio is a great starting point when making most vermicelli and rice recipes.
        • Let it rest: 5-10 minutes of rest is vital after cooking rice pilaf with vermicelli, as it gives the liquid time to evaporate and absorb into the grains once it’s done simmering. 
        • Use a kitchen towel to absorb moisture: In many Arabic countries, a common technique to ensure perfectly cooked vermicelli rice involves placing a clean kitchen cloth under the lid of the pot after the rice is cooked for 10-15 minutes before serving. This practice helps absorb excess moisture and prevents the rice from becoming too soggy. I didn’t choose to do this because I find that basmati rice tends to absorb liquid well, producing vermicelli rice that is perfectly fluffy and tender. However, if you use medium or short-grain rice, you may have to use this method to prevent rice from sticking.

        FAQs

        What’s the difference between vermicelli and rice vermicelli?

        Despite their similar names, vermicelli and rice vermicelli aren’t the same thing. Vermicelli is popular in Italian and Middle Eastern cuisine, and it comes from a base of wheat flour and (sometimes) eggs. Because of this, it has the golden color of traditional Italian pasta and a thickness between angel hair pasta and spaghetti noodles. By contrast, rice vermicelli—a popular ingredient in Asian cuisine—comes from a mixture of rice flour and water, has a thinner shape, and is often white or slightly translucent.

        What is vermicelli made out of?

        Vermicelli noodles come from a mixture of wheat flour, water, and sometimes eggs. People then press this dough into a thin, angel hair-like shape and cook it in oil or water when ready to eat.

        Is vermicelli rice healthy?

        With proper portion control, vermicelli rice can offer some health benefits. For instance, basmati rice has a low glycemic index—an excellent choice for those watching their blood sugar levels. However, this recipe also uses oil and butter to saute its ingredients, so its fat levels may be higher, depending on your preparation method.

        Are vermicelli gluten-free?

        Vermicelli pasta isn’t gluten-free, as it contains wheat flour.

        Other Rice Recipes You Might Like:

        If you make your own Vermicelli with Rice following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Vermicelli rice on a plate with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Vermicelli Rice Recipe

        This vermicelli rice recipe combines toasted vermicelli with long grain rice for a fluffy and flavorful side dish. A staple in Middle Eastern cuisine, it is perfect for any main dish.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 338kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups long-grain rice such as Basmati rice
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ cup vermicelli
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 4 cups water chicken broth, or vegetable stock
        • 1/8 teaspoon cinnamon or a small cinnamon stick (optional)
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional
        • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley optional garnish

        Instructions

        • Place the rice in a fine mesh strainer and rinse with cold water until it runs clear. Drain well and set it aside.
        • In a medium-sized saucepan, heat the olive oil on medium-high heat. Add the vermicelli and saute, stirring constantly, until golden brown, about 4-5 minutes.
        • Add the now-drained rice to the pot and saute, stirring constantly, for 5 minutes on medium-low heat until the rice is fully incorporated with vermicelli. Season with kosher salt and cinnamon, if using.
        • Add the 4 cups of water and bring the mixture to a full boil. Cover and reduce the heat to low.
        • Continue to simmer without stirring for 15-20 minutes until all the water is absorbed.
        • Remove from the heat and let it rest, covered, for 5 minutes. Uncover and fluff with a fork.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary. Garnish with black pepper and chopped parsley, if desired.

        Notes

        • Yields: This vermicelli rice recipe makes 5-6 cups of rice, ideal for 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Store: You can store your leftover vermicelli and rice pilaf in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
        • Reheat: To reheat this dish, I recommend microwaving it in 30-second increments until warmed to your liking. You may also consider adding a splash of chicken stock or water to the mixture to keep it from drying out while reheating. Alternatively, you can put the leftovers in a saucepan (with a splash of water/broth) and heat on low-heat until thoroughly warmed.
        • Use boiling water: If you’re on a time crunch, you can also hasten the cooking process of this dish by using boiling water when adding it to the toasted vermicelli and rice. That way, you don’t have to spend extra time waiting for the water to come to a boil.
        • Gentle heat: As soon as your mixture comes to a boil, turn down the heat and bring it to a simmer. This way, the grains can absorb the liquid at a natural rate, and your pot won’t boil over once you add the lid. During the simmering process, I’d like to move it to the smallest burner, also referred to as the simmer burner, to ensure my rice cooks in gentle heat.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 435mg | Potassium: 78mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 0.002mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/feed/ 1
        Easy Ratatouille Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-ratatouille-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-ratatouille-recipe/#comments Wed, 22 May 2024 21:14:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75569 Vegetarian eggplant recipes for dinner are a no-brainer for quick, healthy meal ideas. Whip up my simple ratatouille recipe for…]]>

        Vegetarian eggplant recipes for dinner are a no-brainer for quick, healthy meal ideas. Whip up my simple ratatouille recipe for an effortless main course that’s the epitome of French cooking. Or, try out my Easy Eggplant Parmesan and savory Eggplant Baked Ziti for cheesy goodness and a rich tomato sauce you won’t be able to resist.

        A plate of my easy ratatouille recipe garnished with basil from the top view.

        Ratatouille Ingredients List

        Garden-fresh and flavorful, the main ingredients in ratatouille combine all the light, nutritious tastes of summer into a single bowl. Below, you’ll find my go-to ingredients to make an easy recipe worthy of a French restaurant.

        Ingredients for ratatouille from the top view.
        • Olive oil: Olive oil is a classic choice for sauteing this recipe’s veggies. However, you can use any other neutral-flavored oil—such as avocado oil—if you prefer a different cooking base.
        • Yellow Onion
        • Bell peppers: Most recipes for ratatouille achieve their vibrant presentation by using a colorful assortment of bell peppers. I used a combination of red and yellow peppers, but any color would work.
        • Tomato paste
        • Fresh garlic cloves
        • Eggplant: Of all the eggplant varieties available, I prefer globe eggplants due to their versatility and year-round availability at most U.S. grocery stores. You can even check out my beginner-friendly guide on how to dice eggplant for more tips on cutting this veggie for your ratatouille stew recipe.
        • Zucchini: Tender and mildly sweet, zucchini is a classic summer vegetable guaranteed to elevate any ratatouille recipe. Due to their similar flavor profiles, you can also mix and match zucchini with yellow squash if desired.
        • Tomatoes: During the summer, I love to use fresh tomatoes—such as grape, Roma, beefsteak, or any other vine-ripened variety—in this recipe. However, you can also make this easy ratatouille recipe with canned tomatoes if you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh produce.
        • Seasoning: I prefer a herby, bright mixture of fresh thyme, basil, salt, and pepper as my seasoning for ratatouille. Depending on what you have on hand, you may also use fresh parsley instead of basil.
        • Vinegar: The best way to brighten a ratatouille stew is to add a tablespoon of apple cider vinegar just before serving. However, if you prefer a more traditional flavoring, you may instead add ¼ cup of red wine to the mixture at the beginning of the recipe.
        • Sugar: Adding a teaspoon of sugar is a great way to create a delicious contrast with this dish’s crisper, more earthy flavors. Though I prefer granulated sugar, you can also use brown sugar, coconut sugar, or cane sugar to help remove any bitterness in your ratatouille.

        How to Make Ratatouille Food?

        This vegan ratatouille recipe requires zero expertise and little time to make. These no-fuss instructions will walk you through every step to make this classic French dish like a pro.

        A collage of images showing how to cook this recipe in a Dutch oven.
        1. Saute the onion and peppers: Heat the olive oil in a large, heavy-bottom pot (like a large Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Once hot, add the onion and peppers to the pot and saute them for 8-10 minutes or until softened.
        2. Cook the garlic: Add the tomato paste and garlic to the pot, stir, and cook for an additional minute.
        3. Add the remaining veggies: Add the eggplant, zucchini, tomatoes, thyme, salt, pepper, and sugar to the mixture. Give it a big stir. Put the lid on and cook for 20-25 minutes (or until fully cooked) over medium heat, stirring them once or twice during the process.
        Person showing the last steps of making the recipe in a collage of images.
        1. Add the vinegar: Remove the veggies from the heat and stir in the apple cider vinegar. Taste the ratatouille for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        2. Garnish and serve: Garnish the ratatouille dish with basil and a pinch of red pepper flakes. If desired, drizzle the stew with a little bit of olive oil right before serving.

        What to Serve with Ratatouille?

        Savory, tender, and tasty, homemade ratatouille is an unbelievably versatile meal-planning solution. Below, you’ll find all my favorite pairings, from a delicious side to a hearty main dish.

        • Bread: If you want a side dish as easy to make as this quick ratatouille recipe, look no further than these crusty bread recipes. My No Knead Bread and Olive Bread will astound you with their rustic, artisanal taste—with less than five ingredients! Or, if you’re looking for a richer variation, you can enjoy a slice of Garlic Bread in Air Fryer for a robust, toasty accompaniment.
        • Pasta: Bursting with luscious, complex flavors, pasta recipes are a must when you make this French vegetable stew. Ricotta Lemon Pasta strikes a delectable balance between smooth and citrusy flavors, while my Garlic Butter Spaghetti has impeccably bold, sumptuous notes. You can even spoon your ratatouille over a bowl of creamy polenta for a sweet, buttery base to your veggie stew.
        • Meat: Nothing pairs better with a light zucchini ratatouille than a savory cut of meat. I especially love to eat this Mediterranean ratatouille recipe alongside a rosemary-crusted Roasted Rack of Lamb or juicy Oven Beef Kabobs for the most robust, mouthwatering flavors.
        One pot ratatouille from the top view.

        Expert Tips

        There’s no secret to making this vegetable ratatouille recipe as tasty and full-bodied as possible. Using these master-level tips, you can make a delectably tender, flavorful summer stew every time.

        • Cut vegetables in equal sizes: When you prepare ratatouille, it’s vital that you cut your vegetables in equal sizes. This way, all your chunky pieces will cook at the same rate, ensuring no piece comes out over- or under-cooked.
        • Salting eggplant: Though an optional step, salting eggplant (also known as sweating eggplant) isn’t necessary when making ratatouille. In the past, eggplants had a bitter flavor, which the salting process could tamp down. However, new agricultural technology has eliminated most of the bitter taste from commercial eggplants, so salting is no longer necessary unless you’re growing eggplants yourself.
        • It gets better as it sits: As odd as it may sound, the best ratatouille recipe is one that has time to sit after cooking. The stew’s flavors will continue to develop and mix as it rests, so if you have time, I highly encourage giving the stew time to sit before serving—even if you wait until the next day to eat it.

        FAQs

        Want to know more about cooking ratatouille? This basic FAQ will ensure no questions go unanswered, whether you’re curious about flavor profiles or alternate preparation methods.

        What does ratatouille taste like?

        Savory, fresh, and mildly sweet, ratatouille gets its flavors from tender, sauteed veggies and Mediterranean seasonings. However, its final flavor profile might differ, depending on the balance of fresh herbs and spices you use, so you can prepare a tangier, richer, or earthier finish, depending on your personal preference.

        How is your recipe different than Ratatouille’s ratatouille recipe?

        There are many different ways to make this iconic dish. The traditional way of preparing ratatouille is to individually saute each vegetable before adding it to the final dish. However, my method makes this traditional French ratatouille recipe easy by simultaneously cooking all its ingredients in a single pot. Furthermore, the version popularized by the animated Disney movie Ratatouille does something different by layering each sliced veggie in a casserole dish—a variation often called “ratatouille casserole.”

        How long does it take to make ratatouille?

        Though other preparation methods may take longer, my easy French ratatouille recipe takes about 30 minutes to make—the perfect way to make weeknight dinners easy. 

        If you make your own Easy Ratatouille Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Easy ratatouille in a Dutch oven with a wooden spoon on the side.
        Print

        Easy Ratatouille Recipe

        Whip up a vibrant and delicious vegetable stew with this easy ratatouille recipe! In just 40 minutes and one pot, enjoy a medley of eggplant, zucchini, peppers, and tomatoes—a perfect taste of summer. Vegan and gluten-free too!
        Course Vegetarian Main Dish
        Cuisine French
        Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 244kcal

        Ingredients

        • 4 tablespoons olive oil plus more for drizzling
        • 1 yellow onion chopped
        • 1 red bell pepper chopped
        • 1 yellow bell pepper chopped
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 5 cloves garlic minced
        • 1 lb. globe eggplant 1 large or two medium- cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 1 lb. zucchini 2 medium-sized – peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 1 ½ lbs. tomatoes or three 14-ounce cans of diced tomatoes, cut into small pieces
        • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme chopped
        • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon sugar brown sugar, coconut sugar, granulated or cane sugar would also work
        • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
        • 1/4 cup fresh basil leaves loosely packed
        • Pinch red pepper flakes optional

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a large, heavy-bottom pot (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Add onion and peppers and saute until softened (8-10 minutes).
        • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for one more minute.
        • Add eggplant, zucchini, tomatoes, thyme, salt, pepper, and sugar. Bring it to a boil, turn the heat down to medium-low, put the lid on and cook, stirring once or twice, for 20-25 minutes or until the vegetables are fully cooked.
        • Off the heat, stir in the apple cider vinegar. Taste for seasoning and adjust accordingly.
        • Garnish with basil, a pinch of red pepper flakes, and an optional drizzle of extra virgin olive oil right before serving.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of vegetable stew, which is good for 4 servings as a main dish and 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4).
        • Cutting vegetables: When cutting veggies, make sure that they are equal in size to ensure even cooking.
        • Salting the eggplant: If you are buying your eggplant from a grocery store and in season, you do not need to salt it. Because eggplant that’s freshly picked, harvested before it’s full of seeds, and eaten within a few days is naturally sweet and doesn’t need salting. However, if you are making this recipe using eggplant you harvest yourself (or purchase from farmer’s market), you can salt it before cooking to remove its bitter taste. For reference, check out our detailed post on how to salt eggplant.
        • Storage: To store your ratatouille, place it in an airtight container and transfer it to the refrigerator. Your stew will then stay fresh for 4-5 days.
        • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers in two easy ways: microwaving them in 30-second increments or heating them on the stovetop until warmed to your liking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 244kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 1218mg | Potassium: 1194mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 2827IU | Vitamin C: 144mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/easy-ratatouille-recipe/feed/ 4
        Shawarma Spice Blend Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/ https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/#comments Fri, 10 May 2024 16:35:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75203 What is Shawarma? Shawarma is among the most popular meat dishes in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisine and is known…]]>

        What is Shawarma?

        Shawarma is among the most popular meat dishes in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisine and is known for its earthy, warm, and savory flavors. To make traditional shawarma, chefs cook a large cut of marinated meat—usually chicken, lamb, beef, or turkey—on a vertical rotisserie rod (also known as a vertical spit), which slowly rotates to cook the protein incrementally. When the outer layer is ready, the chefs will slice off thin slices of meat, which they then add to the final dish.

        Shawarma spice mix in a jar with a spoon.

        One of the most iconic ways to serve shawarma is in a kind of Mediterranean “wrap” or “pita pocket.” In other words, people often begin with a piece of pita bread, lavash, or any other flatbread. They then spread the grain with a layer of cool, tangy Yogurt Tahini Sauce and top it with a combination of shawarma meat, tomatoes, cucumber, salad greens, and pickles to ensure it has tons of flavor. People often eat this dish with a side of creamy Hummus, garlic sauce, or another herby grain, like Tabbouleh.

        Though “shawarma” usually refers to the meat in this dish, the meat usually carries the complex, sweet-yet-spicy taste of the shawarma seasoning blend used during the seasoning/marination process. Because of the mix’s robust taste, many use this seasoning mixture for other uses, from veggie seasoning to flavoring their grains.

        What is in Shawarma Seasoning?

        Diverse and flavorful, shawarma seasoning ingredients use all-natural spices to achieve its fresh, complex taste. Better yet, you can probably find all these ingredients in your spice cabinet, making this mixture a must-have in any kitchen.

        A photo of spices showing what is in shawarma spice.
        • Ground cumin
        • Ground coriander
        • Paprika: We used mild-tasting paprika, but smoked paprika can also be used.
        • Garlic powder
        • Black pepper
        • Ground turmeric
        • Ground cloves
        • Ground cinnamon
        • Ground nutmeg
        • Ground cardamom

        Optional Add-Ins

        Though we didn’t use it in our original recipe, these additional shawarma seasoning ingredients are a great way to add deliciously smoky, herbaceous undertones to your final dish. Feel free to use ½ teaspoon of each spice, taste it, and add more if necessary.

        • Dried oregano
        • Cayenne pepper
        • Chili powder
        • Sumac

        How to Make Shawarma Spice?

        It couldn’t be simpler to make this easy diy shawarma spice blend. In fact, you can whip up this five-star mix in less than five minutes!

        A collage of images showing how to make shawarma spice.
        1. Combine the mix of spices: Add the ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom to a small mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients together until thoroughly combined.
        2. Use and store: Use the spice blend in your identified recipe. Or, if you’re planning to use it later, store it in an airtight container or jar in a cool, dry place for up to six months.

        How to Use Shawarma Spice Mix?

        One of my favorite things about this authentic shawarma seasoning recipe is how many ways you can use it—any day of the week! Use this five-minute rub to make my chicken shawarma seasoning, or add it to your go-to sides for an unforgettable spread.

        • Use it to marinate meat or as a dry rub: You can effortlessly elevate any favorite protein—chicken (like my Chicken Shawarma recipe), beef, lamb, turkey, or fish—by infusing your meat with the warm and savory flavor of this delicious spice blend. If you want a dry rub, sprinkle an even layer of the shawarma mix over every side of your meat. Or, for a marinade, combine the homemade shawarma spice mix with oil and lemon juice and let your meat rest in it for a few hours—or even overnight!
        • Roasting or grilling vegetables: If you can’t get enough of the iconic shawarma flavor but aren’t in the mood for meat, I have great news: This tasty seasoning is also a must-have for dozens of other cooked veggies, including cauliflower, eggplant, potatoes, and mushrooms.
        • Legumes and grains: Another great way to use this shawarma spice mix recipe is to sprinkle it over your favorite grain and legume recipes. I particularly love adding this flavorful addition to roasted chickpeas and using it as a seasoning for my hearty and tender Bulgur Pilaf.

        FAQs

        It doesn’t matter whether you’re making this authentic shawarma seasoning for the first time or have made it one hundred times before. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions, whether they’re about spice substitutes or general taste profiles.

        What is a good shawarma spice blend substitute?

        If you’re not in the mood to make this homemade shawarma spice but still want to achieve classic Middle Eastern flavors, you’re in luck! My fresh and herby Mediterranean Spice Mix and earthy Baharat Spice Blend both make excellent substitutes.

        What does shawarma taste like?

        Generally, a shawarma seasoning mix recipe strikes a complex, savory balance of warm, aromatic, and slightly spicy flavors.

        Is shawarma spicy?

        Like other Mediterranean homemade spice blends, shawarma spice is only mildly spicy, often stemming from its warmer, more peppery ingredients. However, if you want to reduce the level of spiciness in your mix, you may consider reducing the amount of the “spicier” ingredients, like paprika and cloves.

        Recipes To Use Shawarma Seasoning

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own homemade shawarma seasoning following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Shawarma spice mix in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Shawarma Spice Blend Recipe

        Make this homemade shawarma spice blend recipe and add it to chicken, beef, lamb, fish, or vegetables to incorporate the aromatic flavors of the Middle East and Mediterranean in your daily cooking.
        Course Seasoning
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 tablespoons
        Calories 14kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
        • 1 teaspoon paprika
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
        • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
        • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
        • ½ teaspoon ground cardamom

        Instructions

        • Place ground cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom in a small airtight jar.
        • Mix until thoroughly combined.
        • You can use it immediately or cover it tightly with the lid and store it in a dark, dry, and cool place for up to 6 months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 3 ½ tablespoons to  4 tablespoons of Shawarma seasoning. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
        • Multiply the recipe: Making large batches of this shawarma mixture is a great way to ensure you always have it on hand whenever your recipe calls for it. Therefore, please feel free to multiply this spice recipe and store the extra mixture for later use.
        • Addition of salt: Though some recipes may include salt among their shawarma spices, I prefer to omit this ingredient. Saltiness is hard to adjust in recipes—especially depending on your base—so I prefer adding salt according to the recipe I use.
        • Use the freshest spices: It’s no secret that fresh spices have a brighter, more potent flavor than old or dried spices. Therefore, I highly encourage you to ensure your pre-ground seasonings are as fresh and flavorful as possible before adding them to your shawarma seasoning mix. Or—if possible—you may also grind your whole spices with a spice grinder for extra flavor.
        • Experiment with the amount used: Depending on your desired recipe and the serving size of your dish, you might want to use more or less of this shawarma spice mix. Our rule of thumb is to use two tablespoons per pound of meat, but you may add more or less if you prefer a stronger or milder flavor. (Keep in mind that if you make this recipe as written, you’ll come out with 3.5-4 tablespoons of seasoning, which is ideal for two pounds of meat.)
        • Toast your spices (if you have the time): While it may sound like an extra step, toasting your spices before grinding will take this spice blend to the next level. To do so, add the whole spices to a dry skillet and toast, stirring often, over medium-low heat for about 4-5 minutes.  Then, you can use your spice grinder to grind them to a fine powder. Remember that following our recipe, you can use an equal amount of any whole spice, but the amount may be slightly less or more than its version made with ground spices.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 14kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 62mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 257IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/feed/ 3
        Black Bean and Corn Salad https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/#comments Fri, 26 Apr 2024 13:44:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19714 Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need…]]>

        Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need to prepare for a big gathering!), as well as how to make a homemade lime dressing you’ll want to add to all your favorite salads, veggie sides, and proteins.With such a vibrantly fresh, citrusy flavor, it’s no wonder why this black bean corn salad is such a hit.

        Mexican black bean and corn salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Packed with fresh and bright flavors, every element of this simple bean salad will delight your taste buds, from its zingy lime vinaigrette to its crisp veggie base.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • For the Dressing:
          • Fresh lime juice
          • Lime zest
          • Garlic: You’ll need one fresh garlic clove to give this dressing a delectably bold, complex finish. After peeling your garlic, press or finely mince it to ensure it thoroughly and evenly infuses the mixture.
          • Olive oil
          • Seasoning: I use a savory, earthy mix of ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper to season this simple corn and bean salad recipe. If preferred, a pinch of chili powder can also be added.
        • For the Salad:
          • Black beans: You can cook raw black beans from scratch or use canned black beans for this salad. If you opt for a canned version, be sure to drain and rinse them under cold water before adding them to your mixture.
          • Corn: Any type of corn will work for this easy bean and corn salad recipe. If you’re making this dish during the summer, you can use fresh sweet corn off the cob, air-fried corn (be sure to cut the kernels after cooking), or grill the corn beforehand if you’re in the mood for a smokier flavor profile. Also, if you’re in a pinch and don’t have any fresh corn on hand, you can use frozen corn or canned corn kernels—as long as you thaw, drain, and rinse them beforehand.
          • Cherry tomatoes
          • Bell peppers: You can use any color of bell pepper for this recipe. Though I used red peppers, yellow, orange, or green bell peppers would also add a deliciously fresh crispness to your mixture.
          • Red onion: Chopped red onion is my favorite way to bring out the subtle Mexican flavors of this dish. However, if you’re aiming for a milder taste, you may also use scallions.
          • Avocado: Creamy avocado is there to balance the crisper taste of this recipe’s fresh produce. However, you can omit it from your recipe if you’re not a fan.
          • Fresh cilantro: I love using cilantro leaves to add a fresh, peppery edge to my corn and black bean salad recipe. However, you’re welcome to omit this ingredient (or substitute it with fresh parsley!) if you don’t like its taste.
          • Cotija cheese (optional): If you want to add more light, creamy notes to your salad ingredients, cotija cheese offers a soft, milky flavor you’ll love. Sprinkle your salad with this cheesy addition after mixing.

        How to Make Black Bean Salad with Corn

        It takes almost no time to whip up this avocado corn black bean salad. In just four steps, you’ll have a crowd-pleasing dish you can use as a side, appetizer, or quick snack any day of the week.

        Steps showing how to make mexican corn and black bean salad.
        1. Prepare the lime dressing: In a small bowl, add the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        2. Make the corn and bean salad: Place the black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro into a large mixing bowl.
        3. Drizzle and toss: Drizzle the bean salad with the lime dressing and gently toss it until evenly combined.
        4. Taste and serve: Taste the salad for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        There’s a reason why this simple black bean and corn salad is one of my favorite foods. Not only can you make it ahead of time, but you can also store it throughout the week for stress-free meal prep.

        • Make ahead: You can make this quick black bean and corn salad one day in advance. Not only does this early prep minimize kitchen hassle, but it also gives the salad ingredients enough time to mix and infuse their flavors. That said, I still recommend adding the avocado just before serving so the ingredient maintains its color, taste, and texture.
        • Storage: Have leftovers? Don’t worry! You can store this easy salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

        Serving Suggestions for this Corn Salad with Beans

        Like my other salad recipes, this easy black bean salad is a great side dish for any meal, from summer BBQs to Mexican dinners. Plus, it also works as a hassle-free snack or appetizer if you need a quick addition to your weekday menu.

        Below are just a few of my favorite ways to serve this fan-favorite recipe.

        • With chips on the side: Easy and quick, I love serving this simple salad alongside a bowl of tortilla chips—perfect for weeknight get-togethers or midday munching. Or, if you’re in the mood for a heartier snack, my Cheesy Spinach Quesadilla exquisitely balances this salad’s bright flavors with rich, gooey deliciousness.
        • Grilled fish: If you plan to serve this dish as a summer corn and bean salad, it’s time to fire up the outdoor grill! My Grilled Shrimp Skewers and Grilled Mahi Mahi strike a delectable balance between buttery, smoky, and light flavors—an ideal pairing for this salad’s zesty undertones.
        • Grilled chicken or beef: Looking for a meatier meal? This recipe makes a great black bean and corn side dish for all your favorite meaty mains. In particular, this tender-crisp side is a delectable accompaniment for my creamy yet savory Avocado Burger and tangy Yogurt Marinated Chicken.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Corn Salads You Might Also Like:

        Black bean corn avocado salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Black Bean and Corn Salad Recipe

        This colorful, fresh, and festive Black Bean and Corn Salad is loaded with vegetables and drizzled with a delicious lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it can be served as a side dish or a light lunch that you can make as a part of your meal prep.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 143kcal

        Ingredients

        For the lime dressing:

        • cup lime juice freshly squeezed; from 3 limes
        • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 3 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 2 cans black beans rinsed and drained – (15 oz each)
        • 3 ears fresh corn shucked; ~ 2 ¾ cups (or 1 8.5-oz. can whole kernels, drained)
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes halved
        • 1 red bell pepper chopped; 1 cup/120 g
        • ½ medium red onion chopped; 1 cup/88 g
        • 1 avocado cubed
        • cup cilantro divided and chopped

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, combine the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
        • To make the corn and bean salad, place black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro in a large salad bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the prepared dressing and give it a gentle toss.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This black bean salad recipe makes 5-6 cups of salad ideal for serving six people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Chop everything small: The key to making the best black bean and corn salad recipe is to chop all your veggies into small, uniformly-sized pieces. Not only will your salad be easier to eat, but this small, even size will also ensure that each bite has a more even balance of flavors. This is especially important if you plan to serve it with chips on the side or a topping for tacos.
        • Let it marinate: If you have the time, I highly recommend letting it rest for a few hours before serving (or even waiting until the next day!). Doing so will give the lime dressing time to fully infuse the vegetables and let the veggies’ flavors mix with each other. Just wait until the last moment to add your cubed avocado.
        • Serve it chilled or at room temperature: I prefer this recipe to be served cold, so I usually refrigerate it for a few hours before serving. But you can also serve it at room temperature.
        • Corn: You can use any corn you like. During the summer months, I usually use fresh sweet corn. I like them raw, but if you want, you can also sauté it lightly. If your grill is on, feel free to grill your corn after spreading it with oil (butter and olive oil would work). Of course, you can also use a can of corn (drained and rinsed) and frozen corn (thawed.)
        • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 432mg | Potassium: 334mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 923IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/feed/ 30
        Raw Carrot Salad https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/#comments Thu, 18 Apr 2024 17:31:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74840 The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s…]]>

        The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s research, raw carrots contain a unique fiber that, when mixed with a touch of healthy fats (like coconut oil) and vinegar, can bind to excess estrogen and safely eliminate it from the body. This is good for hormone balance and gut health. And with this raw carrot salad recipe, it’s so easy to incorporate this health trend into your diet.

        If you are wondering what to do with grated carrots, check out a few of our other raw carrot recipes, including Kale and Apple Slaw and Yogurt Coleslaw.

        A bowl of shaved raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        The good news is that this vegan carrot salad uses just a handful of ingredients you probably already have on hand:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Carrots: If possible, use organic carrots, as these will provide the highest nutritional content and a good source of fiber. You will need about 3 large carrots (or 10 oz total). I simply cut off the ends, remove the outer layer, and slice them lengthwise with a vegetable peeler. You can also slice your carrots with a julienne peeler, grate them on a box grater, or use the large grating attachment on your food processor.
        • Fresh herbs: I love a ton of fresh parsley in this carrot vinegar salad, but you can also try any of your favorite soft herbs, such as fresh cilantro, mint, or dill.
        • Oil: I use extra-virgin olive oil, but you can also use coconut oil or avocado oil.
        • Vinegar: I love the slightly sweet tang of apple cider vinegar, but other options include rice vinegar, white wine vinegar, or red wine vinegar. The flavor profile will change based on what type of vinegar you use.
        • Sweetener: I like to use maple syrup to keep it vegan, but a touch of honey or agave could also work.
        • Seasonings: Go for a simple blend of ground cumin, sea salt, and black pepper.
        • Nuts and Seeds: I like a final sprinkle of sesame seeds, which I find adds a subtle crunch and nutty flavor. Other options include sunflower seeds, sliced almonds, or pumpkin seeds (raw pepitas).

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Lemon juice or lime juice: A squeeze of fresh citrus juice is an easy way to brighten up this peeled carrot salad recipe. You can use this addition in place of the vinegar or in addition to vinegar.
        • Dijon mustard: To give the salad a little kick, add a very small amount, maybe about ½ teaspoons.
        • Soy sauce: To give this carrot salad an Asian twist, you can use soy sauce instead of salt.
        • Green onions: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, a small amount of (¼ cup) chopped scallions would be a great addition.

        How to Make Raw Carrot Salad?

        This healthy carrot salad comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to make it:

        A collage of images showing how to make raw carrot salad.
        1. Shred carrots: Cut off the ends of your carrots, then peel the outer skin with a vegetable peeler. Then, continue to slice them into carrot ribbons as evenly as possible. Transfer the sliced carrots to a large bowl.
        2. Make the dressing: Add the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper to a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake until combined.
        3. Toss: Drizzle the dressing over the shaved carrots and give it a gentle toss.
        4. Garnish: If using, sprinkle with chopped fresh parsley and sesame seeds. Serve cold or at room temperature.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        After testing the carrot salad with vinegar several times, we found the salad was better the next day, making it a great make-ahead recipe. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips for this raw carrot recipe:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad up to 1 day in advance and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. This gives a chance for all the flavors to marry together.
        • Storage: The dressed carrot salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Give it a good toss just before serving.
        Person sprinkling fresh carrot salad with sesame seeds.

        Serving Suggestions

        According to dieticians, it is best to eat this cold carrot salad on an empty stomach to reap its benefits, which is why I usually eat it as a light lunch. That being said, it makes a great side dish with any of the following:

        Aysegul’s Recipe Tips

        If you look at the recipe below, you’ll see that this shaved carrot salad recipe is easy to make with minimal ingredients. However, we learned a few tips as we were testing this recipe.

        • Best way to slice carrots: I prefer to shred carrots lengthwise using a vegetable peeler to make this simple carrot salad. However, you can also use a julienne peeler for a more French-style salad, the large holes of a box grater, or the shredding blade on your food processor to achieve different textures.
        • Let it rest before serving: The natural sweetness of the carrots and dressing tastes better the longer they have a chance to mingle together, so I recommend making this grated carrot salad for at least a few hours, or up to two days, ahead of time.
        • Taste for seasoning: Start with the recommended amount of salt, pepper, and cumin, and then add more to your liking. I added a good dose of salt right before serving.

        FAQs

        How do you cut carrots for raw carrot salad?

        First, cut off the ends, then peel away the outer skin. Then, slice evenly but thinly with a vegetable peeler, julienne peeler, large holes of a box grater, or the grating attachment on your food processor.

        What are the benefits of raw carrot salad?

        According to Dr. Ray Peat, the benefits of eating raw carrot salad regularly include improved digestive health and optimal liver and thyroid function. The fiber in raw carrots promotes bowel regularity and enhances digestion. Additionally, by aiding in the removal of excess estrogens and endotoxins, consuming this salad regularly helps reduce the burden on the liver, thereby supporting both liver and thyroid health.

        If you make this Raw Carrot Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Raw Carrot Salad Recipe

        Here's a Raw Carrot Salad that you can make in under 10 minutes. Vegan and gluten-free, this healthy salad is perfect for a light lunch or side dish with any of your main dishes.
        Course Lunch, Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 72kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 medium-sized carrots washed, ends trimmed (10 oz/287 g)
        • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped (can substitute with cilantro or mint)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil or coconut oil
        • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds optional

        Instructions

        • Using a vegetable peeler, peel the outer skin of your carrots. Then continue to to grate them into ribbons. Transfer them to a large salad bowl.
        • Add the parsley to the bowl.
        • Prepare the dressing: Place the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and shake. Set aside.
        • Drizzle the shaved carrots with the dressing and give it a gentle toss using tongs.
        • Sprinkle with sesame seeds, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3-4 cups of carrot salad, which is ideal for 4 servings as a side dish and 2 servings as a light meal. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4.)
        • Slicing carrots: While I shave the carrots into ribbons, you can shred it using a box grater or a food processor.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let the salad rest in the fridge for a few hours before serving. Resting time allows the flavors to meld together and make it even more delicious.
        • Storage: You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 72kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8279IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/feed/ 3
        Buckwheat Porridge https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-coconut-buckwheat-porridge/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-coconut-buckwheat-porridge/#comments Tue, 16 Apr 2024 22:55:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5606 Up the ante and nutritional content of your first meal of the day with this buckwheat hot cereal recipe. It’s…]]>

        Up the ante and nutritional content of your first meal of the day with this buckwheat hot cereal recipe. It’s a hearty and filling warm bowl of porridge thanks to plenty of protein, fiber, vitamins, and minerals. And the best part is that it is ready in 20 minutes from start to finish.
        If you are a big fan of buckwheat, check out my other buckwheat breakfast recipes, including Buckwheat Pancakes made from almond and buckwheat flour and Buckwheat and Millet Bread made by using a combination of buckwheat and millet.

        Person pouring almond milk over buckwheat porridge for breakfast.

        Ingredients

        This easy buckwheat porridge recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

        • Raw Buckwheat Groats: You can find buckwheat in the breakfast cereal aisle in major grocery stores. When shopping for it, you will likely see them labeled in two ways. The first is buckwheat, which is usually the raw (untoasted) version, and the second is kasha. Kasha is made by roasting buckwheat groats until they turn golden brown. It offers a more intense and earthier flavor. In this buckwheat groats cereal recipe, I am using raw buckwheat groats for its milder taste, but kasha can also be used.
        • Water: Plain water is a great starting point. You will need a ratio of 3:1 liquid to buckwheat groats.
        • Sea salt: A nice pinch of salt enhances the natural nutty flavour of the buckwheat.
        Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

        Optional Add-Ins:

        Buckwheat for breakfast is a popular dish in Eastern European countries and Russia and is usually served with a small amount of butter. However, if you’re aiming to achieve the creamy texture and varied flavors of oatmeal (similar to my oatmeal with almond milk and chia seeds recipe), you might want to try adding any of these optional ingredients:

        • Butter: Russian buckwheat porridge is traditionally made with a tab of butter and served as a side dish or a delicious breakfast. The extra fat adds a nice silky texture. Olive oil or vegan butter is a good substitute.
        • Milk: Feel free to replace the water (or a portion of it) with regular milk or any plant-based milk like almond milk, coconut milk, oat milk, or cashew milk.
        • Superfoods: To make your buckwheat breakfast bowl even more nutritious, you can stir in a spoonful of chia seeds, hemp seeds, or flaxseed meal.
        • Flavorings: Give it a warming touch with cinnamon, cardamom, pumpkin spice, or nutmeg. A touch of vanilla extract adds an extra special layer of sweetness, too.
        • Fruit: Fresh fruit like strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, blackberries, grapes, pomegranate seeds, or sauteed apples adds a nice touch.
        • Sweeteners: Use your favorite sweetener like maple syrup, brown sugar, or honey if not vegan.
        • Seed or nut butter: Seed butters like sunflower seed butter or tahini, or nut butters like peanut butter, almond butter, or cashew butter add a nutty richness.

        How to Make Buckwheat Porridge?

        This recipe for buckwheat porridge is so easy to make and very simple to make oatmeal. Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos:

        A collage of images showing how to cook buckwheat porridge.
        1. Rinse buckwheat: Place the groats in a fine mesh strainer and rinse under cold water, mixing around with your fingers.
        2. Bring to boil: Add the rinsed buckwheat groats, water, and salt to a medium saucepan. Bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. 
        3. Simmer: Reduce the heat to low, cover, and simmer for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally to prevent the groats from sticking to the bottom.
        4. Rest: Remove from the heat and let it sit, covered, for 5 minutes. Give it a good stir.
        Buckwheat breakfast porridge placed in a bowl and garnished with fruits.
        1. Finish with your favorite toppings: Ladle your cooked buckwheat into bowls, and if preferred, top it off with fresh fruit, a sprinkle of cinnamon, and a drizzle of maple syrup. I usually add a splash of milk to make it even more creamy, but it is optional.

        Overnight Buckwheat Porridge

        If you are looking for a faster approach to this buckwheat cereal recipe, just like I do with my Yogurt and Oatmeal and Chia Pudding with yogurt recipe, an overnight soak is your answer.

        Although it’s an extra step, soaking the buckwheat groats overnight drastically reduces the cooking time and removes some of the phytic acid, which improves nutrient absorption and digestibility (even for those with a healthy digestive system).

        A few bowls of Overnight Coconut Buckwheat Porridge Recipe topped off with pomegranate seeds.

        If you want to make overnight buckwheat groats, simply:

        • Soak: Stir together 3 cups liquid (water or milk) with 1 cup buckwheat groats, with the option to add 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or lemon juice. Store in an airtight container overnight in the refrigerator.
        • Simmer: The next morning, transfer it to a small saucepan and simmer until thickened to your liking, no more than 4 to 5 minutes.

        How to Store and Reheat?

        I find that this buckwheat recipe has the best texture and taste when it is first made, which is why I usually make a batch right before serving. However, following the below storage and reheating tips, you can enjoy this kasha breakfast porridge for a few more days:

        • Refrigerate: Store leftover buckwheat porridge in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. The mixture will thicken the longer it sits, but you can add a splash of milk to bring it back to its original consistency.
        • Reheat: When ready to enjoy, add a splash of milk and reheat in 30-second intervals in the microwave until warm, Or, reheat in a small saucepan over medium heat until warmed through.

        Aysegul’s Recipe Tips

        While the recipe is quite simple, there are a few things I’d like to point out so you will succeed on your first try. 

        • Do not skip rinsing the buckwheat: Rinsing the buckwheat is a crucial step as it helps to remove any dust or debris and can also reduce the natural bitterness in the seeds.
        • The ratio of liquid to buckwheat groats: I’ve found that the 3:1 liquid-to-buckwheat ratio (3 cups liquid to 1 cup groats) produces the most creamy buckwheat porridge. During our recipe testing, we tried the 2:1 Ratio and found that the end result was drier and the texture was rather dense. With that being said, feel free to experiment with more or less liquid depending on your desired consistency.
        • Watch the pot closely: It’s important to keep a close eye on the buckwheat while simmering on the stove top. The groats tend to stick to the bottom and scorch, resulting in a bitter flavor and unappealing texture. For best results, keep a close eye on it and stir it a few times during the cooking process.
        • Give it a personal touch: Add any of your favorite toppings like seeds, nuts, nut butters, sweeteners, and more. Or, although it is not traditional, you can play around with the flavors and add additional flavorings like cocoa powder, cacao powder, matcha powder, cinnamon sticks, ground spices, or extracts of your choosing.
        A spoonful of buckwheat cereal from the top view.

        FAQs

        What does buckwheat taste like?

        Buckwheat has a pronounced flavor that is earthy, nutty, and slightly bitter (which can be an adjustment for some). The flavor is a bit more intense, with more chewy texture and bite than regular oatmeal.

        Are buckwheat groats gluten free?

        Buckwheat is not a grain but a pseudocereal or seed related to rhubarb. Therefore, it is naturally gluten-free, making it a great choice for those with celiac disease or gluten allergies. Despite its name, buckwheat has no relation to wheat. It is a pseudo-cereal as it is not a grass like cereal grains such as wheat, rice, or oats.

        What are the health benefits of buckwheat?

        According to Healthline, it’s gluten-free, vegan, high fiber, a complete protein source with all essential amino acids, and high in antioxidants, most notably rutin and quercetin. This superfood is also a powerhouse food for keeping blood sugar levels in check.

        Similar Porridge Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this buckwheat porridge recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those who are planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the whole Foolproof Living community.

        A bowl of buckwheat porridge with fruit.
        Print

        Buckwheat Porridge Recipe

        This creamy buckwheat porridge is a filling, healthy, vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free breakfast porridge recipe in under 20 minutes. You can enjoy it as a side dish or serve it as breakfast with toppings as an alternative to oatmeal.
        Course Breakfast
        Cuisine Russian
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Resting time 5 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 146kcal

        Ingredients

        Optional Add Ins :

        • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
        • 1 tablespoon maple syrup plus more for drizzling
        • 1 tablespoon chia seeds optional
        • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds optional
        • Fresh fruit as topping

        Instructions

        • Place the buckwheat groats in a fine mesh strainer and rinse under cold running water.
        • Transfer to a medium-sized saucepan, pour in the water, and add in the salt. Bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
        • Reduce the heat to low and cover. Let it simmer for 10 minutes*. Keep a close eye on it as it cooks, and stir occasionally to prevent it from sticking to the bottom.
        • Turn the heat off but let it sit covered for 5 minutes.
        • If preferred, stir in cinnamon, maple syrup, chia seeds, and hemp seeds. Ladle into bowls. You can also add a splash of milk and top it off with fresh fruit before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: One cup of raw buckwheat groats makes about four cups of cooked buckwheat porridge, which is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include any of the optional add-ins.
        • Buckwheat groats vs Kasha: When you are buying buckwheat, you may come across some brands calling it kasha. Roasted buckwheat (usually darker in color) is called Kasha. While I used raw buckwheat groats, kasha would also work in this recipe.
        • Overnight buckwheat porridge: Soaking buckwheat overnight helps reduce the cooking time. Simply mix 3 parts liquid (water or milk) with 1 part buckwheat in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. In the morning, transfer it to a saucepan and warm until thickened to your liking, no more than 4 to 5 minutes. Ladle into bowls and top with any of your favorite toppings.
        • The time of cooking: During our recipe testing, we thought that 10 minutes of cooking time (after it came to a boil) delivered the most creamy buckwheat porridge. However, you can adjust the cooking time based on your texture and consistency preference. It is imperative that you let it simmer at low heat and keep a close eye on it, as after the 10-minute mark, it goes from cooked to overdone pretty quickly.
        • Storage: This recipe is best the day it is made. However, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Reheating: You can reheat your buckwheat porridge in a small saucepan with a splash of water (or milk) until heated through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Sodium: 155mg | Potassium: 196mg | Fiber: 4g | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-coconut-buckwheat-porridge/feed/ 44
        Mint Sauce for Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/#comments Wed, 03 Apr 2024 20:39:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74652 If you’re looking for a creamier condiment to brighten your menu, you can check out my Mint Yogurt Sauce and…]]>

        If you’re looking for a creamier condiment to brighten your menu, you can check out my Mint Yogurt Sauce and Chimichurri with Mint to strike the perfect balance between tangy, cool, and luscious flavors.

        Mint sauce for lamb in a small jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        One of the best parts about making mint sauce for lamb is how few ingredients you need to get the freshest, most vibrant taste. In fact, you likely already have these simple ingredients in your kitchen, making this recipe a must whether you’re preparing for a special occasion or a quick weeknight dinner.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint: I highly suggest using fresh mint leaves or common garden mint for this mint sauce recipe. However, you should be able to find fresh mint at your local grocery store. If you are growing your own mint, then peppermint or spearmint varieties would both work. 
        • Sugar: There are many ways to add a touch of sweetness to this iconic condiment. Classic mint sauce recipes for lamb use granulated sugar, but you can also use a cane, coconut, or brown sugar if you’re looking for an alternative, pantry-ready option. Or, if you’d prefer a thicker, more complex sweetness, you can also use honey instead of raw sugar. 
        • Kosher salt: A pinch of salt is an excellent addition to this recipe, balancing its sweetness while bringing out its bright mint taste.
        • Vinegar: Adding an acidic component to this lamb mint sauce is critical to enlivening it with savory, tart notes. The original British mint sauce calls for distilled malt vinegar, but you can use white wine vinegar (which I used) or apple cider vinegar if you don’t have any malt vinegar on hand.
        • Boiling water

        How to Make Mint Sauce from Mint Leaves?

        Quick, simple, and hassle-free, this fresh mint sauce recipe is a cinch to make, regardless of your skill level. These step-by-step instructions will guarantee you can serve a fresh, tangy, and savory sauce in less than five minutes.

        Steps showing how to make mint sauce for lamb.
        1. Prepare the mint leaves: Remove the fresh mint leaves from their stems, chop them finely, then transfer them to a bowl. Or, you can put it together in a lidded heat-resistant jar as well.
        2. Add flavorings: Add the sugar, Kosher salt, and white wine vinegar to the chopped mint leaves, then stir the ingredients until thoroughly blended.
        3. Add the water: Slowly pour the boiling water over the other ingredients, then stir the mixture to combine.
        4. Cool: Set the jar aside and let it cool for a minimum of 30 minutes. 
        5. Serve: Serve the cooled fresh mint sauce alongside the rest of your menu. Or, if you plan to use the condiment later, cover and refrigerate it until ready to use.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        Once you learn how to make mint sauce for lamb, you’ll want to use it alongside all your favorite recipes. These pro storage tips will ensure your leftover sauce stays as fresh as possible, whether you want to enjoy it later in the week or use it for long-term meal prep.

        • Storage: After transferring it to an airtight container, you can store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 days. However, remember that the sauce will turn a darker green the longer it sits since the fresh mint loses its bright color during storage. Therefore, even if its taste doesn’t diminish, the sauce may not have the same bright green color as when you first prepared it.
        • Freeze: The best way to freeze this easy mint sauce is in individual portions, ensuring effortless use later on. To do so, I recommend pouring the sauce into an ice cube tray and freezing it until solid. Then, remove the cubes from the tray and place them in a freezer-safe container, such as a Ziplock bag, with as much air removed as possible. Replace the container in the freezer, and you can use each individual serving whenever your menu calls for a serving of bright, cool sauce.

        Other Ways to Use Mint Sauce

        No one can deny that mint sauce with lamb is one of the most classic flavor combinations, from a succulent roast dinner to a smoky Grilled Rack of Lamb or Boneless Leg of Lamb Roast

        Mint lamb sauce served with lamb chops as a condiment.

        However, if you have extra sauce or want to try out a new menu, there are dozens of other mouthwatering pairings to try, a few of which I’ve detailed below:

        • Incorporate it into salad dressings: This mint sauce makes a fantastic base for salad dressing recipes. Simply mix a tablespoon or two of this sauce with a bit of lemon juice and olive oil, and you’ll have a zesty, light dressing perfect for a bed of leafy greens.
        • Add it to yogurt: If you’re like me, you love making a quick, gourmet-level dip you can use for all your favorite snacks. You can quickly transform this recipe into a mint dipping sauce by mixing 1-2 tablespoons into a serving of Greek yogurt and serving it with fresh veggies, pita bread, or as part of a mezze platter. 
        • Use it as a marinade for other meats, like chicken or fish: Want to add a brilliantly bright, herby flavor to your meats? Add a bit of this mint sauce to your marinade recipe, and its vibrant notes will beautifully compliment your main dish’s savory, succulent base.
        • Spread over spring vegetables: You can enhance any veggie side by adding a dollop of this minty spread to your plate. In particular, mint sauce makes a great accompaniment for fresh or blanched peas and green beans (especially my Air Fryer Green Beans!), as well as heartier veggies such as roasted potatoes.

        Expert Tips

        Any chef—beginner or professional—can easily make this homemade lamb mint sauce. These tips will ensure you come out with the tastiest sauce possible, including expert suggestions for chopping, flavor adjustment, serving, and more.

        • Mint stems: Since this recipe requires so much mint (you’ll need 1 large bunch), I encourage you to consider your herb’s freshness when deciding whether to use only the leaves or include the stems. Young, freshly picked stems—like the kind you grow in your home garden—are OK to use in this recipe. However, older stems—the kind you might find at your local grocery store—tend to have a harder, woodsier taste, which might negatively impact the overall flavor of your recipe. No matter which type of minty herb you use, it’s essential that you finely chop it to ensure the leaves fully release and evenly distribute their flavors into the sauce.
        • Food processor: You may have seen that other mint sauce recipes ask you to use a food processor or blender to cut up your mint leaves more thoroughly and blend them with the other ingredients. However, though this is technically an option, you can achieve an ideal fineness by chopping your herbs with a sharp knife. Furthermore, processing your mint may bruise the delicate mint leaves, leaving you with a sauce that has a slightly bitter taste rather than the fresh, vibrant flavor that finely hand-chopped mint leaves can offer.
        • Taste and adjust: The best mint sauce for lamb is one that you adjust according to your personal preference. That’s why I highly encourage you to use this recipe as a base, taste it before serving, and add more seasoning as necessary. I should also note that I find most jarred mint sauces to be too sweet for my taste, so I use a minimal amount of added sugar compared to other recipes. Therefore, if you prefer a sweeter profile, you may add more sweeteners to achieve your ideal balance of sweet and acidic flavors.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, this homemade mint sauce recipe should rest for 30 minutes before serving. This resting time ensures that the ingredients have time to develop and deepen their flavors.
        • Adjust consistency: Depending on how you plan to use your mint lamb sauce recipe, you might want to adjust its consistency. As written, this recipe will result in a thicker sauce—more like a mint paste—which is ideal for serving with lamb dishes due to their rich meat flavor. However, if you’re looking for a thinner consistency, as you might when making a salad dressing or a saucy drizzle, all you need to do is add more water or vinegar to your mixture.
        • Serve it at room temperature: Though I recommend storing it in the refrigerator, it has the best taste and consistency when served at room temperature. Therefore, if you’ve stored it in the fridge beforehand, I suggest taking it out at least 30 minutes before adding it to your dinner table.

        FAQs

        What is mint sauce?

        Mint sauce is a bright, vibrant, herb-based condiment often served with lamb dishes. In addition to fresh mint leaves, this thick sauce usually includes other ingredients, like sugar, vinegar, water, salt, and pepper, to enhance its flavor. Many store this mixture in a small jar, which you can likely find at your local grocery store.

        Is mint jelly the same as mint sauce?

        Though mint jelly and mint sauce are common accompaniments for lamb dishes, they’re not the same. Mint jelly has a more gelatinous texture due to its inclusion of pectin, and it tends to be sweeter because of its higher concentration of sugar—especially American mint jelly. By comparison, mint sauce is more herbaceous, spreadable, and tart. Because of its fresh mint base, it boasts a more potent mint flavor, and its use of vinegar and sugar creates a more vibrant flavor profile than mint jelly.

        Why is mint sauce served with lamb?

        Lamb and mint sauce is such an iconic pairing because the refreshing, minty taste of the sauce often helps balance the richness of lamb—especially back in the day, when lamb had a more pronounced gamey flavor. Together, lamb and mint sauce create a savory, fresh, and succulent base that’s as delicious as it is good for digestion.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this mint sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It will be a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Mint sauce for lamb in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Sauce for Lamb Recipe

        Easy, fresh, tasty, and homemade mint sauce perfect for roast lamb. All you need are just a few simple ingredients and 5 minutes of your time to make it.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Resting time 30 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 0.5 cup
        Calories 104kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups fresh mint rinsed, from 1 large bunch (~ 2 cups (34 grams) packed leaves)
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane, coconut, brown sugar, or honey
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
        • 3 tablespoons boiling water

        Instructions

        • Remove the fresh mint leaves from their stems*. Finely chop the mint leaves and transfer them to a heat-resistant jar with a lid.
        • Add sugar, kosher salt, and white wine vinegar. Give it a quick stir.
        • Slowly pour in the boiling water and stir to combine.
        • Set it aside and let it cool for at least 30 minutes before serving. If not using right away, cover and refrigerate.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ½ cup of mint sauce, ideal for serving with two racks of lamb. The nutritional information below is for the full recipe.
        • Mint stems*:  You are welcome to use the stems of freshly picked mint, but I wouldn’t recommend using the stems of store-bought mint as they tend to be woodsy.
        • Adjust the sweetness and consistency: I find most jarred versions of this mint lamb sauce to be too sweet, so this recipe is minimally sweetened. However, you can add more sugar if you prefer. The same goes for the consistency. If you find it too thick, feel free to add more boiling water, 1 teaspoon at a time, until it reaches your desired consistency.
        • Making Ahead and Storage Instructions: You can make this sauce a day in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. Keep in mind, though, that it will lose its bright green color and vibrancy as it sits.
        • Freezing: You can make a large batch of this mint sauce and freeze it using an ice cube tray. Place 1 tablespoon of the mint sauce in each cube and freeze. After they are frozen, remove the cubes from the tray and place them in a storage container in your freezer. You can have the perfect portion anytime you need mint sauce in your favorite recipe. Check out the blog post for other recipe ideas to use your sauce in.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 0.02g | Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 2335mg | Potassium: 24mg | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/feed/ 3
        Seed Crackers https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/ https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/#comments Tue, 12 Mar 2024 12:20:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74092 If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want…]]>

        If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want to try more gluten-free recipes, I highly recommend whipping up my protein-packed Seed and Nut Bread—an ideal pick for an easy breakfast or a quick midday snack. Or, try out my Buckwheat Millet Bread for a foolproof loaf that tastes as good by itself as it does when topped with your favorite jam.

        Person cracking seed crackers on a sheet pan.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        In my opinion, the best way to make healthy crackers is by using this tasty variety of seeds. These simple ingredients—many of which are also superfoods!—are delicious, nutritious, and usually available at the local grocery store.

        Ingredients for healthy crackers recipe in small bowls.
        • Chia seeds: Packed with fiber, protein, and antioxidants, chia seeds are a must-have ingredient in this recipe for crackers with seeds. Not only do they have a mild nuttiness that’s undeniably delicious, but they’re also helpful in supporting bone health and aiding weight loss.
        • Raw & Unsalted Sunflower seeds: One of the most classic types of seeds, sunflower seeds lend these homemade crackers a nuanced sweetness and delicate crunch—but that’s not all! Sunflower seeds also transform this basic recipe into “anti-inflammatory crackers,” as their high levels of vitamin E and other plant compounds help reduce inflammation and boost heart health. When selecting sunflower seeds for this recipe, look for all-natural, raw ones to ensure they don’t have any added salt.
        • Unsalted Pumpkin seeds: Pumpkin seeds are also a great source of healthy fats, magnesium, antioxidants, and fiber, which may have other beneficial effects, such as regulating blood sugars and getting a good night’s sleep. I recommend buying pumpkin seeds that don’t have any additional salt—in other words, look for raw pumpkin seeds when shopping for this recipe.
        • Sesame seeds: Crunchy and buttery, sesame seeds taste fantastic in this recipe’s seed mixture. However, they also boast a range of other health benefits. For example, their high levels of B vitamins, calcium, and protein contribute to good vascular, muscular, and nerve health.
        • Ground flaxseeds (aka Flax meal): Flaxseeds are among the greatest superfoods to eat when you want to boost your digestive health. In particular, they contain high levels of fiber and omega-3 fatty acids that help relieve constipation and promote digestive regularity. During my recipe research, I found variations of this recipe where others used whole flaxseeds, but I chose to use ground flaxseeds (AKA flax meal) because they’re easier to digest and help work as a binder—similar to how flour works in bread recipes. Other versions may also use psyllium husk as a binder, but I found this unnecessary, given my use of ground flax seeds.
        • Hemp seeds: The addition of hemp seeds gives these seed crackers earthy and nutty undertones. This tiny seed also contains essential nutrients and minerals, such as fatty acids and manganese, which help maintain healthy skin, joints, and bones through collagen production.
        • Kosher or sea salt: Salt helps with flavoring the crackers and helps them achieve more of a store-bought savory flavor, so do not skip it.
        • Olive oil: I used olive oil to give these crackers their rich, full-bodied taste and golden-brown exterior, but you could also use avocado oil if preferred.
        • Water: If you’ve seen other seeded crackers recipes, you might find that some ask you to use boiling water—particularly when making psyllium husk crackers. However, I’ve found that the temperature of your water doesn’t affect seed crackers that don’t use psyllium husk as a binder. Therefore, room-temperature water will work just as well as warm water when following my flaxseed cracker recipe.

        Variations with Optional Add-Ins

        One bite of these sunflower seed crackers, and you’ll want to whip up a batch every week. Once you get the hang of it, you can even put your own spin on this basic recipe, giving it nutty, herby, or even cheesy undertones. The following are just a few of my go-to additions:

        • Seasonings and herbs: If you want to give your crunchy seed crackers bright, garden-fresh notes, I highly recommend adding some of your favorite herbs, like dried rosemary or thyme. Or, if you want a more robustly flavored chip, seasonings like garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and paprika will lend your seed cracker recipe irresistibly savory flavors. You can even make an easy everything bagel crackers recipe by adding a pinch of everything bagel seasoning!
        • Nuts: Filling, protein-packed, and oh-so-delicious, nuts make a great addition to this seeded cracker recipe. Depending on your desired flavor profile, I recommend using finely chopped nuts such as walnuts, pecans, or pistachios. You can also use a few tablespoons of almond flour (or even Homemade Almond Flour!) to reduce your prep time while still getting that classic “nut and seed crackers” taste. No matter which nuts you use, just be sure to use less of another dry ingredient to ensure a consistent ratio of wet-to-dry additions.
        • Nutritional yeast: No one can resist the savory, rich taste of a cheesy cracker. Simply add a bit of nutritional yeast to your recipe to give it a cheesy—yet vegan-friendly!—flavor.

        How to Make Seed Crackers?

        If you’ve never tried making crackers at home, you’re in luck! It’s a cinch to make these healthy crackers, and my step-by-step instructions will ensure they always come out with that satisfying “crunch.”

        1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.), line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
        A collage of images showing how to make seed crackers.
        1. Mix the dry ingredients: Add the chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt to a large mixing bowl. Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        2. Add the wet ingredients: Pour the olive oil and water into the same bowl and stir to combine. Let the mixture sit for five minutes—but no more than 7-8 minutes—until it thickens slightly. Too much resting time will result in an overly thick cracker.
        3. Transfer to pan: Scoop the mixture onto the prepared baking tray and use an offset spatula or large spoon to spread it into a single, even layer. Alternatively, you can place another piece of parchment paper on top of the mixture and spread it with your hands.
        Freshly baked crackers on a baking sheet from the top view.
        1. Bake: Bake the sesame seed crackers in the preheated oven for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn a light brown. Then, remove them from the oven and let the crackers cool before serving.

        How to Store & Freeze?

        One of the best parts about this gluten-free cracker recipe is its easy storage. With long-lasting crispiness and hearty flavor, these crackers will stay fresh whether you store them in the pantry or the freezer.

        • Store: These keto seeded crackers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze your crackers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make the seed chips more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

        Ways to Serve These Seeded Crackers

        Homemade crackers are a must-try for anyone who loves versatility in their snacks. While they’re absolutely wonderful by themselves (literally, they’re such a great stand-alone snack!), they also make a fantastic spread when paired with other tasty recipes.

        • Dips: Easy, filling, and nutritious, this sesame crackers recipe makes a great snack alongside classic Mediterranean dips. Hummus is a zesty, creamy classic that pairs great with the earthy undertones of this easy cracker. You can also serve your recipe with smokier, savory-sweet dips, like Baba Ganoush or Muhammara.
        • Serve it as a flatbread: My favorite way to enjoy this recipe for seed crackers is as a flatbread topped with avocado, sliced eggs, and pickled red onions. You can also spread this cracker with cream cheese and smoked salmon for a quick morning fix. Or, if you’re in the mood for a sweeter variation, try spreading your crackers with nut butters, like peanut butter or almond butter, for a satisfying yet healthy dessert.
        • Cheese: No one can resist a five-star Meat and Cheese Board brimming with crisp crackers, flavorful cheeses, and savory meats. These multi-seed crackers make the perfect addition to any charcuterie board, but if you’re short on time, they also make an unbelievably delicious pairing with your favorite cheese.
        • Topping for salads: This sesame seed cracker recipe is the ultimate choice when you want to add a light crunch to your salad. You can crumble these crackers on top of any bowl of greens, from a sweet and tangy Apple Kale Slaw to a creamy Cauliflower Broccoli Salad.
        • With soups: Healthier and more flavorful than oyster crackers, these pumpkin seed crackers are an excellent topping for soup when crushed into small, crunchy bits. I especially love using this cracker recipe with my smooth-yet-zingy Carrot and Ginger Soup and creamily spiced Sweet Potato Soup.
        Avocado and egg toast made using homemade crackers with seeds.

        Expert Tips

        These gluten-free seed crackers are a foolproof recipe for beginners and experienced chefs alike. Check out the below pro-level tips for the crunchiest, most flavorful crackers, regardless of your skill level.

        • Rest timing: Though resting is essential in making this recipe, don’t let the mixture rest for more than five minutes. Too much resting time will cause the chia seeds to swell, giving you a “doughier” mix that’s harder to spread. As a result, your seed crackers will be thicker and less crisp.
        • Spread it evenly: Even spreading is vital to ensuring your super seed crackers come out with a thin, crisp, and uniform texture. You can use a spatula, a spoon, or the back of a ramekin to spread your mixture effectively. Or, for easier clean-up, you can also place an additional sheet of parchment paper on top of the cracker mixture and use your hands (or a rolling pin) to press it into an even layer—as long as you remove this second piece of parchment paper before baking, of course.
        • Sheet pan size: I suggest using an 18 x 13-inch pan to make these chia crackers, as this large pan size will allow for a very thin layer of batter. However, if your baking sheets are smaller, I recommend baking your crackers in two batches to ensure the mixture doesn’t lay too thickly.
        • Parchment paper: Lining your sheet pan is critical to easy cracker removal post-baking. If you’re a baker, you can also use a silpat to line your pan due to its reusable, non-stick silicone base.
        • Cutting: I usually choose to “cut” this multi-seed crackers recipe by cracking it, giving each cracker a rustic, aesthetically pleasing shape. However, you can also use a pizza cutter or a sharp knife to cut individual crackers if you prefer a less hands-on splitting method. If you want more uniformly shaped crackers, remove them halfway through baking and score the sheet with a sharp knife. That way, your keto crackers will split into more uniform portions once fully cooked.

        FAQs

        Have more questions about this healthy cracker recipe? This handy FAQ has everything you need, from nutritional information to term definitions.

        What are seed crackers?

        Seed crackers are a crispy, thin “flatbread” type of cracker that uses seeds—sesame, pumpkin, sunflower, chia, and more—as its primary base. In addition to these seeds, this cracker often uses other natural ingredients, like salt, water, and herbs, to give it texture and taste. These low-carb crackers also tend to be gluten-free, paleo-, and keto-friendly, as they use flour-alternative binders, like psyllium husk or ground flaxseeds. Furthermore, they often have a greater nutritional content due to their seeds’ high levels of fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants.

        What’s the difference between seeded crackers and Norwegian flatbread crackers?

        Also known as Norwegian crispbread, Norwegian flatbread crackers are similar to seeded crackers due to their thin, crispy consistency and several core ingredients. However, the Norwegian variation—popular at specialty grocery stores like Trader Joe’s—is thinner and more delicate, and it also includes ingredients like oat flakes, rice bran, sugar, and rye flour. Meanwhile, seed crackers don’t traditionally include flour, and they boast a slightly thicker, seed-based body.

        Are flaxseed crackers healthy?

        Definitely—in moderation, of course! Unlike store-bought crackers, this healthy crackers recipe includes nutrient-rich superfoods, like chia and sesame seeds, which have higher levels of protein and fewer carbs than flour-based alternatives. 

        How many calories in a seeded cracker?

        There are approximately 204 calories in each of these seed crackers.

        If you try this Seed Crackers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Person cracking freshly made seeded crackers from the top view.
        Print

        Seed Crackers Recipe

        Once you try these superfood-packed homemade crispy seed crackers, you’ll never want to buy crackers from the store again. This easy cracker recipe is vegan, gluten-free, low-carb, nut-free, and keto-friendly. Serve it as a snack, in place of bread (for avocado toast), or as a crunchy topping for salads and soups.
        Course Healthy Snacks
        Cuisine American, American Vegan
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 55 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 204kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup chia seeds
        • ¼ cup sunflower seeds raw and unsalted
        • ¼ cup pumpkin seeds raw and unsalted
        • ¼ cup sesame seeds both white or black sesame seeds would work
        • ¼ cup ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal)
        • 3 tablespoons hemp seeds optional
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt or sea salt
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 cup water

        Instructions

        • Preheat oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • In a large bowl, combine chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt. Stir to combine.
        • Pour in olive oil and water. Mix to combine. Let it sit for 5 minutes or until it is slightly thickened (gel-like consistency.) Do not let it sit for more than 7-8 minutes, or otherwise, your crackers will be thicker.
        • Transfer the mixture to the prepared sheet and spread it evenly throughout the sheet pan using an offset spatula or a large spoon. Alternatively, you can place another parchment paper on top and spread it using your hands or a rolling pin.
        • Bake for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn light brown. Remove from the oven and let it cool before serving.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes a large sheet of crackers, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per cracker.
        • Source: This recipe has been adapted from my dear friend Alexandra of Occasionally Eggs’ wonderful cookbook. I made a few minor changes to her original recipe, but all credit goes to her.
        • Water: Some versions of this multi-seed crackers recipe use boiling water. I tested it using both boiling and room-temperature water and decided that room-temperature water works just fine.
        • Make it your own: After you make this recipe (as written) a few times, feel free to experiment with different flavors by adding other ingredients like poppy seeds, fennel seeds, garlic powder, onion powder, nutritional yeast, and more.
        • Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze leftovers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make them more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 204kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/feed/ 21
        How To Caramelize Onions https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-caramelize-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-caramelize-onions/#respond Wed, 31 Jan 2024 19:02:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73369 Whether you use them in a sandwich recipe or over a piece of steak, a simple and easy caramelized onions…]]>

        Whether you use them in a sandwich recipe or over a piece of steak, a simple and easy caramelized onions recipe is a great way to enhance any of your favorite meals. In this post, we show you everything you need to know.

        Slow cooked onions from the top view with a wooden spoon on the side.

        Ingredients

        You only need three simple ingredients to make this gourmet-level condiment, also known as jammy onions. Below, you’ll find expert ingredient tips, including the best onions for caramelizing, what oils to use, and how to season your recipe.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Onions: If you’re wondering, “What are the best onions to use for caramelized onions?” I have good news: Nearly any type of onion will work in this simple recipe—white onions, red onions, scallions, and more. Remember, though, that each kind of onion has a slightly different flavor profile, with some lending sweeter notes and others offering a somewhat more astringent taste.
          • Yellow onions: A caramelizing classic, yellow onions boast a delectable balance between sweet and bitter flavors, giving your caramelized onions a deeply sweet base that resolves in a mild brightness.
          • Sweet onions: If you want the most decadent caramelized onion taste, I highly recommend using sweeter varieties, such as Vidalia or Walla Walla onions. These onions’ higher sugar content gives the recipe a milder onion taste with a more luxurious, sweet browning.
          • Red onions: Though less common than yellow and sweet onions, caramelized red onions are an excellent choice for those who prefer a less sweet, more bitter, and more robust onion taste.
          • White onions: Pungent and sharp, caramelized white onions aren’t as sweet as more sugar-rich varieties. However, when you cook them low and slow, white onions still caramelize, giving you a deliciously bittersweet profile.
          • Shallots: Shallots are a must for those who want their caramelized onions recipe to have a balance of sweet, bright, and mildly bitter flavors.
          • A mixture: Want to give your recipe a broader, more level flavor profile? You can even use a mix of different onions to fill out your dish—a convenient tip for those who don’t have enough onions of a single type on hand.
        • Oil: You can use olive oil (or any other vegetable oil) or unsalted butter when making caramelized onions. Or, if you want to round out your dish with a more mellow richness, you can use a combination of the two. Whatever oil you choose, remember that a little goes a long way. For instance, you only need two tablespoons of olive oil to caramelize a pound of onions.
        • Kosher salt

        Optional Add-Ins

        You only need three basic ingredients to make this recipe. However, you can easily take this recipe to the next level by making recipe-attuned variations, from a stock-based deglazing liquid to a herby, caramelized side.

        • Deglaze liquid: Though not necessary to make jammy onions, deglazing your pan is an easy way to take care of two birds with one stone. Deglazing adds an extra layer of flavor to your recipe and helps loosen the browned bits from the bottom of your cooking pan. To deglaze onions, simply add a splash of liquid to the skillet, such as water, chicken stock, veggie stock, white wine, or balsamic vinegar.
        • Seasonings and herbs: This basic caramelization method only uses salt to bring out the onions’ naturally tender, full-bodied taste. However, once your onions are thoroughly browned, you can add more complex flavors with a dash of black pepper and/or fresh herbs, such as thyme. Just be sure to choose seasonings that match the dish you’re making.

        How to Make Caramelized Onions

        While you may know how to soften onions in a snap, this step-by-step guide will show you how to properly caramelize onions, transforming this everyday veggie into an irresistibly rich, savory-sweet condiment.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare caramelized onions.
        1. Trim and peel the onions: Trim off the ends of your onions, then peel off their outer layers. Slice each onion in half, cutting through their roots and top ends. Then—one at a time—place the onion halves with their flat, newly cut sides face down on the cutting board. Thinly slice each half.
        2. Heat the olive oil: Add the olive oil to a large skillet (a cast-iron skillet or a stainless steel pan would work). Then, heat the oil over medium heat.
        3. Saute the onions: Transfer the onion slices to the hot oil and saute them for two minutes, stirring constantly.
        4. Cook uncovered: After sauteeing the onions, lower the heat and cook them uncovered for one hour. Try not to stir the onions too frequently during the first 25-30 minutes, as too much movement will prevent them from browning. However, you should still watch them and stir when necessary to avoid burnt caramelized onions.
        A collage of images showing how to brown onions in a skillet.
        1. Increase stirring frequency: After 25-30 minutes, you may have to stir your onions more frequently to keep them from burning. I usually use a wooden spoon to scrape the brown bits at the bottom of the pan.
        2. Add salt: When the onions turn soft and caramelized, add the salt and mix to distribute it among the slices evenly.
        3. Serve: When finished caramelizing the onions, remove them from the heat and serve them as an accompaniment to your favorite dish.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        You won’t want to sacrifice a single bite after making this caramelized onion recipe. With these pro storage tips, you can store this dish for days, using it to bring sophisticated flavor to all your favorite meals.

        • Store: After browning the onions, let them reach room temperature. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to one week.
        • Freeze: To freeze caramelized onions, begin by letting them come down to room temperature. Then, you have two options:
          • For bulk storage, you can transfer your onions to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and lay your onions flat before freezing. 
          • For portioned storage, you can transfer your caramelized onions into ice cube trays for perfectly portioned servings later on—a great way to kick off weeknight recipes when you’re in a pinch.
        • Thaw: Frozen caramelized onions can be thawed in the fridge overnight. Or, if you are using smaller amounts, you can thaw it on the counter an hour before using it in your recipe.

        Caramelized Onions Uses

        After caramelizing onions on the stove, I guarantee you’ll want to eat them straight out of the pan. However, this deliciously versatile recipe makes an excellent condiment for dozens of other dishes, whether you want to caramelize onions for pizza or add them to a fan-favorite dip.

        A bowl of jammy onions from the top view.
        • As a topping: Looking to make the ultimate meaty menu? You can easily enhance any cookout meal by using your sweet caramelized onions for brats or burgers—a combination that expertly balances the meats’ smoky, savory flavor. I especially love topping my Avocado Bacon Burger with this deluxe recipe to bring out its fresh, creamy layers. Not in the mood for a burger? You can also use caramelized onions to top pizza and pasta recipes, such as Butter Garlic Pasta, to add a luxurious finish that will have you licking your plate clean.
        • Sandwiches and wraps: Caramelized Vidalia onions make the perfect addition to any protein-packed sandwich, bringing out the complex flavors of everything from hearty roast beef to a tender prime rib sandwich. Or, you can add caramelized onions to a Chicken Pita Wrap or Spinach Quesadilla if you’re in the mood for a more herby, cheesy, or diverse cuisine.
        • Salads: Flavorful, tender, and rich, these golden brown onions can turn any salad into a fancy main course. My Butter Lettuce Salad has a tangy, crisp mix of fresh veggies that will add a gorgeous pop of color to any table. Or, you can add your onions to a Kale Avocado Salad for a zesty yet filling side you won’t be able to resist.
        • Quiches and tarts: With a buttery base and a tangy finish, creamy dishes like my Goat Cheese Quiche and Asparagus Tart taste out of this world when you add a helping of caramelized onions. 
        • With meat: When it comes to using caramelized onions, no one can resist a classic. The complexly sweet, tender notes of caramelized onions enhance the savory richness of countless beef dishes, including steak, Reverse-Sear Beef Tenderloin, Reverse-Sear Prime Rib, and more. Serve your meaty main alongside a serving of Au Jus, Horseradish Sauce, or Yogurt Horseradish Sauce, and your guests will think they’re eating at an expensive steak house.
        • Dips and spreads: If you’re like me, you love transforming every day dips into gourmet recipes. These jammy onions add a tasty layer of bold sweetness to creamy staples (such as Yogurt French Onion Dip) and herby Mediterranean classics, like Hummus.
        • Omelet and egg dishes: Take your brunch game to the next level by topping your favorite egg dishes with a batch of garlicky caramelized onions. I especially love using this savory-sweet condiment on cheesy bakes, like my 20-minute Feta and Spinach Frittata and veggie-packed Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
        • Use it as a base for soups and stews: Chances are when you think of “caramelized onions,” your brain automatically goes to “French Onion Soup.” Though an undeniably iconic pairing, I love using caramelized onions in other soup and stew bases, providing any basic dish an exquisitely deep and rich undertones.

        Tips For Caramelizing Onions

        The easiest way to cook caramelized onions is by using these chef-approved tips. Below, I share my top pointers on onion caramelization, from must-have tools to heat modulation.

        • Skillet: A large, heavy bottom skillet—cast iron or stainless steel—is ideal when cooking caramelized onions, as they best retain heat throughout the cooking process. A Dutch oven also works well due to its thick walls and large base. Though you could use nonstick pans in this recipe, remember that they may not retain heat quite as well, and you still have to watch its bottom to avoid scorching—especially as you near the end of your cooking time.
        • Slice onions evenly: As with any cooked vegetable, you must slice your onions into an even thickness to ensure even cooking. This equal slicing will ensure no pieces come out undercooked or burnt after cooking.
        • Adjust the heat: As the onions cook and reduce, you may have to adjust the heat to avoid burning. Even though caramelization takes a long time, you must keep an eye on your onions so that you can adjust the heat accordingly.
        • Stir occasionally but not constantly: During the first 25-30 minutes of cooking, try not to stir your onions too much, as too much stirring will prevent proper browning. However, this doesn’t mean you can leave your onions alone. Keep watch over them throughout the cooking process, as you’ll still have to stir the slices occasionally to prevent burning—likely with increasing frequency after the 25-minute mark.
        • Deglaze the pan: If you want to, you can add a splash of liquid to your skillet when the onions’ jammy brown bits (also known as the “fond”) begin sticking to the bottom of the pan. Depending on your dish, consider using a liquid with a complementary flavor profile, adding a splash of water, chicken or veggie stock, white wine, or balsamic vinegar to the pan.
        • Don’t rush it: Though you may see online tips for cutting your cooking time in half, there’s no real way to cook caramelized onions quickly. Shortcuts often taint the onions’ flavors or get in the way of the caramelization process—especially when adding quickening agents to the pan. Therefore, you must be patient and let your onions cook for the full 45-60 minutes for best results.
        • Watch for the color: The best way to know when onions are caramelized is by watching their texture and color. The color of the perfect caramelized onions is a deep brown or a rich golden brown with a soft and jammy texture.
        • Adding baking soda: Using this foolproof technique for making caramelized onions, you don’t need to add any baking soda to your slices. Instead, the low-and-slow method will naturally release the onions’ sugars over time. However, America’s Test Kitchen’s faster caramelized onions use baking soda to chemically speed up the browning process, thereby caramelizing onions quickly. Though a scientifically sound addition, remember that making caramelized onions with baking soda will negatively affect their texture and taste, giving them a mushy consistency and a harsh bitterness.

        FAQs

        Using this easy way to caramelize onions, you can elevate any dish into a five-star meal. This handy FAQ will ensure anyone—whether you’re a home cook or a professional chef—can whip up this condiment with ease.

        What are caramelized onions?

        Caramelized onions—sometimes referred to as “stewed onions” or “jammy onions”—are a type of prepared onions that uses slow-cooking methods to bring out the onions’ natural sugars, resulting in a savory-sweet caramelized exterior, rich brown color, and a tender texture. Cooking them low and slow triggers the Maillard reaction, which brings out their natural sugars and provides them with a rich browned exterior.

        Caramelized vs. sauteed onions: What is the difference?

        The main difference between caramelized and sauteed onions lies in their cooking process. Caramelized onions come from a low and slow cooking technique, often taking 45-60 minutes over low heat to bring out their natural sweetness and get a soft, almost jam-like consistency. Meanwhile, sauteed onions take less time to cook over a higher heat, and they come out with a mellowed onion flavor, translucent color, and tender texture.

        How to cut onions for caramelizing?

        You can cut your onions any way you want for this recipe, whether you prefer caramelized diced onions, ringed onions, onion strings, or beyond. However, professional chefs usually cut their onions into julienned half-moons. To make this cut, trim off the onions’ root ends, then cut them in half. After removing the outer skin, place the onion halves flat on the cutting board and cut them into thin half-moons.

        What heat to caramelize onions?

        When you’re slow-cooking onions, you’ll need to modulate your heat throughout the process. For best results, I recommend starting with medium-high heat until the onions saute (about two minutes). Then, reduce your burner to low heat and cook until caramelized.

        Should I cook caramelized onions covered or uncovered?

        Though I don’t cover the onions in my caramelization recipe, if desired, you may start the cooking process by covering your onions. Then, once the initial sauteeing is complete, uncover them for the remaining cooking time.

        How long does it take to caramelize onions?

        The time it takes to caramelize onions depends on how much onion you wish to prepare. In general, it will take between 45 minutes and one hour to caramelize one pound of onion.

        What do caramelized onions look like?

        Caramelized onions should develop a rich brown color, ranging from golden to deep brown. They also have a soft, jam-like texture, though the onion slices should maintain their basic shape.

        How long do caramelized onions last?

        When you store your caramelized onions in an airtight container, they can last for up to one week in the fridge.

        Can you freeze caramelized onions?

        Absolutely! To freeze your onions, let them come to room temperature, then transfer them to a freezer-safe bag. Remove as much air as possible, ensuring the onions lay flat, then store them in the freezer until ready to use.

        Do you add sugar to caramelized onions?

        Though technically possible, I don’t recommend making caramelized onions with sugar. The natural sugars in the onions are enough to develop a sweet flavor profile, and adding more sugar may result in an overly sweet, almost syrupy taste.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this How to Caramelize Onions recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Caramelized onions in a cast iron skillet.
        Print

        How To Caramelize Onions

        Learning how to caramelize onions is an essential skill for any cook. Follow our foolproof method for perfectly caramelized onions to add to soups, stews, dips, sauces, salads, and more!
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 50 minutes
        Total Time 55 minutes
        Servings 1 cup
        Calories 424kcal

        Ingredients

        • 4 yellow onions about 1 lbs.
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil or unsalted butter
        • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt or more to taste

        Instructions

        • Trim off the ends of the onion, then peel off the outer layer. Cut the onion in half through the root and top ends. Place the flat side of the onion on a cutting board and thinly slice all halves.
        • Heat olive oil in a large skillet (a large cast iron skillet or stainless steel pan would both work) over medium heat.
        • Once the olive oil is hot, add all the onion slices and saute for 2 minutes, stirring constantly.
        • Lower the heat to low and cook, uncovered, for 1 hour. The important thing here is to leave them alone to brown (especially in the first 25 minutes), but keep a close eye on them and stir as needed. If you stir them too often, they won’t brown. Alas, if you don’t stir them, they will burn.
        • After the first 25 minutes, as the onion slices start to brown, you can stir more frequently and even use a wooden spatula to scrape the brown bits at the bottom of the pan.
        • Optionally, if needed, you can deglaze using a few tablespoons of water.
        • Once caramelized and soft, add the salt and stir to thoroughly distribute.
        • Remove the now-caramelized onions from the heat. Serve as an accompaniment to your favorite dish!

        Notes

        • Yields: We used one pound of raw onions (about 4 cups of sliced onions), which yielded approximately a cup of caramelized onions.
        • Type of Onion to use: We used yellow onions, but you can make this recipe with sweet onions (such as Vidalia or Walla Walla), red onions, white onions, and even shallots. Alternatively, you can use a combination of them.
        • Deglazing liquid: Though optional, deglazing onions can be done using water, stock, or a splash of balsamic vinegar. I typically choose a liquid that complements the recipe for which I’m using these onions. Remember, only a small amount is needed, as it goes a long way.
        • Store: Let browned onions reach room temperature. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to a week.
        • Freeze: To freeze, begin by letting them come down to room temperature. Then, you have two options: 
          • For bulk storage, you can transfer them to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and lay your onions flat before freezing. 
          • For portioned storage, you can portion them out using ice cube trays to kick off any recipe when you’re in a pinch.
        • Thaw: Frozen onions can be thawed in the fridge overnight. Or, if you are using smaller amounts, you can thaw it on the counter an hour before using it in your recipe.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 424kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 21g | Sodium: 1181mg | Potassium: 643mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 9IU | Vitamin C: 33mg | Calcium: 102mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-caramelize-onions/feed/ 0
        Air Fryer Chestnuts https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/#comments Wed, 03 Jan 2024 21:01:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73027 If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there…]]>

        If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there are countless other ways to use this delectable recipe—a handy way to make the most of the chestnut season. Air fryer roasted chestnuts make an excellent base for my silky Chestnut Cream Soup, and they fit flawlessly into any Christmas dinner when you prepare my five-star Chestnut Dressing. Or, try whipping up my Chestnut Puree Recipe for an irresistibly creamy dish perfect for pastries, parfaits, and so much more.

        Air fryer roasted chestnuts on a kitchen cloth.

        Ingredients

        When it comes to recipes with simple ingredients, air fried chestnuts are hands-down the easiest for your grocery list. All you need to make this toasty dish is one ingredient: chestnuts!

        However, as with all one-ingredient recipes, the key to getting the best results is to begin with high-quality chestnuts. Here are just a few things to keep in mind when selecting your nuts:

        Fresh chesnuts from the top view.
        • Type of chestnuts: For this recipe, I highly recommend using Italian chestnuts (also known as European chestnuts) or American chestnuts, as they peel easily and are altogether easier to work with. Chinese chestnuts—the most popular variety in Asia—also taste good, but I find that they are harder to peel, so I don’t suggest using them in this recipe.
        • Choose equally sized chestnuts: If possible, try to hand-pick chestnuts of an equal size, as they’ll roast the most evenly in the air fryer.
        • Ensure your chestnuts are of high quality: When looking for chestnuts, try to find ones that are smooth, plump, and shiny—especially those without blemishes or mold. I also encourage you to handle the chestnuts in your hand to ensure the skin isn’t dry.
        • Where to buy: You should be able to find fresh chestnuts in most U.S. grocery stores. However, they also crop up in farmer’s markets during fall and winter, should you prefer a locally grown alternative.
        • Avoid chestnut mix-ups: Though similar in name, be careful not to accidentally purchase horse chestnuts (which are toxic) or water chestnuts. These two are not the same as regular chestnuts and will drastically change the taste and texture of your recipe.

        How to Prepare Chestnuts for Cooking in the Air Fryer?

        Proper preparation is a must when getting ready to air fry chestnuts. These three steps will ensure your nuts are clean, tasty, and easily peelable when they come out of the air fryer.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare chestnuts for air air frying.
        1. Rinse the chestnuts: Add the raw chestnuts to a colander and rinse them under cold running water. Drain them when thoroughly rinsed.
        2. Score: Lay the flat side of a chestnut on a cutting board, ensuring the rounded side (AKA the belly side) faces up. Hold the chestnut firmly with one hand and use the other to cut horizontally across the rounded face with a sharp paring knife or chestnut knife. Then, rotate the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an “X” on its top. Repeat the scoring process for the remaining chestnuts, trying not to score their inner skin.
        3. Soak chestnuts: Transfer the cut chestnuts to a bowl, cover them with cold tap water, and let them rest for 30-60 minutes.

        How to Roast Chestnuts in an Air Fryer?

        Air frying chestnuts is a great way to enjoy nutty, easy-to-peel treats in no time. With this easy cooking method, your chestnuts will be on the table in less than 20 minutes.

        1. Prepare your air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
        A collage of images showing how to cook chestnuts in air fryer.
        1. Dry the chestnuts: Drain the soaked chestnuts, transfer them to a clean kitchen towel, and dry them as much as possible. Alternatively, you may line a baking sheet with paper towels and pat them dry.
        2. Fill the air fryer basket: Arrange the scored chestnuts in your air fryer basket so that their cut sides face up. Be careful not to overcrowd the basket, as your nuts should fit comfortably in a single layer. If necessary, you may air fry your chestnuts in two batches to ensure proper air circulation.
        3. Cook the chestnuts: Roast the chestnuts in the air fryer for 17 minutes, shaking the basket once or twice during their cooking time.
        4. Steam the cooked chestnuts: Once roasted, transfer the (very hot!) chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Draw the edges of the cloth toward their center, turn the towel into a small pouch, and let the chestnuts steam for about five minutes. For an alternate steaming method, place your air-fried chestnuts in a paper bag and roll down the top so the steam gets trapped inside. Again, let the nuts steam for five minutes or for up to 30 minutes.
        Images showing how to peel air fried chestnuts.
        1. Peel: After the chestnuts steam, grasp the pouch in your hand and gently squeeze it to loosen the chestnut shells. Then, carefully peel off the outer shell of the nuts while they’re still hot by lightly pulling back on their scored “X.” Be sure you’re removing the papery skin to expose the yellow flesh inside. If you can’t remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, you may use a small sharp knife to assist you, being careful not to pierce the yellow inner nut.
        2. Serve: Enjoy your air fryer roasted chestnuts while they’re still warm.

        How to Store Air Fryer Roasted Chestnuts?

        After roasting chestnuts in an air fryer, the last thing you want to do is let a single one go to waste. With these easy tips, you can store this delectable recipe to snack on throughout the week or for long-lasting meal prep.

        • Store: When ready for storage, let your air roasted chestnuts reach room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.
        • Freeze: To freeze your peeled air fryer chestnuts, transfer them to a freezer bag and remove as much air as possible. Then, tightly seal the bag and freeze your chestnuts for up to three months.
        • Thaw: When ready to thaw, remove your chestnuts from the freezer and defrost them in the fridge overnight.

        Expert Tips

        The best way to cook chestnuts in an air fryer is by preheating it to 350°F (175°C), scoring each chestnut, and roasting them for 17 minutes or until the shells open and the insides are tender.  However, I learned a few lessons during my recipe testing and would like to share them with you:

        • Scoring: Because chestnuts can be slippery, it’s important to be safe when scoring them, which is essential for easy peeling later on. Therefore, I recommend placing your chestnuts on a cutting board with their flat sides facing down and rounded sides facing up. Then, firmly secure the chestnut with one hand and use a sharp, serrated, or chestnut knife to score the rounded edge in the shape of an “X.”
        • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for hours on end, I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
        • Air fryer temperature: When making this recipe, you may consider speeding up the roasting process by increasing your air fryer temperature. However, we found that cooking chestnuts in the air fryer at higher temperatures (like 400 degrees F. and 375 degrees F.) led to a fully cooked exterior and uncooked interior. Therefore, we recommend keeping your cooking temperature low—ideally 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes—to ensure the whole chestnut roasts at an even rate.
        • Don’t overcrowd: As with all air fryer recipes, you mustn’t crowd your air fryer basket while cooking, as proper air circulation is essential for thoroughly roasting your chestnuts. We were able to fit a pound of chestnuts into our basket, though this amount may change depending on the size of your air fryer and individual chestnuts. No matter how many chestnuts you can fit into your basket, just be sure to arrange them so that their scored “X” faces up.
        • Look for visual cues: If you’re not sure whether you’ve fully roasted your chestnuts by the end of their cooking time, I recommend looking for the following visual cues: When ready to steam and peel, your chestnuts’ scored edges should begin opening up, and their exteriors should lightly brown. However, because every air fryer behaves differently, I suggest testing a chestnut at the 15-minute mark to see whether it’s ready to serve or needs more roasting time.
        • Peel while still warm: If you want a chestnut with a smooth, nutty taste, you must remove its fuzzy skin before serving. Therefore, I suggest using either of my five-minute steaming methods (either by a wrapped towel or paper bag) to loosen the nuts’ outer and inner skins before peeling, making the process much easier.
        • Buy more than you need: It’s inevitable when buying chestnuts that some of them will be “bad,” whether they’re moldy, blemished, or otherwise spoiled—with special consideration to their time of harvesting. Therefore, I highly advise purchasing more chestnuts than you need to eliminate these undesirable picks and still end up with a whole serving.
        • A word on easy peeling: My step-by-step instructions are a foolproof way to ensure easy peeling and excellent taste for high-quality chestnuts. However—no matter how closely you follow the steps—it won’t be possible to get good results if you’re using chestnuts of poor quality. Plus, keep in mind that the age and size of the chestnuts matter, so I recommend getting the most 
        Peeled chestnuts in a bowl from the top view.

        How to Season?

        Making roasted chestnuts in the air fryer gives you the freedom to play around with all your favorite flavorings. With these mouthwatering seasoning ideas, you can transform your chestnuts into everything from a decadent dessert to a savory snack.

        • Honey and vanilla: If you want your air fryer chestnuts to have an irresistibly dessert-like finish, mix two tablespoons of honey with a teaspoon of vanilla. Once thoroughly combined, drizzle the honey mixture over your cooked chestnuts for a great holiday season treat.
        • Melted butter and maple syrup: Richly sweet and easy to customize, try drizzling your chestnuts with a mixture of melted butter and maple syrup. You can even sprinkle ground cinnamon over your nuts if desired for a warmer, woody flavor.
        • Balsamic glaze with a sprinkle of sea salt: Coating your air-roasted chestnuts with a rich balsamic reduction is an easy way to give your recipe complexly sweet notes—a flavor profile that tastes straight out of Europe. Finish this tasty variation with a sprinkle of sea salt, and every bite will explode with flavor.
        • Asian style: To give your air fried chestnuts a zingy, Asian-inspired flavor, coat them with a blend of soy sauce, a hint of sesame oil, and a sprinkle of sesame seeds. This umami-packed recipe transforms sweet chestnuts into a savory treat perfect for all-day snacking.

        FAQs

        Want to know more about how to roast chestnuts in an air fryer? This beginner-friendly guide will answer any remaining questions, from ideal cooking times to expert peeling suggestions.

        How long to cook chestnuts in an air fryer?

        To ensure your chestnuts develop warm, tender insides without burning their exterior, I recommend cooking them at 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes and shaking the basket 1-2 times during the process.

        Can you eat the brown skin on chestnuts?

        Yes, chestnuts’ brown skin is technically edible. However, it has a fuzzy texture and bitter taste that may interfere with the overall flavor of your roasted chestnuts. Therefore, I recommend removing them before eating.

        How to know if my chestnuts are fully cooked?

        When checking your chestnuts for doneness, look for a few easy visual cues: The outside of your nuts should turn lightly brown, their scored edges should begin opening up, and their insides should be warm and soft by the time they’re ready to remove from the air fryer.

        If you try this Air Fryer Chestnuts recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Air fried chestnuts from the top view.
        Print

        Air Fryer Chestnuts Recipe

        This air fryer roasted chestnuts recipe is a quicker alternative to roasting chestnuts in the oven. With this easy recipe, you can make air fryer roasted chestnuts half the time, serve it as a snack, or use it in your favorite chestnut recipes.
        Course Snack
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 17 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 222kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb Chestnuts preferably Italian (or European)
        • 3 cups Water

        Instructions

        • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
        • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board, making sure that the rounded side (aka the belly side) is facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife (or a chestnut knife, if you have one.) Then, turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
        • Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover it with cold tap water and let them sit for 30 minutes to an hour.
        • Preheat your air fryer to 350 °F.
        • Drain chestnuts and transfer them onto a clean kitchen towel. Dry them off as much as you can.
        • Place them in the air fryer basket, making sure that the cut side is facing up. Do not overcrowd the basket. If needed, you can bake it in two batches.
        • Air fry them for 17 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through the air-roasting process.
        • Once the air frying is completed, transfer the now-very hot chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5 minutes or so. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag to do this. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag to trap the steam inside, and let it steam for 5 minutes.
        • Holding the pouch in your hand, give it a gentle squeeze to loosen the shells. Then, carefully remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X,” peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.
        • Enjoy while still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes a little less than a pound of chestnuts. If you are serving it as a snack, you would likely end up with 7-8 chestnuts (depending on their size) per person if you are serving it to 4 people. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Air frying temperature: Don’t be tempted to increase the temperature of the air fryer to roast them faster. I have tried air frying chestnuts in higher temps to shorten the cooking time, but ended up with chestnuts that were burned on the outside and raw on the inside.
        • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for a long time (8 hours or so), I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
        • Chestnuts: There is a direct correlation between the age, size, and origin of the chestnuts and the quality of the end result. Over the years of cooking chestnuts, I learned that chestnuts from Europe and the US tend to peel easier than chestnuts from China. Needless to say, it is best to buy the freshest chestnuts you can get your hands on for the best results.
        • Store: Bring cooked chestnuts to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/feed/ 10
        Bread Dipping Oil https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/#comments Sun, 31 Dec 2023 05:01:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25983 So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t…]]>

        So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t wait for the olive oil dipping sauce and crusty bread to be placed on your table. It’s restaurant-style at its best (I’m looking at you, Carrabba’s Italian Grill, Bertucci’s, California Pizza Kitchen, Olive Garden, Maggino’s, and Macaroni Grill!) That is this recipe!

        With the right mix of bread dipping seasoning and the best olive oil you can find, you can make restaurant-style food in your home kitchen. It serves as the perfect appetizer for those get-togethers with family and friends. Who knew bread and olive oil could taste so good?!

        Person holding bread dipped in oil.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        You need a handful of basic ingredients to make this olive oil dip for bread. The good news is that the recipe itself is so forgiving that if you are missing an ingredient or two, you can easily substitute it with another ingredient. Below is what you’ll need, including the best oil for bread dipping:

        Olive oil dipping spices and herbs from the top view.
        • Fresh or Dried Herbs: You will need fresh or dried basil, oregano, thyme, and rosemary to make this olive oil dip. If you decide to use dried herbs, I recommend using half the amount as they tend to be stronger. You can find the correct measurements in the recipe card below.
        • Seasoning and Spices: I know it may seem a bit basic, but the salt and pepper you use make all the difference. If you can, avoid table salt and pre-ground black pepper. Use flaky sea salt or kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper for the best flavor. However, if you do not mind your olive oil bread dip being a little bit spicy, you can also add a pinch of red pepper flakes (or red chili flakes) for some heat.
        • Olive Oil: There are so many olive oils on supermarket shelves these days, and it’s hard to know which one is the best olive oil for dipping bread. A general rule of thumb is to purchase cold-pressed extra virgin olive oil from one supplier or country. These are the fruitiest and most flavorful. Avoid olive oil blends or refined versions. 
        • Garlic: Garlic is a big flavor provider and enhancer in this olive dipping oil recipe. When mixed with spices (or fresh herbs), it infuses oil with additional Mediterranean flavors. However, it is also such a delicate ingredient. Use this list as a guide depending on how strong you want the garlic flavor when whipping up your own garlic bread cheese dip.
          • Minced Fresh Garlic cloves: Using fresh minced garlic will provide a strong garlic flavor. I recommend using this version right before you are going to serve. 
          • Oven Roasted Garlic – Roasted garlic olive oil dip is my absolute favorite! When you roast garlic, it brings out a natural, caramel sweetness that is simply divine. Once the garlic cloves are roasted, you should be able to easily mash them with a fork and mix them in. Use the moment you are going to serve. 
          • Garlic Powder – A good substitute if you want to make olive oil dip ahead. Use 1 teaspoon of garlic powder to replace the fresh.
        • Cheese: Grated Parmesan cheese is a classic ingredient in any restaurant-style Italian dipping oil, but it is an optional ingredient here. You can omit using it if you want to make it vegan or dairy-free. If you do not have Parmesan cheese, you can also use grated Pecorino Romano, cubed feta, or those small mozzarella balls for fresh, cheesy flavor.
        • Acid: Acid gives it a fresh flavor and a nice tang and balances the richness of the olive oil, so don’t skip it! My favorite is freshly squeezed lemon juice. But you can make an olive oil and balsamic vinegar bread dip with a splash of balsamic vinegar as well. If you decide to go with balsamic vinegar, simply use a tablespoon of balsamic in place of freshly squeezed lemon juice.

        Optional Ingredients and Substitutions:

        • Olives: While it is not a traditional ingredient, a handful of chopped green or black (such as Kalamata) olives would take this Italian olive oil bread dip up a notch, especially if you are a fan of olives.
        • Italian Seasoning: For those times I am short on time, I keep a jar of homemade Italian seasoning in my pantry so that I can make this in minutes. Below is my go-to Italian seasoning recipe:
          • 1 tablespoon dried basil
          • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
          • ½ tablespoon dried rosemary
          • ½ tablespoon dried thyme
          • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
          • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • Shallots: Thinly sliced shallots would be a great substitute for garlic if preferred.
        • Other spices: While the combination of basil, oregano, rosemary, and thyme is often used in Italian restaurants, you can also use other olive oil dipping spices such as paprika, dried dill, dried sage, parsley, and even fennel seeds whenever you want to switch it up.

        How to Make Olive Oil Bread Dip?

        This olive oil dipping sauce for bread comes together quickly and easily. Below are the steps:

        A woman is pouring olive oil to make Italian Bread Dipping oil
        1. Mix the herbs and spices: To make it, mix together dried or fresh rosemary, basil, oregano, thyme, and red pepper flakes (if using) in a shallow bowl. 
        2. Add the olive oil: Pour in the olive oil and lemon juice (or balsamic vinegar). Add in the garlic and parmesan cheese.
        3. Add the spices: Season lightly with salt and pepper. Stir it well to make sure that everything is fully mixed.
        4. Rest (Optional): If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour for the flavors to meld together nicely. 
        5. Serve: Place the bowl of seasoned oil on a large plate with sliced bread around it. Serve!

        What Kind of Bread Do You Dip in Olive Oil Bread Dip?

        When it comes to choosing the best bread for dipping in oil, you have so many options. While any fresh bread would work, below are a few suggestions:

        Garlic bread dipping sauce in a bowl with bread on the side.
        • Italian bread: The classic Italian breads like fresh focaccia and ciabatta would be wonderful to dip into this homemade bread dipping oil.
        • French Bread: With its crispy crust and chewy interior, French baguette is a wonderful option. It also has a long and thin shape, which makes it ideal to slice and dip. Alternatively, if you prefer a soft bread for dipping, you can serve it with storebought or homemade brioche
        • Sourdough Bread: The tangy flavors of sourdough pair beautifully with this garlic bread dip. Plus, its dense texture holds the oil well.
        • Homemade bread: If you do have the time, I highly recommend making my No Knead Bread or Rustic Olive Bread (my personal favorite bread to serve it with.) They are both wonderfully crusty with a hearty texture and robust flavor.
        • Garlic Bread: The rich and savory flavor of garlic bread compliments the taste of herb and oil bread dip. If you need a good recipe, try my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
        • Pita Bread: Widely used in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine, pita’s soft and slightly chewy texture is a good choice for dipping.

        How To Make Ahead and Store This Dipping Oil?

        While making this Italian dipping sauce takes no more than 5 minutes, with a few adjustments, you can make it ahead and store it for serving later. Here is how I do it: 

        • Make Ahead: If you prefer to make this bread dipping oil a few days ahead, I recommend using dried herbs and spices instead of fresh herbs. Also, it is best to use garlic powder instead of fresh garlic, as when raw garlic sits in oil for an extended period of time, food-borne illness can occur. To make ahead, mix all the ingredients (except cheese) in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and store it at room temperature. Finally, I would add the parmesan cheese right before serving.
        • Storage: If you are making this olive oil dipping recipe with fresh herbs and fresh garlic, it is best to consume it on the day it is made or store it in an airtight container for an additional day or so. However, if you are using dried herbs and garlic powder, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

        Expert Tips:

        There is a reason why this recipe went viral on social media. It is not only super easy to make but also ready in minutes. 

        With that being said, during our recipe testing, we learned a few lessons that I’d like to share so that you can have the best olive oil garlic dip for bread on your first try:

        • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.
        • Serve at room temperature: Olive oil tends to become cloudy and thicken when refrigerated. Therefore to maintain its ideal, fluid consistency and make it easier (and more pleasant) to dip, I recommend serving this bread oil dip at room temperature. 
        • Warm the bread: If you have the time, serve your dipping oil with warm bread as they do in fancy Italian restaurants.
        • Serving children: This easy bread dip is perfect to serve to family and friends, especially during the holiday season. To adjust the recipe for children, omit the red pepper flakes and use less of the overpowering dried herbs like rosemary and thyme. 
        • Dip it “well”: If you let the bread sit in the oil for a good minute or so, it absorbs even more of its delicious flavor.
        • Serving suggestions: While you can serve this bread and olive oil appetizer by themselves, for a special occasion, you can also make it a part of your meat and cheese platter. And if you want to amp up your weeknight dinner, try drizzling it on fish before roasting it in the oven.
        • Salad Dressing: I am pretty sure that you won’t have leftovers, but if you do, this olive oil bread dip makes a great salad dressing.
        Person drizzling olive oil spread for bread into a jar.

        FAQs

        What kind of oil do you dip bread in?

        The most commonly used and recommended oil for bread dipping is extra virgin olive oil (EVOO). A good olive oil for bread dipping is one that uses olives from a single origin. EVOO is preferred for its fruity and peppery flavors that pair well with various types of bread. However, while it is not common, you can also use commercially sold infused olive oils, avocado oil, or walnut oil to make this dipping oil for bread.

        How to season olive oil for dipping bread?

        Seasoning olive oil for dipping bread involves infusing it with a variety of flavors. In most cases, olive oil is infused with a combination of dried or fresh herbs (such as thyme, basil, rosemary, and oregano), spices and seasonings (like red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper) and acid (like lemon juice, red wine or balsamic vinegar.)

        How long does bread dipping oil last?

        If you make a version of this recipe using dried herbs and seasonings, you can store it for a long time, potentially up to a month. However, if you use fresh ingredients such as fresh garlic and Parmesan cheese, it should be used within 5 days.

        Why dip bread in olive oil?

        Dipping bread in olive oil is a practice enjoyed in Mediterranean cultures, often a part of the dining experience, reflecting the region’s culinary heritage where olive oil is harvested and produced locally. Additionally, olive oil adds a rich flavor to the bread. The fruity and peppery flavors of oil paired with bread create a delightful experience.

        If you try this bread dip recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Bread dipped in olive oil dipping sauce in a person's hand.
        Print

        Bread Dipping Oil Recipe

        Homemade Bread dipping oil just like they do in your favorite Italian restaurant! Made with extra virgin olive oil, dried spices (or fresh herbs), lemon juice, and parmesan cheese, this Italian-restaurant-style olive oil bread dip is guaranteed to impress.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Italian
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 329kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ tablespoon dried basil
        • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
        • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
        • ¼ teaspoon dried rosemary
        • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
        • 1 cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced or one teaspoon of garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon lemon juice or balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese shredded (optional)
        • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
        • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place dried basil, thyme, oregano, rosemary, and red pepper flakes in a bowl. Pour in the olive oil. Give it a mix.
        • Add in the garlic, lemon juice, and parmesan cheese. Stir to combine and serve with crusty bread on the side.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This bread dip oli recipe makes a cup of dipping oil, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer with bread on the side. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Fresh herbs: If you are growing your own herbs, you can use fresh herbs instead of dried herbs following the measurements below. Be sure to chop them before using in the recipe.
          • 1 tablespoon fresh basil
          • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano
          • 1/2 teaspoon fresh thyme
          • 1/4 teaspoon fresh rosemary
        • Storage: If you are making this recipe using dried herbs, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If using fresh herbs and fresh garlic, I would recommend storing it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
        • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 329kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 126mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 47IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/feed/ 63
        Prime Rib Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2023 13:40:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72734 Prime Rib Seasoning Ingredients Before you start mixing your seasoning, here’s a quick look at what goes into this seasoning…]]>
        Aysegul

        Prime rib is one of those cuts I only cook a few times a year, usually for Christmas dinner or Easter lunch. Let’s be real, it is a very expensive piece of meat, so there isn’t much room for mistakes.

        For years, I relied on store-bought seasonings, but most were either too sweet or had long ingredient lists that took over instead of supporting the meat.

        So I started testing my own blend using basic ingredients I already had on hand. I kept adjusting the ratio until the herbs added gentle warmth, the garlic complemented the meat, and the salt brought everything together. I think these 5 ingredients are more than enough, but I also included optional add-ins in case you want to make it your own.

        Whether you season the roast a day or two ahead or prepare everything the same day, this has become the mix I reach for. And you can stir it together faster than it takes to find a seasoning at the store.

        Another bonus? As the meat cooks, this blend seasons the pan drippings perfectly, giving you a head start on a rich Prime Rib Au Jus you can make in minutes.

        Prime Rib Seasoning Ingredients

        Before you start mixing your seasoning, here’s a quick look at what goes into this seasoning for prime rib roast and a few easy substitutions if you need them:

        Ingredients for prime rib rub from the top view.

        Kosher salt: I prefer Diamond Crystal because its larger flakes make it easier to control the seasoning. If you are using Morton Kosher Salt, use half the amount since the grains are denser and saltier.

        Pro tip: If you are dry-brining your roast ahead of time (meaning you are pre-salting your meat 24-48 hours prior to cooking), omit the salt from this rub. Adding it twice would over-season the meat.

        Black pepper: While both work, I highly recommend using coarse black pepper over fine black pepper, which will give you that classic steakhouse crust and holds up well during long roasting times.

        Rosemary: I usually use dried rosemary for convenience, but fresh works too. If you use fresh rosemary, use twice as much as dried. Regardless of which one you use, be sure to chop it finely so you don’t end up with needle-like pieces.

        Thyme: Similar to rosemary, I opted for dried thyme, but if you have fresh thyme, that would work too. If using fresh, double the amount.

        Garlic powder: I opted for garlic powder as it can handle high heat, whereas fresh garlic tends to burn and turn bitter during high-heat roasting.

        Optional Prime Rib Seasoning Variations

        My approach to this prime rib seasoning recipe is to keep it simple, as it already has a naturally rich flavor. However, you can experiment with different spices and seasonings to achieve a different flavor profile.

        If you decide to use one (or more) of the prime rib spices below, I recommend starting with a small amount (no more than ½ teaspoon to a teaspoon) and adding more as needed so you don’t overseason your meat.

        • Onion powder: Onion powder is a bold addition that can immediately satisfy anyone who loves a robust flavor profile. 
        • Paprika: Paprika adds a warm, subtle smokiness to the rub. You can use regular or smoked paprika, whichever you prefer.
        • Red pepper flakes: If you want a little heat, add a pinch. It gives the rub a subtle kick without overpowering the meat.
        • Brown sugar: A small amount of brown sugar helps with caramelization, helping create that dark, crisp crust.Though please keep in mind that a little bit of sugar goes a long way.
        • Oil: If you choose to make a wet rub, I recommend using an oil with a high smoking point, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee, to avoid burning. I would recommend using 4-5 tablespoons of oil for a 7-pound prime rib.
        • Dijon mustard: Even a small amount of Dijon adds a light tang and helps the seasoning stick to the roast. It gives the beef a subtle sharpness without overpowering the other flavors.

        When To Season Your Prime Rib? Dry Brining vs Immediate Seasoning

        Before we get to the instructions, I want to clarify something crucial regarding when you plan to season your roast, as this determines how you mix the spices. The best time to season prime rib depends on how much time you have. 

        However, both methods would work whether you are roasting, reverse searing, or smoking your prime rib.

        You have two options:

        Option 1: Dry Brining (Plan Ahead) – Recommended: 

        This is when you salt your meat 24-48 hours before cooking (which I use in my Reverse Sear Prime Rib recipe). I prefer this method because salting such a large cut early helps draw out moisture, dries the surface, and gives the salt enough time to permeate deep into the meat. To me, this is the secret to a perfectly seasoned prime rib.

        How to do it: If you go this route, do not add salt to the seasoning mix below. Instead, salt your meat now and let it rest in the fridge for 24 to 48 hours. Mix the remaining ingredients and apply them to the rested meat right before cooking.

        Option 2: Immediate Seasoning (Cook Today): 

        This is when you are short on time, and you plan to cook your prime rib today. 
        How to do it: Simply add the salt to the spice mix as written below and season your meat generously right before cooking.

        How to Make Prime Rib Seasoning

        Once you decide on your timing, putting it together takes a few minutes. Think of this prime rib seasoning blend as your base mix for any standing rib roast you make.

        The steps are simple, but a few small details make a big difference in how evenly the seasoning sticks and how your crust turns out. Here is how I make it:

        A collage of images showing how to make prime rib seasoning.

        Step 1 – Mix all dry ingredients: Start by adding the kosher salt (if immediately seasoning), black pepper, rosemary, thyme, and garlic powder to a small bowl. Try to break up any lumps that you see. I like using a spoon or a small whisk.

        Pro Tip: If you are using fresh, finely chopped herbs instead of dried, rub them gently between your fingers as you add them. This helps release their natural oils and gives the rub more aroma.

        Step 2 – Rub onto roast or store for later: At this point, you can go in two directions:

        1. Using it right away: Pat your prime rib dry with paper towels so the surface is not wet. This helps the rub stick better and gives you a nicer crust. Before seasoning, let the roast sit at room temperature for 45 to 60 minutes to help it cook more evenly from edge to edge.
          How To Do It: Sprinkle the seasoning all over the roast, including the sides and any crevices, and use your hands to gently press it in. Once it’s seasoned, place it on a roasting pan with a rack and proceed with your preferred cooking method. 
        2. Saving it for later: If you are prepping ahead, transfer the seasoning to a small jar with a tight-fitting lid. Store it in a cool, dry place. It will keep well for several weeks, which makes it easy to have the seasonings you need for your next prime rib roast ready, whether you are making it for the holidays or a special dinner.
          How To Do It: Before you cook, give the jar a quick shake in case any of the spices have settled. Then use it just as you would a store-bought seasoning.
        Seasoned prime rib from the front view.

        How Much Prime Rib Seasoning You Need (Per Pound Guide)

        The amount of seasoning you need depends on the size of your roast. A good rule of thumb is to use about ½ to 1 tablespoon of seasoning per pound of meat. However, if your roast has a thicker fat cap, I recommend leaning towards the higher end of the range.

        My recipe here makes 4 tablespoons of seasoning, for reference.

        Here is a quick table you can follow when measuring out your rub:

        Roast WeightSeasoning Needed
        5 lb / 2.26kg3 Tbsp
        6–7 lb / 2.72kg – 3.18kg4 Tbsp
        8–10 lb /3.63kg – 4.54kg5–6 Tbsp

        Expert Tips for Best Results

        Having been making this recipe for several years now, I’ve learned a couple of tricks that make a big difference in how your seasoning sticks, how your crust turns out, and how evenly your roast cooks.

        Dry the roast well: Before you season it, pat it dry with paper towels. A dry surface helps the rub cling to the meat and gives you a better crust. If the roast is a little wet, the seasoning can slide off.

        Know the best time to salt your meat: Some recipes call for a dry brine 24 to 48 hours ahead, while others season right before cooking. Know which method you will be following to prevent over-salting the meat.

        Evenly distribute it on all sides: Make sure you coat every part of the roast, including the fat cap and the sides. Since prime rib is thick, seasoning only the top will not give you the full flavor you want in each slice.

        Homemade prime rib rub seasoning sprinkled over meat.
        Print

        Prime Rib Seasoning Recipe

        Quick and easy to make, this prime rib seasoning is the perfect coating for your prime rib. Thanks to this spice mix, you end up with the perfect crust and super flavorful pan drippings.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 tablespoons
        Calories 10kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons of kosher salt*
        • 1 tablespoon black pepper coarsely ground
        • 1 ½ teaspoons dried thyme or 1 tablespoon fresh thyme (chopped)
        • 1 ½ teaspoons dried rosemary or 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary (chopped)
        • 2 teaspoons garlic powder

        Instructions

        • Mix together the salt*, black pepper, dried thyme, dried rosemary, and garlic powder in a small bowl. Mix until combined.
        • Spread the spice mixture evenly on your seasoned prime rib before cooking. Alternatively, you can store the mixture in a jar and store it until you are ready to use it.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4 tablespoons of prime rib seasoning (including the salt), enough for a 7-pound prime rib roast. You can multiply the recipe if you are cooking a larger roast.
        • Kosher Salt: We used Diamond kosher salt in this recipe. If you are using Morton kosher salt, please use half the amount. 
        • Read your prime rib recipe fully before preparing this spice mix: Before making and using this spice mixture, be sure to check the recipe you are using, as some prime rib recipes (such as our Reverse Sear Prime Rib recipe) suggest dry brining the meat 24 hours before cooking and letting it sit in the fridge. If that is the case, use the salt for dry-brining your meat, and then spread the rest of the mixture over it right before cooking.
        • Make it a wet rub: If you choose to make a wet rub, I recommend using an oil with a high smoking point, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee, to avoid burning. I would recommend using 4-5 tablespoons of oil for a 7-pound prime rib. Additionally, you can add a teaspoon (or two) of Dijon mustard for a tangy flavor.
        • Storage: This spice mix will store well in a small jar for up to 2 months if you use dried herbs. If you use fresh herbs, it should be used within 2-3 days of making it.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 10kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 3490mg | Potassium: 42mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 24IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

        How to Store Prime Rib Seasoning

        Having rib roast seasoning ready to go is one of the easiest ways to stay ahead during the holidays or prep for a simple weeknight roast. How you store it depends on whether you made a dry mix or a wet version:

        • Storing a dry rub: If you made the seasoning with only dry ingredients, place it in an airtight glass jar and keep it in a cool, dark spot in your pantry. It will stay fresh for up to 2 months.
          Dry spices last longer because there is no moisture to cause clumping or reduce their flavor. 
        • Storing a wet rub: If you used fresh herbs (or mixed any of the optional seasonings with liquid), treat it like any other fresh marinade. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator and use it within 2 to 3 days.
          A wet rub has more moisture, so the flavor changes quicker and they do not keep as long.

        Other Ways to Use This Seasoning

        The beautiful thing about this homemade blend is that it is not only the best seasoning for a standing rib roast dinner, but it is also versatile. You can use it in everything from bread dips to veggies, taking all your favorite dishes to the next level in just minutes. Here are some of my other favorite ways to use it:

        • In other meat cuts: Though I love using this rub to make seasoned prime rib, it also makes a great addition to pork, chicken, turkey, and other beef recipes, such as traditional steak or my Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin.
        • Sprinkle over vegetables: This recipe also makes for a delicious seasoning blend for vegetables, whether you follow a vegetarian diet or want easy veggie side dishes to complete your dinner menu.
        • Turn it into a marinade: Add a little oil to the seasoning mix, and it quickly becomes a simple marinade that adds even more richness to any kind of meat.
        • Make it a bread dip: Mix the seasoning with olive oil and a little shredded parmesan, and you get the easiest appetizer ever. If you want a more complete version with additional herbs and garlic, check out my Bread Dipping Oil Recipe.
        • Make herb butter: Mixing this seasoning into softened butter is one of the easiest ways to add rich, savory flavor to anything you are cooking. Stir it into plain butter, or use it with my Roasted Garlic Butter for even more depth. It spreads beautifully on warm bread, steaks, or roasted veggies.
        Person mixing the ingredients in a bowl.

        FAQs

        Should I season the prime rib the night before?

        Yes, if your recipe calls for it. Seasoning the roast with salt the night before (or even 24 to 48 hours ahead) helps draw out excess moisture and gives the salt time to work its way into the meat. This is the best way to get deeper, more even seasoning. Add the rest of the rub right before cooking.

        Can I use fresh herbs?

        Yes, fresh herbs work really well in this seasoning mix. But since they are milder, use twice as many dried herbs.

        Should I put butter on prime rib before seasoning?

        It depends on the cooking method and the recipe you are using, but most of the time, no. Many prime rib recipes rely on high heat at some point, and butter can burn quickly in that environment. If you want to use oil for flavor, choose one that can handle higher heat. A neutral, high-smoke-point oil like ghee (clarified butter) or vegetable oil works better than butter.

        Should I season the fat cap?

        You absolutely should. The fat cap is a key part of the roast, and seasoning it will ensure that every slice is perfectly seasoned.

        Can I use this on boneless and bone-in roasts?

        Yes. This seasoning works for both bone-in and boneless prime rib. Bone-in roasts take a little longer to cook, but the rub performs the same on either cut.

        Complete Your Prime Rib Dinner

        Congratulations, you made the best prime rib seasoning on the internet. Now, it is time to turn it into dinner. Here are the rest of the recipes you’ll need for a showstopping dinner:

        • How to cook it? My go-to recipe is this Reverse Sear Prime Rib. It is a two-step cooking method that starts in a low-temperature oven, brings it to your desired doneness, and then finishes in a high-heat oven. I use this seasoning for this recipe, and it works wonderfully.
        • The dipping sauce: Don’t let those herb-crusted pan drippings go to waste. Use them to make my 10-minute Prime Rib Au Jus recipe for the perfect dipping sauce.
        • What to serve it with? You can’t have prime rib without horseradish sauce. Yes, you can buy it online, but making Horseradish Sauce at Home is really easy. Alternatively, if you prefer a lightened-up version, my Horseradish Yogurt Sauce might be what you need.
        • Got leftovers? Don’t let a single bite go to waste and make my Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/feed/ 1
        Almond Flour Tahini Cookies https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/ https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/#comments Thu, 14 Dec 2023 16:54:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3058 Tahini is an ingredient I grew up with since it is a staple in Middle Eastern cooking. The creamy, savory…]]>

        Tahini is an ingredient I grew up with since it is a staple in Middle Eastern cooking. The creamy, savory depth of tahini adds balance and rich texture to an otherwise simple grain-free, dairy-free cookie.

        If you love baking with Almond Flour, you are in for a treat because we have so many almond flour cookie recipes in our archives. Gingerbread Cookies with Almond Flour, Almond Flour Peanut Butter Cookies, and Almond Butter Almond Flour Cookies are just a few to name. 

        Tahini Almond Flour Cookies served on a plate with a person taking one cookie from the top view.

        Ingredients

        These sesame tahini cookies require nothing more than a handful of simple ingredients that are easy to find at grocery stores. We will need:

        Ingredients for tahini sesame seed cookies from the top view.
        • Almond flour: Either make your own almond flour or purchase blanched almond flour (affiliate link) from the store or online. If you are in a pinch, an equal amount of almond meal is a great alternative.
        • Kosher salt: Kosher salt balances the sweetness and enhances the flavor of these sesame cookies with tahini. Sea salt can also be used.
        • Baking soda: Baking soda tenderizes and lifts the cookies ever so slightly.
        • Tahini: Also known as ground sesame seeds or sesame seed paste, one of my favorite brands of tahini is Soom (affiliate link). Just make sure to stir the tahini really well before using as the oils tend to separate easily. Additionally, make sure to purchase a sugar-free tahini for this recipe.
        • Maple syrup: The key is to use a liquid sweetener here, which can either be maple syrup, agave syrup, or honey. Keep in mind that the almond sesame cookies will be darker and a little bit sweeter if you use honey. I would not recommend coconut sugar here.
        • Sesame seeds: Sprinkling the cookies with a pinch of sesame seeds is an optional step, but I think one that you do not want to miss. You can toast sesame seeds yourself or buy toasted seeds from the store.

        Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

        While I usually stick to the main ingredients, you can easily have fun and get creative with some of the optional additions below:

        • Chocolate Chips: Omit the sesame seeds and toss in ½ cup dark chocolate chips or chocolate chunks for tahini chocolate chip cookies.
        • Vanilla Extract: Add 1 teaspoon vanilla extract to the tahini almond flour cookies for extra flavor.
        • Ground Spices: Add warmth with the addition of ¼ – ½ tsp of cinnamon, cardamom, ginger, or nutmeg.

        How to Make Sesame Cookies with Almond Flour?

        These healthy tahini cookies come together in no time at all. You’ll be amazed at how fast you’ll be enjoying this freshly baked tahini cookie recipe. Below are the steps you need to follow to make them:

        1. Line baking tray: Line a cookie sheet with parchment paper. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. (176 C.)
        A collage of images showing how to make the cookie dough for sesame tahini cookies.
        1. Mix dry ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together almond flour, salt, and baking soda. 
        2. Add wet ingredients: Gently add in the tahini and maple syrup to the bowl.
        3. Stir: Mix until fully combined. At first, you might feel like there is not enough liquid in the cookie batter, but it will come together as you mix it.
        Person showing how to portion, roll and arrange almond tahini cookies before baking them.
        1. Roll cookies: Scoop the cookie dough using a small cookie scoop (we used #40). Alternatively, use a tablespoon and measure out 2 tbsp of cookie batter per cookie. Roll into a ball between the palms of your hands. 
        2. Flatten cookies: Arrange the cookies on the prepared baking sheet, spacing 1 inch apart. Gently press down the cookie balls until each is 1-inch thick. 
        A collage of images showing tahini almond flour cookies on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
        1. Top with sesame seeds: This step is optional, but if you prefer, lightly brush the tops of the cookies with a very small amount of tahini paste (1 teaspoon or so) and sprinkle with toasted sesame seeds.
        2. Bake: Bake for 12-14 minutes or until lightly brown with crisp edges. Rotate the baking sheet halfway through for even browning.
        3. Cool: Allow the cookies to rest on the baking sheet for 5 minutes. Then, transfer to a wire rack to cool completely before serving.

        How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

        We think that these vegan sesame cookies are best on the day that they are baked. Therefore, we recommend baking them in small batches and storing them in a cookie jar. Here’s how I like to store them:

        • Make Ahead: Tahini cookie dough can be made in advance and tightly wrapped in plastic wrap. Store in the refrigerator for 1-2 days, or freeze for up to 1 month.
        • Storage: Flourless tahini cookies will keep in an airtight container at room temperature for 3 days.
        • Freeze: Flash-freeze the raw almond tahini cookies on a baking sheet for 1 hour, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Freeze for up to a month. 

        Expert Tips

        • Stir the tahini: A jar of tahini tends to separate very easily. Give it a good stir with either a knife or thin spatula until smooth and pourable.
        • Texture of the dough: After you add in the liquid ingredients and start mixing it, you might think that there is not enough liquid in the batter to hold the dough together. However, please resist the urge to add more liquid. You will realize that it will come together as you continue to mix it.
        • They don’t spread: Unlike other cookies made with all-purpose flour, sugar, and butter, these tahini sesame cookies do not spread when baked. However, we still advise you to arrange them 1 inch apart from each other to make sure they don’t touch each other during the baking process.
        Refined sugar free tahini cookies on a small plate from the top view.

        FAQs

        Is sesame tahini paste gluten-free?

        Yes, sesame paste is naturally gluten-free as it is only ground sesame seeds.

        Is tahini vegan friendly?

        Yes, tahini is vegan since the only ingredient is sesame seeds.

        What can I replace the tahini with?

        Tahini gives these cookies a special savory, nutty flavor that is hard to replicate. However, if you can’t find tahini, another great alternative is any of the other nut butters, like almond butter, cashew butter, peanut butter, or sunflower seed butter. Keep in mind, the cookies will taste different, so it’s best to use tahini if you can.

        Can you freeze tahini cookies?

        Raw tahini cookie dough balls can be frozen for up to 3 months. First, flash-freeze them on a baking sheet for 1 hour. Then, transfer to a freezer bag or airtight container. When you are ready to bake them, follow the instructions on the recipe card as written. No need to thaw them.

        More Recipes with Tahini:

        If you try this Almond Flour Tahini Cookies recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Almond flour tahini cookies on a plate with a person taking one cookie from the plate.
        Print

        Almond Flour Tahini Cookies Recipe

        Almond Flour Tahini Cookies are deliciously nutty, soft, and chewy and flavored with rich tahini. Vegan, gluten-free, refined-sugar-free, these tahini cookies are ready in less than 30 minutes.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 14 minutes
        Total Time 29 minutes
        Servings 16 cookies
        Calories 130kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups almond flour 220 g.
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt
        • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
        • 1/3 cup tahini aka sesame paste – well stirred and at room temperature + 1 teaspoon to brush the cookies
        • 1/3 cup maple syrup or honey*
        • 1 tablespoons sesame seeds toasted (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. (176 C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set it aside.
        • In a large bowl, whisk together the almond flour, kosher salt, and baking soda.
        • Gently stir in the tahini and maple syrup. Mix until well incorporated. At first, it will feel like you do not have enough liquid, but as you continue to mix the dough, it will come together.
        • Using a small cookie scoop (see equipment section for the cookie scoop we used), portion the cookie dough. Alternatively, you can use a tablespoon measure and measure out 2 tablespoons of cookie batter (per cookie) and gently roll them into a firm roll in between the palms of your hands. Arrange the cookies on the prepared sheet pan, making sure that they are at least 1 inch apart.
        • Gently press down to flatten the ball so that it is 1 inch thick.
        • Lightly brush the cookies with a teaspoon of tahini and lightly sprinkle them with toasted sesame seeds on top.
        • Bake for 12-14 minutes until lightly brown on top, rotating the baking sheet halfway through for even heat distribution and browning.
        • Remove from the oven and let the cookies rest on the baking sheet for 5 minutes. Transfer onto a wire tack to cool and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 16 cookies. Nutritional values below are per cookie.
        • Using honey instead of maple syrup: If you prefer to use honey instead of maple syrup, you can substitute for the same amount. Honey will definitely add more sweetness to this cookie. It will also cause the cookie to brown faster, so you should reduce the baking time to 10-12 minutes or until lightly browned.
        • Make Ahead: Tahini cookie dough can be made in advance and tightly wrapped in plastic wrap. Store in the refrigerator for 1-2 days, or freeze for up to 1 month.
        • Storage: We find that these cookies are best on the day that they are made, so we recommend baking them in small batches. However, you can store leftovers in an airtight container at room temperature for 3 days.
        • Freeze: Flash-freeze the raw almond tahini cookies on a baking sheet for 1 hour, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Freeze for up to a month. Bake as directed in the recipe. There is no need to thaw them. However, you may have to add a few extra minutes to the baking time if you bake them right out of the freezer.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 130kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 92mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/feed/ 5
        Healthy Oatmeal Raisin Cookies https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-oatmeal-raisin-cookies/ https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-oatmeal-raisin-cookies/#comments Wed, 13 Dec 2023 17:45:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21204 Don’t get me wrong, I love a good chewy Oatmeal Chocolate Chip Cookie every once in a while, but most…]]>

        Don’t get me wrong, I love a good chewy Oatmeal Chocolate Chip Cookie every once in a while, but most of the time, I am looking for healthier options when the cookie cravings strike. If you feel the same way, you are in for a treat because we have several cookie recipes that fit the bill.

        Need a few suggestions? I’ve got you covered! My six-ingredient Almond Flour Cookies are dairy-free and low-carb, while my Almond Flour Ginger Snaps have a deliciously chewy texture that uses refined sugar-free flavorings to get sweetly spiced flavors.

        Refined sugar free oatmeal raisin cookies on a plate with a glass of milk on the side.

        List of Ingredients

        Irresistibly satisfying and tantalizingly sweet, this healthy oatmeal raisin cookie recipe uses a tasty mix of wholesome ingredients to be as nutritious and delicious as possible. Even better, it combines rolled oats and oat flour to give each cookie a scrumptiously chewy texture.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Old-fashioned rolled oats: The key to making flour-free oatmeal cookies is to use another ingredient that gives the batter shape and structure—in this case, oats! Though there are many different types of oats, the best oatmeal raisin cookies come together using old-fashioned oats (also known as “rolled oats”), as they’ll keep your dough from becoming soggy or overcooked. The main difference between rolled oats and quick oats is that rolled oats are thicker and larger, allowing them to withstand longer cooking times without becoming mushy, as instant oats (or quick-cooking oats) do. Furthermore, there’s also a big difference between steel-cut and rolled oats, as steel-cut oats have a coarser, less chewy texture when baked, so be sure to stick to rolled oats for this recipe. Also, when looking for old-fashioned oats at the grocery store, make sure to buy gluten-free oats if you follow a gluten-free diet, as many oat manufacturers use the same machinery they use to produce gluten-based products.
        • Oat flour: Unlike traditional wheat flour, oat flour is more nutritious and easier to make from home, needing only whole rolled oats and a food processor. If you’d prefer an alternative ingredient, you can also use almond flour for a quick substitution.
        • Ground flaxseeds: Instead of using eggs, this simple ingredient works as a binder for this healthier oatmeal raisin cookies recipe, helping secure the ingredients together while maintaining a vegan-friendly profile.
        • Chia seeds: Not only does this superfood lend your healthy rolled oats cookies a nuanced nutty flavor, but it also packs extra protein into every bite.
        • Baking powder
        • Ground cinnamon
        • Kosher salt
        • Applesauce or mashed bananas: I love making healthy oatmeal raisin cookies with applesauce (especially Homemade Applesauce!), as this ingredient lends the batter sweet, bright undertones without requiring added sweeteners. Alternatively, you can also use mashed ripe bananas for more tropical, fruity notes.
        • Coconut oil: Coconut oil is essential for giving these healthy oatmeal cookies their chewy, moist texture. However, you could also use another mildly flavored oil, such as avocado oil, instead.
        • Maple syrup
        • Unsweetened almond milk: Creamy, light, and dairy-free, unsweetened almond milk is vital to hydrating the dry ingredients of this recipe, giving you moist, soft, and luscious cookies every time. 
        • Nuts: Walnuts are my go-to for giving these oatmeal raisin cookies a delicate crunch and mildly nutty taste. To take this recipe to the next level, you can toast your walnuts beforehand to help release their oils, giving your cookies a heartier dose of their natural flavors. However, any nut of your choice would work in this recipe.
        • Raisins: I used sweet raisins to lend this clean cookie recipe with its signature chewy, fruity taste. However, you can use any of your favorite dried fruits as natural sweeteners, whether you plan on making healthy oatmeal cranberry cookies, an antioxidant-packed blueberry batter, or a pie-inspired cherry biscuit. No matter which dried fruit you use, just be sure that you select one with no sugar added if you want your cookies to stay free of refined sugar.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Semi-sweet chocolate chips: If you’re a chocolate lover, all you need to do to infuse this recipe with rich, cocoa-packed flavor is to add ½ cup of your favorite chocolate chips to the batter. Remember, too, that you can still make low-sugar oatmeal raisin cookies with chocolate if you use brands like Enjoy Life (affiliate), which uses natural ingredients like cane sugar, non-alcoholic chocolate liquor, and non-dairy cocoa butter to get its sweet, chocolatey taste.
        • Vanilla extract: To give these healthier oatmeal raisin cookies a gourmet finish, add one teaspoon of vanilla extract to your batter. 

        How to Make This Recipe?

        With my easy recipe for applesauce oatmeal raisin cookies, you can have a five-star dessert on the table in just thirty minutes—no previous baking experience necessary!

        1. Prep the oven: Preheat your oven to 325 degrees F. While the oven heats, line two baking sheets with parchment paper, set them aside, and arrange the oven racks on the oven’s middle and upper bottom sections.
        A collage of images showing how to make healthy oatmeal raisin cookie recipe.
        1. Mix the dry ingredients: Add the old-fashioned rolled oats, oat flour, ground flax seeds, chia seeds, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt to a large mixing bowl. Mix the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        2. Mix the wet ingredients: In a separate bowl, add the applesauce (or mashed bananas), coconut oil, maple syrup, and unsweetened almond milk, and stir until combined.
        3. Combine the wet and dry ingredients: Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients, scraping the sides of the bowl to remove the remaining mixture. Stir the batter until all the ingredients are evenly blended.
        4. Add the walnuts: Use a rubber spatula to fold the walnuts and raisins into the cookie batter. At this point, don’t be alarmed if the dough may seem too wet. Some of the moisture will be released during the resting process, both before and after baking.
        A collage of images showing how to portion oatmeal raisin cookie dough.
        1. Portion the cookie dough: Use a cookie scoop to make evenly sized cookie dough balls, and arrange each portion one inch apart from one another on the lined sheet pan. Then, use the back of a spatula to press upon and lightly flatten each ball of dough. We recommend diving the cookie batter in between baking trays instead of trying them into one.
        2. Bake: Place the baking sheets on the middle and upper bottom racks and bake the cookies for 18-20 minutes or until the cookies turn a light golden brown. Halfway through baking, turn the sheets from front to back and top to bottom to ensure even cooking. You may also bake the cookies one tray at a time if you prefer.
        3. Let the cookies rest: Remove the baked cookies from the oven and let them rest on the baking sheets for five minutes. Once slightly set, transfer them to a wire rack, let them cool for 15-30 minutes, and serve.

        How to Store and Freeze These Cookies?

        Warm, chewy, and flavorful, these maple oatmeal raisin cookies are best on the day that you make them. While I highly suggest baking your cookies in small batches to enjoy their toasty, fresh taste right away, this simple storage guide will ensure you can enjoy these sweet treats throughout the week, no matter when you cook them.

        • Store: Let the cookies cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container at room temperature (such as on the counter) for up to three days. If you want to extend their shelf life, store your cooled cookies in the fridge for up to five days, reheating them in a 300-degree F. oven for five minutes or until heated through.
        • Freeze: If you plan on making these chewy oatmeal raisin cookies further in the future, I recommend scooping the dough into your desired size, placing them on a piece of parchment paper, and letting them harden. Then, transfer your unbaked cookies to a Ziploc bag and bake them according to my recipe’s directions when ready to eat—no thawing or defrosting necessary.
        Healthy gluten free oatmeal cookies on a plate from the top view.

        Expert Tips

        This healthy oatmeal and raisin cookies recipe is a great way to satiate the sweet cravings of any health-conscious cook. For even more tips on how to make your dessert as chewy, rich, and sweet as possible, these pro pointers have everything you need.

        • Wet dough: Don’t be alarmed if your oatmeal raisin cookie dough seems wetter than expected before baking. Because these gluten-free oatmeal cookies don’t use wheat-based flour, the liquid needs more time to absorb into the oats while resting, giving you an ideally chewy texture. We have tested this recipe with a lesser amount of applesauce and found out that once it was fully cooled it was a dryer than we liked.
        • No need to chill: Most gluten- and fat-based cookies need to chill to help them maintain their shape and soft texture while baking. However, these oatmeal cookies don’t need the same treatment due to their heartier, gluten-free composition, so you can bake them immediately after mixing the batter.
        • The dough doesn’t spread during the baking process: Unlike other cookies, which melt and expand in the oven. Since they are made without baking soda, they keep their shape and size during the cooking process.
        • Bake in small batches: We highly recommend baking these cookies on the day you plan to serve them. Therefore, unless you are serving them to a crowd, we recommend baking them in small batches. This way, you can save your cookie dough throughout the week, baking it as necessary to ensure you have the freshest, chewiest cookies possible.
        • Serving suggestions: Nutritious, soft, and sweet, these oat flour oatmeal raisin cookies taste amazing with dozens of delicious pairings. Serve this sweet treat with a cup of coffee at breakfast, milk for dessert, or spread it with your favorite nut butter to keep you full for hours on end.

        Here at Foolproof Living, we understand that “healthy” can differ from person to person. With that in mind, we’ve developed a recipe for low-sugar oatmeal cookies that uses clean ingredients—limiting the use of fats, refined sugars, and over-processed foods—to help you treat yourself while still nourishing your body with essential nutrients. 

        Below, you’ll discover just a few ways this recipe’s ingredients promote dietary, heart, and nutritional health.

        • No refined sugars: Without any refined sugars—such as granulated or brown sugar—these sugar-free oatmeal raisin cookies use only natural ingredients to sweeten their batter, thereby reducing your risk of inflammation, high blood pressure, and diabetes. Instead, I sweeten my cookies with all-natural ingredients, including maple syrup, applesauce (or mashed bananas), and raisins.
        • Low fat: There’s no need to break out several sticks of butter to make a mouthwatering dessert. This simple recipe only uses ¼ cup of coconut oil to keep your cookies as moist and chewy as possible, without all the “bad cholesterol” associated with butter and other unhealthy fats.
        • High fiber: Thanks to this recipe’s use of rolled oats and oat flour, it has a much higher amount of gut-healthy fiber than cookie recipes using white flour.
        • Packed with superfoods: Superfoods are a must for anyone looking to fill their plate with essential vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. That’s why I include ground flaxseeds and chia seeds (which are high in protein!) in my recipe for healthy, chewy oatmeal cookies, solving any reservations about indulging in a sweet treat.
        • Gluten-free and vegan: If you have a dietary restriction, the last thing you want to deal with is bland, “questionably safe” desserts. To eliminate these concerns, I’ve developed an oatmeal cookie recipe that doesn’t use eggs, dairy-based milk, whole wheat flour, or all-purpose flour, making it the perfect dessert for anyone following a gluten-free, vegan or dairy-free diet.
        • Nuts: Walnuts are a magic ingredient, offering equal parts flavor and nutrition. This hearty nut is rich in omega-3 fatty acids, antioxidants, and fiber—all supporting well-functioning gut and cardiovascular systems.
        • Super filling and helps with the sweet cravings: Though it may seem counterintuitive to start your day with a “breakfast cookie,” this recipe for clean oatmeal cookies is the ultimate solution for mid-meal cravings. This sweet treat is healthy and satiating, helping you meet your dietary needs and keep you full throughout the day.

        FAQs

        Lower-fat oatmeal cookies are the ultimate solution to non-nutritive desserts, midday slumps, and sweet-tooth cravings. If you have any further questions about this easy recipe, you’ll find your answers below:

        Are oatmeal raisin cookies healthy for you?

        As a dietary rule, I recommend enjoying everything in moderation, with consideration of the recipe you’re following. However, these high-fiber oatmeal cookies contain natural, nutritious, and superfood-packed ingredients that benefit dietary health more than traditional butter- and sugar-based dessert recipes.

        How many calories are there in one of these healthy oatmeal raisin cookies?

        Using my recipe for low-calorie oatmeal raisin cookies, each cookie will amount to about 276 kcal.

        If you can’t resist a good oatmeal raisin cookie, you’ll adore these other healthy cookie recipes. Now, you can satisfy every sweet tooth with nutty, creamy, and rich flavors without sacrificing nutritional content.

        If you try this Healthy Soft Oatmeal Cookies recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Oatmeal raisin cookies made without sugar on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Healthy Oatmeal Raisin Cookies Recipe

        Enjoy guilt-free indulgence with our soft and chewy Healthy Oatmeal Raisin Cookies! These wholesome treats are sweetened with applesauce, raisins, and a touch of maple syrup – no added sugar. Satisfy your cookie cravings the healthy way!
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 18 minutes
        Total Time 33 minutes
        Servings 12 cookies
        Calories 276kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups old-fashioned rolled oats
        • 1 cup oat flour*
        • ½ cup ground flax seeds
        • 2 tablespoons chia seeds
        • 1 teaspoon baking powder
        • 1 ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1 cup applesauce or mashed bananas
        • cup coconut oil melted and cooled
        • cup maple syrup
        • ¼ cup unsweetened almond milk
        • 1 cup walnuts roughly chopped
        • cup raisins or dried cranberries – roughly chopped

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F (162 C.) Line two baking sheets with parchment paper and set them aside. Arrange the oven racks on the middle and upper bottom sections of the oven.
        • To prepare the dry ingredients, in a large bowl, combine the old-fashioned rolled oats, oat flour, ground flax seeds, chia seeds, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt. Set it aside.
        • For the wet ingredients, in a separate medium bowl, combine the applesauce (or mashed bananas), coconut oil, maple syrup, and unsweetened almond milk. Stir until fully combined.
        • Add the wet ingredients into the dry ones, scraping the sides of the bowl as you mix until everything is evenly incorporated.
        • Using a rubber spatula, fold the walnuts and raisins into the batter. At this point, the batter will appear to be too wet*, but some moisture will be released while resting both during and after the baking process.
        • Using an ice cream scoop, scoop the dough and place each portion on the baking sheet, making sure that they are 1 inch apart from each other. Using the back of a spatula, gently press on top of each cookie to flatten them slightly. Also, we recommend dividing the cookies among two sheets to ensure they have equal air circulation in the oven.
        • Place the sheet pans in the middle and upper bottom rack and bake for 18-20 minutes or until the cookies turn lightly golden brown with crispy edges. Halfway through the baking process, turn the baking sheets from front to back and also switch them from top to bottom. With this being said, you can bake the cookies one sheet at a time if you prefer (please see notes, section "Bake in small batches.")
        • Remove from the oven and let the cookies rest on the baking sheets for 5 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cooking rack and let them cool for 15-30 minutes before serving.

        Notes

        • This recipe has been adapted with minor changes from this Superfood Breakfast Cookies recipe by Wife Mama Foodie.
        • Yields: We used a #16 ice cream scoop (affiliate link) to portion out these cookies. If you use a similar tool, you will end up with 12 cookies. The nutritional information below is per cookie.
        • Oat flour: You can make your own oat flour by placing old-fashioned rolled oats in a food processor or a spice grinder and process until it is ground. 
        • Wet batter: After you mix the dry ingredients with the wet ones, you might think that the better is too wet. However, please know that they release some of the excess moisture after they are baked and cooled. During our recipe testing we found that any lesser applesauce will result in a rather dry (and hard) cookie.
        • No need to chill: Unlike cookies made with flour, sugar, and butter, you do not need to chill these cookies before baking them.
        • Bake in small batches: While we wrote the recipe in a way that you can bake all the cookies at once, we think that they are best on the day they are baked. Therefore, we recommend only baking the amount you plan to serve and freezing the rest.
        • Storage: To store leftovers, bring the cookies to room temperature and store them in an airtight container on the counter for up to 3 days or in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freezing: Place the raw portioned cookies on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Place it in the freezer for at least 4 hours so that the cookies will harden. Transfer them to a Zip top bag (or a freezer-safe container) and get the air out as much as you can. When ready to bake, remove the portion you want and bake at 325 degrees F. for 18 minutes. There is no need to thaw them.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 147mg | Potassium: 350mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 13IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 95mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/healthy-oatmeal-raisin-cookies/feed/ 27
        Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/#respond Tue, 28 Nov 2023 16:41:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72183 Rich, buttery, and firm, fingerling potato recipes are a family favorite for us. If you feel the same way, you…]]>

        Rich, buttery, and firm, fingerling potato recipes are a family favorite for us. If you feel the same way, you might like our Fingerling Smashed Potatoes as well.

        Air fried fingerling potatoes on a plate with a spoon on the side.

        Ingredients

        Air-frying fingerling potatoes require only a handful of basic ingredients to achieve their tasty texture and incomparable flavor. Below is what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fingerling potatoes: As the name suggests, you will need fingerling potatoes for this air fryer potato dish. Though you don’t need to peel your potatoes before using, be sure to remove any blemishes from the potato skin and cut the potatoes evenly—preferably halved lengthwise. While we used the yellow (one color) variety, this recipe would also work with colorful fingerling potatoes, which are usually sold at grocery stores during the holiday season.
        • Oil: I use olive oil to give my fingerling potatoes their thorough seasoning and crisp outsides. However, any other neutral-flavored vegetable oil, like avocado oil, will also work.
        • Parsley: Both fresh and dried parsley will give this fingerling potato recipe a five-star presentation and a pop of bright, garden-fresh taste.
        • Seasonings: I’ve found that the best seasoning mix for this dish is garlic powder, salt, and pepper—a simple, balanced, and savory combination. However, you can use other spices like paprika, ground cumin, and ground coriander if they match the flavor profile of the dish you are serving them with.

        Substitutions and Other Seasoning Options

        • Garlic butter: My buttery Garlic Butter Sauce is an easy way to take these air-roasted fingerling potatoes to the next level and turn them into a restaurant-quality side. If you happen to have some on hand, simply use a tablespoon of it instead of using olive oil. 
        • Parmesan cheese: Who can say “no” to the nutty, rich, cheesy taste of garlic parmesan fingerling potatoes? While I don’t recommend adding the cheese to the potatoes before air frying them, I highly recommend sprinkling them with cheese right after removing them from the air fryer. The residual heat will melt the cheese without burning it, allowing the potatoes to absorb its buttery flavor. 
        • Lemon juice or vinegar: Give your fingerling potatoes an authentic English spin by drizzling them with lemon juice or vinegar. This simple addition adds a bright tang that immediately lightens the potatoes’ heartier base.
        • Spice mixture: The best way to customize this air-fried potato recipe is to use a spice mixture that matches the other dishes on your menu. Try flavoring your fingerling potatoes with my Blackening Seasoning for smoky, spicy, and bold Cajun flavors. Or, use Italian Seasoning or Mediterranean Spice Mix for a more herbaceous, zesty finish.
        • Fresh herbs: Sprinkling your air fryer fingerling potatoes with fresh rosemary or chopped thyme is an easy way to give this dish a sophisticated, herbal finish. However, many different herbs (i.e., fresh parsley, chives, sage, or cilantro) would also work if they match the flavors in your other dishes.

        How to Cook Fingerling Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

        Once you learn how to air fry fingerling potatoes, you’ll likely never go back to cooking them in the oven. These hassle-free instructions will show you how to get perfectly tender-crisp potatoes in six steps.

        1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
        A collage of images showing how to air fryer fingerling potatoes.
        1. Mix the seasonings: Add the olive oil, dried parsley flakes, garlic powder, salt, and pepper to a large bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly mixed.
        2. Coat the potatoes: Add the fingerling potatoes to the olive oil mixture and toss them until they have an even coating.
        3. Layer the basket: Arrange the coated potatoes in the air fryer basket in a single layer, avoiding overcrowding.
        4. Cook: Air fry the fingerling potatoes for 12-15 minutes, shaking the air fryer tray halfway through. When done, the potatoes should be tender when pierced with a knife. If they need more time after 15 minutes, cook them in one-minute increments until fork tender.
        5. Serve: Transfer the air-fried fingerling potatoes to a serving platter, and—if desired—sprinkle it with fresh or dried herbs.

        How to Store and Reheat?

        After making fingerling potato recipes in the air fryer, you don’t have to sacrifice a single bite of leftovers. Though I recommend enjoying this recipe on the day you make it, these storage tips will keep your potatoes ready to eat days after preparation.

        • Store: You can store your cooked fingerling potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place your fingerling potatoes in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

        How to Serve Air Fried Fingerling Potatoes?

        Air-frying fingerling potatoes is a great way to add a tender, savory taste to any meal, whether it be a weeknight dinner, a simple snack, or a feast for a special occasion. Below are a few serving suggestions to help you with menu planning:

        • Main proteins: Few combinations are as tasty as this simple yet delicious side dish and a hearty, protein-packed main course. For a light, zesty Mediterranean menu, I recommend serving your potatoes alongside perfectly portioned Chicken Skewers in the Oven or my tangy Greek Yogurt Chicken. Or, for a more decadent spread, my Baked Chicken Parm is a crisp, rich, and cheesy dish guaranteed to impress any dinner guest.
        • Seafood: Inspired by the classic fish-and-chips pairing, this easy side dish makes a great addition to dozens of seafood menus. I love balancing the hearty savor of these air fryer potato wedges with fan-favorite recipes, like my smoky and light Baked Blackened Cod and zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon Fillet.
        • Snack: Making roasted fingerling potatoes in the air fryer is a quick, simple way to please the whole family with a tasty snack, appetizer, or game-day finger food. To brighten their hardier taste, serve these crispy potatoes with your favorite tomato-based sauce, like ketchup or Basil Tomato Sauce. Or, serve them with creamy sauces, like Ranch Dressing with Greek Yogurt or Blue Cheese Sauce Without Cream, for a tangier, richer flavor.
        • Potato Salads: If you are a fan of roasted potato salads, consider trying your crispy air fryer fingerling potatoes as an innovative twist. These potatoes can not only elevate your potato salad with their crunch but also serve as a crunchy addition when chopped and sprinkled over salads.

        Expert Tips

        While making this fingerling potato recipe is quite easy and straightforward, during our recipe testing, we learned a few important things to help you get crisp, tender, and flavorful potatoes on your first try. Below are a few helpful tips for success:

        • Dry and clean: Begin by giving your potatoes a good scrub and thoroughly patting them dry with a paper towel or a clean kitchen towel. Damp potatoes won’t coat well with the seasoning mixture, and this oiled exterior is necessary to help the potatoes crisp up in the air fryer.
        • Single layer: When cooking fingerling potatoes in the air fryer, it’s essential not to overcrowd them in the basket. Air frying only works if the hot air can evenly circulate throughout the chamber, so if not all of your potatoes fit in the basket, I recommend cooking them in batches. 
        • Shake the basket: I suggest shaking your air fryer basket halfway through air frying your fingerling potatoes to ensure even cooking. This step will also help you ascertain how much more time your potatoes will need before eating.
        • Size matters: It is important to note that the size of the potatoes and air frying time are directly correlated. If your fingerling potatoes are larger (or smaller), you may have the adjust the cooking time accordingly.
        • Air fryer brand: Every air fryer is different, so depending on which brand you own, you may have to adjust your potatoes’ cooking time and temperature accordingly. 
        • No need to soak: Some recipes suggest soaking the potatoes first to remove excess starch, but you do not need to do that for the recipe.

        FAQs

        Have more questions about air-fryer fingerling potatoes? Don’t stress! Below, you’ll find everything you need to know, from how long to cook fingerling potatoes to master tips for maximum crispiness.

        How long to air fry fingerling potatoes?

        I recommend air frying your fingerling potatoes for 12-15 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, depending on your air fryer brand and potato size, you may have to adjust the timing. To test whether your potatoes are ready to serve, try piercing them with a knife. If the blade easily enters and exits the potatoes’ flesh, you can remove your potatoes from the heat and serve. If the blade still encounters resistance, continue cooking your potatoes in one-minute increments until ready.

        Are fingerling potatoes similar to Yukon Gold?

        Though both are buttery, rich, and firm, fingerling potatoes and Yukon Gold potatoes have several critical differences. First, Yukon Golds are larger potatoes that are more spherical than fingerling potatoes, which are smaller and more elongated. Furthermore, fingerling potatoes have a slightly nuttier profile, a less creamy texture, and thin skins. However, both are versatile and popular in many traditional recipes.

        Why didn’t my fries get crispy in the air fryer?

        Suppose that your potatoes don’t come out as crisp as desired. In that case, there are two main possibilities: Either you didn’t thoroughly dry your potatoes before coating them in your olive oil mixture, or you may have overcrowded the pan, thereby constricting airflow throughout the air fryer chamber.

        Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

        Air fryer veggies strike the ultimate balance between crisp, tender, and nutritious flavors. These quick sides are just what you need to fill your cookbook (and dinner table!) with perfectly customizable flavors.

        If you try this air fryer fingerling potatoes recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Fingerling potatoes roasted in air fryer on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes Recipe

        A delicious recipe for Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes that are great for serving as a side dish with main dishes or finger food with dipping sauces. Gluten-free and vegan.
        Course Side Dish, Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 120kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound fingerling potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved lengthwise (no need to peel)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon dried parsley flakes or 2 teaspoons of freshly chopped parsley plus more for sprinkling on top
        • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
        • In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried parsley flakes, garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
        • Add the fingerling potatoes and toss to combine.
        • Place the potatoes in a single layer without overcrowding the air fryer basket.
        • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, 12-15 minutes, shaking halfway through. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
        • Transfer onto a serving platter. If desired, sprinkle it with fresh herbs.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound of fingerling potatoes, which is about 3 cups. It is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Dry them thoroughly: It is important to make sure that the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process.
        • Adding parmesan: I initially tested this recipe by adding the shredded parmesan cheese to the oil and garlic mixture, but then we found out that the quick air frying process burned the cheese before fully cooking the potatoes. Therefore, I  recommend sprinkling them with cheese right after removing them from the air fryer. The residual heat will melt the cheese without burning it, allowing the potatoes to absorb its delicious umami flavor. 
        • Size matters: It is important to note that the size of the potatoes and air frying time are directly correlated. If your fingerling potatoes are larger (or smaller), you may have the adjust the cooking time accordingly.
        • Store: Air fried fingerling potatoes are best right after they are fried. However, you can store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 484mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/feed/ 0
        Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste.…]]>

        It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

        Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

        Ingredients

        Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

        Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
        • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
        • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
        • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

        Other Seasoning Ideas

        Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

        • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
        • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
        • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
        • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

        How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

        Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

        1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
        A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
        1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
        3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
        4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
        5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

        How to Store and Reheat?

        To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

        • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
        • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

        Serving Suggestions:

        This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

        • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
        • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

        Expert Tips

        Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

        • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
        • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
        • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
        • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
        • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
        • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

        FAQs

        There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

        Can you air fry red potatoes?

        Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

        Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

        No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

        What temperature to air fry potatoes?

        Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

        Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

        Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

        How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

        I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

        How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

        To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

        Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

        Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

        If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

        Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American Vegetarian
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 113kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
        • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ¼ teaspoon paprika
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
        • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
        • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
        • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
        • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
        • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
        • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
        • Sprinkle it while it is still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
        • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
        • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
        Air Fryer Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:07:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71576 While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for…]]>

        While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it.

        Butternut squash cooked in air fryer on a white oval plate with a spoon on the side.

        Ingredients

        Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

        • Butternut squash: Fresh, unblemished butternut squash is the key to making air fryer roasted squash. When selecting your squash, look for ones with an intact stem, a dark beige color, and matte skin. Once your squash is ready, peel and cut it into 1-inch cubes. Be careful when cutting it into cubes. If you are new to it, check out my foolproof guide to cutting butternut squash before you start. Also, to simplify your meal prep, you may use store-bought, pre-cut butternut squash for this recipe. However, remember that these cubes tend to be larger, so you may need to cut them into smaller, 1-inch cubes before tossing them in your seasoning mixture. 
        • Olive oil: I use olive oil to help my seasoning mix adhere to the butternut squash and give each cube a beautifully roasted exterior. However, you may also use avocado oil or coconut oil if you prefer.
        • Garlic powder: Though both have a robust garlicky flavor, I recommend using garlic powder instead of minced garlic for this recipe. Garlic powder allows for a more even flavor coating, ensuring every bite of your squash explodes with a rich, gourmet taste.
        • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to give your air fryer butternut squash cubes a deliciously savory, sophisticated flavor.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Other spices: Want to infuse your air-fried squash with warm fall flavors? Add one teaspoon of ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, and a pinch of nutmeg to your seasoning mix for a fall-ready side no one can resist.
        • Sweetener: For a sweeter version of this recipe, prepare your air fryer butternut squash with a teaspoon of brown sugar, maple syrup, or coconut sugar—tossed in with your other seasonings. I recommend using a small amount of sweetener (no more than 1 teaspoon), as doing so might caramelize or burn the squash while it is air frying. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can drizzle it with maple syrup over the air-fried butternut squash after the cooking is completed.
        • Fresh herbs: Add a light, herbaceous flavor to your recipe by sprinkling your squash with whatever fresh herbs pair with your main dish, such as parsley, sage, rosemary, or thyme.

        How to Air Fry Butternut Squash?

        Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple instructions. In six steps and fifteen minutes, your squash will come out delectably caramelized, rich, and soft.

        1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F. If you bought your squash as a whole, cut it into cubes using our guide on how to cut butternut squash.
        The steps to making butternut squash in air fryer are laid out in a collage of photos.
        1. Toss the cubed butternut squash: Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add the ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup (or sweetener of choice) to the mix. Then, toss the ingredients to ensure each butternut squash cube has an even coating of the seasonings.
        2. Transfer the seasoned butternut squash: Place the cubed butternut squash into the air fryer basket, ensuring they lie in a single layer. If your cubes don’t all fit, air fry them in two batches.
        3. Cook: Air fry the butternut squash for 15 minutes or until fork tender, shaking the basket halfway through.
        4. Check for doneness: I think the best way to check doneness (and tenderness) when air frying butternut squash is to pierce a cube with a knife. The batch is ready to eat if the blade gently enters and exits the air fryer squash cube. If the cube is still tough, cook the basket in one-minute increments until done.
        5. Serve: Once you’ve roasted the butternut squash in your air fryer, transfer the cooked cubes to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the squash with a teaspoon of maple syrup for additional sweetness.

        How to Make Ahead and Store It

        It’s no secret that air fryer-roasted butternut squash is best on the day you make it. However, these pro storage tips will ensure that no bite will go to waste when putting away your leftover squash.

        • Store: When storing your butternut squash, first let the leftovers reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat your air-roasted squash, place it in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.

        Ways to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash

        When you air fry butternut squash cubes, you’ll unlock countless other recipes to fill your table with sweet, savory, and garden-fresh flavors. Below are just a few of my favorite ways to incorporate this winter squash into my menus:

        • Serve it as a healthy Thanksgiving side dish: What better way to celebrate the holiday season than with air fryer winter squash? This hassle-free recipe makes for the perfect Thanksgiving side dish, complementing your favorite holiday mains with gorgeous color, caramelized taste, and simple prep.
        • Add it to salads: This recipe makes the most delicious crispy roasted squash, which pairs beautifully with any of your fall salads. I especially like using it in Ina’s Butternut Squash Salad or Ottolenghi’s Butternut Squash Feta Salad for a surprisingly complex, rich, and healthy dish.
        • Turn it into soups: Tender, mild, and exquisitely caramelized, air-roasted butternut squash is one of my favorite recipes to add to creamy soups. My Thai Butternut Squash Soup is a vegan dish brimming with aromatic, nutty flavors, while Butternut Squash Chicken Soup will warm your belly with a hearty, nutritious taste.
        • Add it to pasta or pizza as a topping: Believe it or not, air fryer cubed butternut squash makes for the perfect addition to all your Italian favorites, including pasta and pizza recipes. With this easy air fryer recipe, you can add a sumptuously sweet flavor to all your go-to weeknight meals.

        Expert Tips

        You don’t have to be a Food Network star to roast butternut squash in the air fryer. This easy guide will give you expert guidance on everything from slicing tips to seasoning suggestions.

        • Equal-sized cubes: For best results, it is imperative that your squash cubes are similar in size. There’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of your butternut squash cubes, so keeping your cubes uniform will ensure no piece of squash comes out over- or under-cooked.
        • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket: The key to proper air frying is adequate air circulation throughout the chamber. Therefore, you mustn’t overcrowd your basket when cooking, arranging your squash in a single even layer so that hot air reaches each side of your squash cubes. This positioning will ensure your squash cubes develop an even golden brown exterior and tender insides. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to cook your butternut squash in two batches if they don’t all fit in the basket.
        • Shake halfway through: Be sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the cooking process to ensure even air frying on all sides of the butternut squash.
        • Each air fryer is different: We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Pot Air Fryer, and the results were very similar. However, keep in mind that each brand of air fryer is different. Therefore,  your butternut squash may need more or less time, depending on the brand you own. When in doubt, check the doneness halfway through the cooking process by inserting a sharp knife into your squash and continue to cook it in one-minute increments until fork-tender.
        • Check doneness: Remember that this recipe’s recommended cooking time may change depending on your air fryer model and the size of your squash cubes. To check whether your butternut squash is ready to serve, I recommend using the “knife test.” In other words, insert a knife into one of your squash cubes and see whether it smoothly enters and exits the veggie. If it does, your air fryer squash is ready to eat.
        • Sugar: If you add sugar to your recipe, I recommend starting with a small amount— one teaspoon at most—to avoid over-caramelizing. If you prefer your butternut squash sweeter, you may drizzle or sprinkle it with additional sugar right after removing it from the air fryer (while it’s still hot).
        • Experiment with seasoning: Feel free to experiment with your squash’s seasoning blend based on what you’re serving it with. Depending on your menu, you may consider adding additional ingredients, like ground cinnamon, brown sugar, parsley, or even ground cumin.
        • Air fryer butternut squash fries: If you want to air fry butternut squash fries, cut your squash lengthwise into French fry-shaped pieces. Then, follow the recipe as directed, air frying them for 15 minutes at 375 degrees F.

        FAQs

        Want to know more about roasting squash in the air fryer? This handy FAQ will answer all your most pressing questions, whether you’re wondering about recommended cooking time or proper veggie prep.

        Can you air fry butternut squash?

        Absolutely! Air frying squash is an easy way to transform your winter squash into a deliciously tender, caramelized, and flavorful side. Even better, you can even use your air-fried squash in other recipes to cut down on prep time.

        Should I peel butternut squash before air frying?

        Yes, I recommend peeling your squash using a vegetable peeler before air frying it to eliminate unwanted toughness and ensure even cooking.

        How long to air fry butternut squash?

        When cut into 1-inch cubes, air fry your squash for about 15 minutes at 375 degrees F., shaking the basket halfway through. Remember, though, that every air fryer is different, so your squash may need more or less time, depending on what brand you own. To check for doneness, insert a knife into a cube and ensure it enters and exits the squash easily.

        Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Also Like

        Preparing air-roast butternut squash is an exceptionally tender, flavorful, and quick way to pack nutrition into your weekday meals. For even more delectable veggie recipes, this collection has just a few fan favorites that will satisfy the whole family.

        If you try this Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Air fryer roasted butternut squash on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Air Fryer Butternut Squash Recipe

        Made with just a few simple ingredients, this Air Fryer Butternut Squash makes a great side dish or addition to salads, pasta, and pizza dishes. With many seasoning options, you can take this basic recipe and customize it to your liking.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 90kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 6 cups butternut squash cubes* from a 2.5 pounds squash (peeled)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Optional Add-ins

        • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin optional
        • Pinch of nutmeg optional
        • 1 teaspoon maple syrup or brown sugar plus more for drizzling if preferred

        Instructions

        • Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
        • Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup. Give it a good toss, ensuring that all the butternut squash cubes are coated with the seasonings.
        • Transfer the seasoned butternut squash into the air fryer basket in a single layer. If they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
        • Air fry for 15 minutes or until fork tender, making sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the process.
        • To check tenderness, pierce a cube with a knife. If it goes in and out gently, the squash is done. If not fully tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.
        • Transfer to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the butternut squash cubes with a teaspoon (or more) of maple syrup.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe, made with 2 ½ pounds of squash, yields about 5 to 6 cups of air-fried cubed butternut squash, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Halved Squash: If you prefer to use halved squash instead of cubed squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves recipe.
        • Cutting butternut squash: If you are new to cutting squash, check out our guide on How To Cut Butternut Squash into cubes.
        • Evenly sized: For best results, it is important that your squash cubes are similar in size. Please keep in mind that there’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of the cubes, so keeping them uniform will ensure they are evenly cooked.
        • Adding sweetener: We intentionally limited the amount of sugar (maple syrup or brown sugar) to a small amount (only 1 teaspoon) as too much sugar might cause squash cubes to over-caramelize and potentially burn. If you prefer your dish to be sweeter, feel free to drizzle it with maple syrup after it is cooked (while it is still warm.)
        • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place the cubed squash in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.
        • Frozen Butternut Squash Cubes: We also tested this recipe using a 15-ounce bag (standard size) of frozen butternut squash cubes that we bought from the grocery store. If you prefer to use frozen squash, you can follow the recipe as written but adjust the amount of oil and seasoning based on the weight of your squash. In our case, we halved the seasoning and oil. You do not need to wait for it to thaw. Just extend the air frying time to 20 minutes. Finally, be aware that because the butternut squash is frozen, when you air fry it, it will lose most of its moisture and the cubes will become smaller.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 394mg | Potassium: 507mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 14886IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/feed/ 0
        Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/#comments Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:03:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71692 Ingredients Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get…]]>
        Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Butternut squash: The most essential ingredient in this air fryer recipe is—you guessed it!—butternut squash. Begin by selecting a butternut squash with a firm texture, matte surface, and no bruises. Then, cut it in half lengthwise with a sharp knife. Though slicing butternut squash may seem daunting, you’ll find all the pro tips you need in my foolproof guide on How to Cut Butternut Squash. You also don’t need to peel your squash before using it in this recipe, though you may use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin if you prefer.
        • Olive oil: Olive oil is crucial to giving your air roast butternut squash a moist, tender, and perfectly crisp taste. However, you may also use any other mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, melted butter, or ghee.
        • Seasonings: All you need is garlic powder, kosher salt and pepper to bring out the natural flavors of the squash. Optionally—depending on your recipe—you may also sprinkle your squash with cinnamon, nutmeg, cayenne pepper, and pumpkin spice for an extra warm, sweet, and spicy taste.
        • Optional sweetener: Though not necessary, you may also add light sweeteners like maple syrup or brown sugar to your whole squash to enhance its caramelization and give it a sweet flavor.

        How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves

        There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour.

        1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
        Person showing how to cut butternut squash in half.
        1. Cut the butternut squash: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Be sure to hold it firmly around its middle with your non-dominant hand. Using a sharp chef’s knife in your free hand, trim off the stem by cutting off about half an inch. Then, while holding it in its side position, cut the squash in half lengthwise through its center, beginning from the top and working your way to the bottom. Remember that you may have to jerk the knife back and forth while applying pressure to loosen the blade while cutting. Use a spoon to scoop out the seeds and pulp from the core of the cut squash. You may either discard them or save the seeds to roast later.
        Images showing how to air fryer halved butternut squash.
        1. Season the squash halves: Brush the cut side of the squash halves with olive oil and season them with garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
        2. Air fry the butternut squash: Place the halved squash cut side down into the basket of the air fryer and cook them for 22 minutes.
        3. Flip the squash: Flip the squash halves so their cut sides face up and cook them for an additional 10 minutes.
        4. Check for doneness: Insert a sharp knife into the neck (i.e., the vertical top) of the squash. If the knife pierces the flesh easily, it’s ready to remove from the heat. If the knife encounters some resistance, continue cooking the squash in one-minute increments until done.

        How to Store and Reheat?

        Making this air-fried butternut squash recipe is one of the easiest ways to enjoy savory, tender squash all week long. None of your favorite veggies will go to waste with these expert storage tips.

        • Storage: You can store your leftover squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash leftovers, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.

        How to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash Halves in Recipes?

        Exquisitely tender and expertly flavored, there are dozens of butternut squash recipes to make in the air fryer. These tasty cooking ideas will fill your table with rich, flavorful meals no matter when the craving strikes.

        • Use the flesh: My favorite way to warm up during the chilly winter months is to transform this savory air fryer butternut squash recipe into a warm, hearty meal. My Butternut Squash Soup is luscious, bright, and savory, while my vegan Thai Curry Butternut Squash Soup is a faster way to fill your bowl with bold, aromatic flavors. You can even turn your air-roasted butternut squash into a rich and creamy pasta sauce or a decadent pie filling for a fan-favorite Butternut Squash Pie.
        • Stuff it: Visually stunning and packed with nutrition, Stuffed Squash is a gourmet meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.
        • Mashed butternut squash: Transform your air-fried squash halves into the perfect Thanksgiving side dish using a five-star mashed butternut squash recipe. Like my Sweet Potato Mash, this recipe is fluffy, rich, and flavorful—but with half the calories!

        Expert Tips

        You don’t have to be a squash expert to make a delicious side dish fit for a restaurant. These pro tips will ensure your air fryer butternut squash recipe is rich, caramelized, and tender every time.

        • Size of your squash matters: When making roasted butternut squash in the air fryer, you must select a squash that will fit in the basket of your air fryer. Therefore, take a minute when selecting your vegetable to ensure it is an appropriate size for your type of air fryer.
        • Air frying time: How long it takes to cook butternut squash in the air fryer may vary depending on the size of your squash and the brand of your air fryer. In this recipe, I cook my squash halves for 22 minutes cut-side down and another 10 minutes after flipping. However, I recommend checking the doneness of your air-fried squash using the knife test—inserting a knife into the neck of your squash—to tell if your veggie is appropriately tender. If the knife encounters resistance when inserted into the squash’s flesh, continue cooking it in one-minute increments until fork tender.
        • No need to peel: You don’t have to peel your butternut squash halves before adding them to the air fryer. Not only does keeping the skin cut down on prep time, but it also helps give you a good grip when scooping out the flesh to use in other recipes. However, you may peel the squash before air frying if preferred.
        • Start with skin side down: The key to cooking butternut squash halves in the air fryer is beginning the cooking process by placing the squash slices skin side down. This orientation ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
        • Add the sweetener at the last minute: If you choose to make air fryer butternut squash halves with maple syrup, brown sugar, or other sweeteners, wait until the last 5-10 minutes of cooking before adding the ingredient. Limiting these sweeteners’ exposure to high heat will help prevent burning and over-caramelization.

        FAQs

        Have more questions about this easy air fryer recipe? This simple guide has everything you need, whether you’re wondering about the air frying process or proper squash preparation.

        Can you air fry butternut squash?

        Absolutely! Air-roasted butternut squash (whether you cook it in cubes or whole) is a tasty, tender, and quick alternative to oven-roasting, and it even helps free up oven space when preparing multiple dishes at a time.

        Do butternut squash halves need to be peeled before cooking?

        No, you don’t have to remove the butternut squash skin before cooking. Though some prefer removing the skin beforehand, leaving the skin on helps trap moisture in the veggie during the cooking process, and it makes it easier to scoop out the flesh if you plan on using it for other recipes.

        Other Butternut Squash Recipes You Might Also Like

        Make the most of squash season by filling your kitchen with all your favorite butternut squash recipes. These recipes have everything you need, from delicious holiday sides to easy weeknight meals.

        If you try this Air Fried Halved Butternut Squash recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves Recipe

        If cooking the whole butternut squash sounds daunting, try cooking them in the air fryer. The good news is that with this recipe, making Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves is not only easy but also convenient compared to other methods.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 32 minutes
        Total Time 37 minutes
        Servings 1 butternut squash
        Calories 379kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 1 whole butternut squash approximately 2.5 pounds, cut in half lengthwise
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Pre-heat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off. While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. As you are cutting, you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it.*
        • Brush the cut sides of the butternut squash with olive oil and season with garlic powder, salt and pepper.
        • Place the butternut squash halves cut side down* and cook for 22 minutes.
        • Flip the butternut squash halves and cook for an additional 10 minutes.
        • Insert a knife in the “neck” of the squash. If it pierces easily, it should be ready. If it does not feel tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes one whole butternut squash with two halves, which is good for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cutting the squash: It is imperative that you use a sharp knife and take your time as you are cutting the squash. If you are new to the process, be sure to check out our how-to guide to cutting butternut squash like a pro.
        • Sweetener: If you prefer, you can use a sweetener like maple syrup or brown sugar. However, we recommend brushing (or sprinkling) your butternut squash halves with the sweetener of your choice in the last 5 minutes of air frying to prevent over-caramelization or burning.
        • Start with skin side down ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
        • Storage: You can store your leftover halved squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash halves, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.
        • Cubed Butternut Squash: If you prefer to air fry cubed butternut squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 379kcal | Carbohydrates: 89g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1194mg | Potassium: 2665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 79728IU | Vitamin C: 158mg | Calcium: 364mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/feed/ 2
        How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/#respond Mon, 16 Oct 2023 23:02:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71239 We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like…]]>

        We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time.

        If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole grains, including Black Rice, Bulgur Wheat, Quinoa, and Wild Rice.

        Cooked jasmine brown rice in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Jasmine Brown Rice

        In and of itself, jasmine brown rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. The additional ingredients add that much more flavor, character, and color. We will need:

        • Rice: Brown jasmine rice, also referred to as whole-grain jasmine rice, brown Thai rice, jasmati brown rice, or unpolished rice, is a type of long-grain brown rice coming from Thailand and Southeast Asia. Its distinctive light brown color comes from retaining the outer layers, which are removed, along with the germ, to create white jasmine rice. Because jasmine brown rice is a whole-grain rice, it has a slightly matte finish, nutty taste, and chewy texture. You can find it in the global section of the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or even online. My favorite brands are Lundberg organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). We tested this recipe using these two brands of rice.
        • Cooking liquid: Water is the most common cooking liquid for rice and offers the easiest approach. With that being said, you can add more flavor by swapping the water for Chicken Stock, Vegetable Broth, or Veggie Scrap Stock instead.
        Ingredients to make the recipe from the top view.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the below additions are optional, I chose to use them in the recipe for extra flavor. Luckily, they are ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

        • Olive oil or butter: To give the rice a glossy sheen and extra flavor, add 1-2 tablespoons olive or butter right into the cooking liquid.
        • Kosher salt: Adding salt at the beginning of cooking will enhance the natural flavor of the rice.
        • Black pepper: For some slight heat, I like to add freshly ground black pepper after the rice is done cooking.
        • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of fresh parsley at the end adds both color and flavor. However, feel free to adjust the herbs you choose based on the dish you are serving it with. I usually pair it with different herbs that complement Asian flavors, like cilantro, mint, basil, or scallions.

        Brown Jasmine Rice Cooking Instructions (Stovetop)

        This Thai brown jasmine rice recipe is a cinch to make. Since brown rice takes longer to cook than white rice, the hardest part is waiting for it to finish on the stove. Here’s how I like to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to cook brown jasmine rice on the stove top.
        1. Rince rice: Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
        2. Boil water: In a heavy-bottomed, medium saucepan over high heat, add 2 cups of cooking liquid, along with the olive oil and salt (if using). Bring to a boil.
        3. Add rice: During our recipe testing, we found that the best brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio is 1:2. Therefore, as soon as your cooking liquid comes to a boil, add 1 cup of rinsed and drained rice to the cooking liquid.
        4. Cover and cook: Cover with the lid, and reduce the heat to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid. After 30 minutes, open the lid and check to see if the liquid is fully absorbed. If not, continue to simmer in 3-minute increments until the excess water has been absorbed.
        Cooked jasmine brown rice being fluffed.
        1. Rest: Remove from the heat and rest the rice for 10 minutes with the lid on.
        2. Fluff and serve: Gently fluff the rice with a fork. Season with black pepper and parsley, if desired. Serve.

        How to Store and Reheat

        Stovetop brown jasmine rice is a wonderful meal prep recipe. I like to keep a container of this whole grain in either the fridge or freezer so I can have a hearty side dish ready at a moment’s notice. To store properly, simply:

        • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
        • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet (this speeds up the process and prevents the formation of ice crystals in the freezer). Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. (If you are big into meal prep, package in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
        • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
        • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between, until warmed through. Or steam or stir-fry in a skillet on the stove.

        Other Methods of Cooking Brown Jasmine Rice

        Brown Jasmine rice is just like any other rice, in that it can be cooked following a different cooking method. Some other methods of cooking Thai jasmine rice include:

        • In a Rice Cooker: Follow the ratio of 1 ½ cups liquid to 1 cup of uncooked rice. Place in your rice cooker and set it to the ‘Rice’ setting (or ‘Brown Rice’ setting, if your cooker has it). When done cooking, fluff it and serve.
        • In the Instant Pot: Follow the ratio of 1 ¼ cups liquid to 1 cup of rice. Place in the pressure cooker, set the vent to ‘Sealing’ position, select ‘Manual’ on high pressure, and set the cooking time to 20 minutes. Once done, allow the pressure to naturally release for 10 minutes, then manually release the remaining pressure. Fluff it with a fork and serve. For more information, check out our detailed post on cooking brown jasmine rice in the instant pot.

        To make it easier, below is a breakdown of the brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio for each method of cooking:

        MethodRice AmountWater AmountCook TimeNotes
        Stove Top1 cup2 cups30-40 minutesCheck after 30 minutes.
        Rice Cooker1 cup1 1/2 cups40-60 minutesThe timing might change based on your rice cooker.
        Pressure Cooker1 cup1 1/4 cups23 minutesPlus, 10 min each to come to pressure and release.

        Serving Suggestions

        Brown rice is an incredibly versatile side dish that can be served just as is with stir-fried vegetables, added to soup and salads, turned into grain bowls, and in some cases, even transformed into dessert-like rice pudding. Make it a great addition to any of your favorite meat, chicken, seafood, and vegetarian meals. A few of my favorites are:

        Expert Tips

        For the best brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to follow these expert tips:

        • Do not skip rinsing the rice: Rinsing removes the excess starch on the coating of the rice, resulting in light and fluffy grains. Place the rice in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse under cool running water until the water runs clear.
        • Keep the lid on: The key is to cook the rice over consistent heat, low and slow, so you want to refrain from opening the lid while cooking. In other words, no peeking.
        • Use a thick-bottomed saucepan: The thick bottom of the pan serves as a protective barrier, preventing the rice from burning or sticking. In addition, it ensures even heat distribution, resulting in perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice with uniform consistency.
        • Make sure to rest: The key to perfectly cooked rice is resting it for 10 minutes, with the lid still on, as soon as you remove it from the heat. This essentially steams the rice all the way through.
        • Fluff: When ready, use a fork to gently fluff the rice. Doing so helps release steam and separate the grains, resulting in a soft, airy texture.
        • Get creative: Don’t be shy when it comes to cooking rice the way you want it. Use any cooking liquid of your choice, throw in some aromatics like garlic cloves and bay leaves, and finish with herbs and seasonings like parsley, cilantro, basil, chives, red pepper flakes, and more.

        FAQs

        How long does it take to cook brown jasmine rice?

        The cooking time for brown jasmine rice is anywhere between 30-40 minutes when cooking on the stove. Be mindful of the cooking liquid and cook until all the liquid is absorbed and the rice is tender.

        Is jasmine rice whole grain?

        There are two varieties of jasmine rice: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice is considered a whole grain because it contains the endosperm, bran, and germ.

        Is jasmine rice brown rice?

        Jasmine rice comes in two forms: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice boasts a tan color, a chewy texture, and an earthy flavor. On the other hand, white jasmine rice has a white appearance, with a tender yet slightly sticky texture, and is accompanied by a delightful floral aroma.

        What does brown jasmine rice look like?

        Brown jasmine rice is tan to light brown in color, with long and slender grains. The finish is somewhat matte, thanks to the presence of the bran layer.

        If you try this Jasmine Brown Rice Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice

        Here’s the foolproof recipe for perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice on the stovetop. No special equipment is needed for this gluten-free and vegan side dish.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Thai Cuisine
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Resting time 10 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 203kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups water*
        • 1 cup Brown Jasmine Rice* thoroughly rinsed*

        Optional add-ins:

        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped, optional

        Instructions

        • Place your cooking liquid in a medium-sized saucepan over high heat. If using, add in olive oil and salt as well. Cover and bring it to a boil.
        • Add the rice, stir to combine, and bring it to a rolling boil. Put the lid on and turn the heat down to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid.
        • At the end of the 30 minutes of simmering, open the lid and check whether or not the liquid is fully absorbed. If it hasn’t, then continue to simmer at 3-minute increments until no liquid is left.
        • Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes with the lid on.
        • When ready to serve, gently fluff it with a fork.
        • If preferred, season with black pepper and garnish with chopped parsley. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields about 3 ½ cups cooked. A side serving is suggested at ½-1 cup, so it would be good for approximately 4 servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving.
        • Cooking liquid: If you want to add more flavor, you can vegetable stock or chicken broth in place of water.
        • Do not skip on rinsing: Rinsing the rice is an important step as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
        • Jasmine Brown Rice: We tested this recipe using two different national brands: Lundbery Organic Jasmine Brown Rice and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Rice. They yielded similar results in terms of cooking time and the amount of cooked rice. However, please keep in mind that the age of the rice plays an important role in the final product. The fresher the rice, the more fragrant it will be. Additionally, if you decide to purchase brown jasmine rice from the bulk bin, the time of cooking might be different. We recommend using the visual cues we listed within the blog post to gauge doneness.
        • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
        • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. If cooking Thai jasmine brown rice is a part of your meal prep, I recommend packaging it in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need. Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
        • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
        • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, mixing each time in between until warmed through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 591mg | Potassium: 112mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 0
        Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/#comments Mon, 16 Oct 2023 22:54:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71283 I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is…]]>

        I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite.

        Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more personality. We will need:

        Ingredients laid out from the top view.
        • Brown jasmine rice: Brown jasmine rice is a long grain rice with the outer coating (bran and germ) still intact. Look for brown rice, sometimes labeled Thai jasmine brown rice, in the international aisle at the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or online sellers, such as Amazon. My favorite brands are Lundberg Organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). This instant pot jasmine brown rice was tested using these two brands of rice.
        • Cooking liquid: Use water for a clean, neutral flavor, or opt for Vegetable Broth, Chicken Stock, or Veggie Scrap Stock. Omit the salt if using stock instead of water.
        • Olive oil: A mere teaspoon of olive oil gives the rice a nice glossy sheen. Feel free to swap it out for avocado oil, coconut oil, or ghee.
        • Kosher salt: A little salt enhances the natural flavor of the rice and makes it that much more delicious.
        • Black pepper: Freshly ground black pepper is best sprinkled on top at the end of cooking to preserve those natural oils.
        • Fresh herbs: While not mentioned in the recipe card, fresh herbs or complimentary flavors really enhance the flavor of the rice and give balance to your meal. A few popular herbs and seasonings include fresh cilantro, basil, mint, green onions, lime juice, or sesame seeds.

        Brown Jasmine Rice to Water Ratio for Pressure Cooker

        If this is the first time cooking jasmine brown rice in the Instant Pot, there are keynotes to point out when it comes to the rice-to-water ratio. Here’s what I have discovered:

        • Firmer rice: If you prefer your rice on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
        • Softer rice: If you prefer soft rice that is bouncy with a chewy texture, use a 1:1.25 ratio. As in, for every 1 cup of rice, use 1 ¼ cups of cooking liquid and set the cooking time to 23 minutes (this is my preferred rice and the recipe that is written in the recipe card).

        How to Cook Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot?

        This Instapot brown jasmine rice recipe is so easy and virtually hands-free you’ll wonder why you never started cooking rice in the pressure cooker in the first place. Much like the rice setting on your rice cooker, this Instant Pot jasmine rice recipe is ready after the push of a button. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to cook jasmine brown rice in Instant Pot.
        1. Rinse the rice: Place the rice in a colander and rinse under cold water, stirring with your fingers (or a spoon) until water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
        2. Add ingredients to Instant Pot: Into the steel inner pot, add brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt. Give it a good stir.
        3. Close lid: Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
        4. Pressure cook: Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes of pressure cooking time. It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. 
        5. Release pressure: Natural pressure release (NPR) for 10 minutes, and then manually release the remaining pressure.
        Jasmati rice in instant pot insert being fluffed by a person.
        1. Fluff and serve: Carefully remove the Instant Pot lid and fluff with a fork. Season with black pepper and serve.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

        This Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe bodes wonderful for meal prep, or simply any time you want to have whole grains on hand. Here’s how I like to store, freeze and reheat:

        • Storage: Leftover rice will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. To speed up the cooling process, spread the cooked brown rice out on a baking sheet (this prevents clumps from forming as the rice cools).
        • Freezing: Once completely cool, transfer to a heavy-duty freezer bag or freezer-safe airtight container with some room at the top for expansion. (If you regularly meal prep, package the rice in 1-2 cup portions. This way, you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
        • Thawing: Thaw frozen brown rice overnight in the refrigerator.
        • Reheating: Add a few tablespoons of water to the rice. Then, steam or stir-fry with your recipe in a skillet on the stove or microwave on high in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, until warm.

        What to Serve it With?

        Instant pot Brown rice is a nutritious and delicious side dish that can be served with vegetables alongside any main dish. With a delicious nutty flavor, it pairs beautifully with meat or vegetable-based dishes. Some of my favorites are:

        Expert Tips

        For the absolute best Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to take note of these expert tips:

        • Rinse before cooking: Rinsing the brown rice prior to cooking washes away excess starch on the surface, resulting in perfectly fluffy brown rice. The best way is to rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer, stirring with your hands or a spoon, until the water runs clear.
        • Natural release: When the cooking time is up, allow the Instant Pot to naturally release the pressure for about 10 minutes. This allows time for the rice to cook further through.
        • Do not overfill: If you are doubling or tripling the recipe, avoid filling the steel pot more than halfway. Rice expands when cooked, and too much starch can clog the vent when the pressure is released.
        • Fluff with a fork: Make sure to fluff the rice with a fork as soon as it is done cooking. Fluffing actually helps steam to release, resulting in a lighter, softer texture.

        FAQs

        How long to cook brown jasmine rice in a pressure cooker?

        Cook time depends on the desired texture. For firm brown rice, set the pressure cooking time to 20 minutes and adjust the ratio to 1:1. For a softer texture, set the pressure cooking time to 23 minutes and use a 1:1.25 ratio of rice to liquid.

        Should I soak brown jasmine rice before cooking?

        I do not soak brown rice, but according to Healthline, soaking brown rice helps to remove some of the naturally occurring phytic acid (antinutrients) present in whole grains. This makes it easier for digestion and promotes increased nutrient absorption. Soaking brown rice also reduces the cooking time.

        How does brown jasmine rice taste compared to white rice?

        Brown rice has a slightly more earthier and nuttier flavor compared to white jasmine rice because brown jasmine rice retains the bran layers and germ, which contributes to its richer taste.

        Other Rice Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you are a fan of rice as much as I am, you might like the following basic rice recipes from the archives:

        If you try this basic recipe for Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Pressure cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe

        Put your electric pressure cooker to use with this Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice recipe. It comes together with only 5 minutes of hands-on time and cooks perfectly fluffy and delicious every time.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Thai Cuisine
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 23 minutes
        Pressure time 17 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 180kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup Brown Jasmine rice* rinsed thoroughly
        • 1 ¼ cup water vegetable stock, or chicken stock
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional

        Instructions

        • Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds while stirring with your fingers or a spoon.
        • Place brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt in the insert of the Instant Pot. Stir to combine.
        • Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
        • Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes* of pressure cooking time.
        • It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes, and then manually release the rest of the pressure.
        • Carefully remove the lid. Fluff it with a fork.
        • Season with black pepper and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields approximately about 3 cups of cooked long-grain brown rice, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Rice: We tested this recipe using two national brown jasmine rice brands, Lundberg and Mahatma. They delivered similar results in terms of cooking time, taste, and texture. Please keep in mind that the timing might be slightly different based on the brand.
        • Cooking liquid: If you want your rice to be flavorful, you can vegetable broth or chicken stock in place of water.
        • Rice to water ratio and time of cooking: The recipe, as written (1 to 1 ¼ rice to water ratio cooked for 23 minutes), yields soft and chewy brown rice. However, if you prefer it to be on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
        • Storage: If you have any leftovers, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freezing: To freeze, cool completely by spreading the rice on a baking sheet. Transfer to a freezer-safe airtight container, label, date, and freeze for up to a month.
        • Reheat: You can reheat it in a microwave-safe bowl in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until it is thoroughly heated.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 180kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 2